Logiq 9 SM

P R E L I M I N A R Y 1/18/10
GEHC_FRNT_CVR.FM
GE Healthcare
LOGIQ 9
Basic Service Manual
Part Number: 2294853-100

Revision: 14
1/18/10
P R E L I M I N A R Y
GE HEALTHCARE
PRECAUTIONS_AND_REV_A
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Important Precautions
THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.

IF A CUSTOMERS SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE OTHER
THAN ENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMERS RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE
TRANSLATION SERVICES.
WARNING DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS SERVICE
(EN)
MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD.
FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE SERVICE
PROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK, MECHANICAL
OR OTHER HAZARDS.
CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE NEST DISPONIBLE QUEN ANGLAIS.

SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE AUTRE
LANGUE QUE LANGLAIS, CEST AU CLIENT QUIL INCOMBE DE LE FAIRE
TRADUIRE.
AVERTISSEMENT
(FR)
NE PAS TENTER DINTERVENTION SUR LES QUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LE
MANUEL SERVICE NA PAS T CONSULT ET COMPRIS.
LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRANER CHEZ LE
TECHNICIEN, LOPRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES DES
DANGERS LECTRIQUES, MCANIQUES OU AUTRES.
DIESES KUNDENDIENST-HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN ENGLISCHER

SPRACHE.
FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE BENTIGT,
IST ES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN FR EINE ENTSPRECHENDE BERSETZUNG
ZU SORGEN.
WARNUNG WARTEN SIE DIESES GERT NUR, WENN SIE DIE ENTSPRECHENDEN
(DE) ANWWEISUNGEN IM KUNDENDIENST-HANDBUCH GELESEN HABEN UND
NACHVOLLZIEHEN KNNEN.
WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU VERLETZUNGEN
DES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES BEDIENERS ODER DES PATIENTEN
DURCH ELEKTRISCHE SCHLGE, MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGE
GEFAHREN KOMMEN.
i
1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SLO EXISTE EN INGLS.

SI ALGN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEHC SOLICITA UN IDIOMA
QUE NO SEA EL INGLS, LA TRADUCCIN ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL
CLIENTE.
AVISO NO SE DEBER DAR SERVICIO TCNICO AL EQUIPO, SIN HABER
(ES) CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO.
LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR A QUE EL
PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL OPERADOR O EL PACIENTE SUFRAN
LESIONES PROVOCADAS POR CAUSAS ELCTRICAS, MECNICAS O DE
OTRA NATURALEZA.
ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTNCIA TCNICA S SE ENCONTRA DISPONVEL EM

INGLS.
SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIO DE ASSISTNCIA TCNICA, QUE NO A
GEHC, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, DA
ATENO RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIOS DE TRADUO.
(PT) NO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E
COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTNCIA TCNICA.
O NO CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE POR EM PERIGO A SEGURANA
DO TCNICO, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE DEVIDO A CHOQUES ELTRICOS,
MECNICOS OU OUTROS.
IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE DISPONIBILE SOLTANTO IN

INGLESE.
SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEHC RICHIEDE IL
MANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE TENUTO A PROVVEDERE
DIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE.
AVVERTENZA SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELLAPPARECCHIATURA SOLO DOPO
(IT)
AVER CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO IL
CONTENUTO.
NON TENERE CONTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA POTREBBE FAR
COMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO LESIONI ALLADDETTO ALLA
MANUTENZIONE, ALLUTILIZZATORE ED AL PAZIENTE PER FOLGORAZIONE
ELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI RISCHI.
KESOLEV TEENINDUSJUHEND ON SAADAVAL AINULT INGLISE KEELES.

KUI KLIENDITEENINDUSE OSUTAJA NUAB JUHENDIT INGLISE KEELEST
ERINEVAS KEELES, VASTUTAB KLIENT TLKETEENUSE OSUTAMISE EEST.
HOIATUS RGE RITAGE SEADMEID TEENINDADA ENNE EELNEVALT KESOLEVA
(ET)
TEENINDUSJUHENDIGA TUTVUMIST JA SELLEST ARU SAAMIST.
KESOLEVA HOIATUSE EIRAMINE VIB PHJUSTADA TEENUSEOSUTAJA,
OPERAATORI VI PATSIENDI VIGASTAMIST ELEKTRILGI, MEHAANILISE
VI MUU OHU TAGAJRJEL.
ii -
1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
VAROITUS
(FI)
ESSI JNUSTUHANDBK ER EINGNGU FANLEG ENSKU.

EF JNUSTUAILI VISKIPTAMANNS ARFNAST ANNARS TUNGUMLS EN
ENSKU, ER A BYRG VISKIPTAMANNS A TVEGA INGU.
REYNI EKKI A JNUSTA TKI NEMA EFTIR A HAFA SKOA OG
VIVRUN
(IS)
SKILI ESSA JNUSTUHANDBK.
EF EKKI ER FARI A ESSARI VIVRUN GETUR A VALDI MEISLUM
JNUSTUVEITANDA, STJRNANDA EA SJKLINGS VEGNA RAFLOSTS,
VLRNNAR EA ANNARRAR HTTU.
iii
1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
DENNE SERVICEMANUAL FINDES KUN P ENGELSK.

HVIS EN KUNDES TEKNIKER HAR BRUG FOR ET ANDET SPROG END
ENGELSK, ER DET KUNDENS ANSVAR AT SRGE FOR OVERSTTELSE.
FORSG IKKE AT SERVICERE UDSTYRET MEDMINDRE
ADVARSEL
(DA)
DENNE SERVICEMANUAL ER BLEVET LST OG FORSTET.
MANGLENDE OVERHOLDELSE AF DENNE ADVARSEL KAN MEDFRE SKADE
P GRUND AF ELEKTRISK, MEKANISK ELLER ANDEN FARE FOR
TEKNIKEREN, OPERATREN ELLER PATIENTEN.
DEZE ONDERHOUDSHANDLEIDING IS ENKEL IN HET ENGELS

VERKRIJGBAAR.
ALS HET ONDERHOUDSPERSONEEL EEN ANDERE TAAL VEREIST, DAN IS DE
KLANT VERANTWOORDELIJK VOOR DE VERTALING ERVAN.
PROBEER DE APPARATUUR NIET TE ONDERHOUDEN VOORDAT DEZE
WAARSCHUWING
(NL) ONDERHOUDSHANDLEIDING WERD GERAADPLEEGD EN BEGREPEN IS.
INDIEN DEZE WAARSCHUWING NIET WORDT OPGEVOLGD, ZOU HET
ONDERHOUDSPERSONEEL, DE OPERATOR OF EEN PATINT GEWOND
KUNNEN RAKEN ALS GEVOLG VAN EEN ELEKTRISCHE SCHOK,
MECHANISCHE OF ANDERE GEVAREN.
iv -
1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
DENNE SERVICEHNDBOKEN FINNES BARE P ENGELSK.

HVIS KUNDENS SERVICELEVERANDR TRENGER ET ANNET SPRK, ER DET
KUNDENS ANSVAR SRGE FOR OVERSETTELSE.
IKKE FORSK REPARERE UTSTYRET UTEN AT DENNE
ADVARSEL
(NO)
SERVICEHNDBOKEN ER LEST OG FORSTTT.
MANGLENDE HENSYN TIL DENNE ADVARSELEN KAN FRE TIL AT
SERVICELEVERANDREN, OPERATREN ELLER PASIENTEN SKADES P
GRUNN AV ELEKTRISK STT, MEKANISKE ELLER ANDRE FARER.
OSTRZEENIE
(PL)
v
1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
DEN HR SERVICEHANDBOKEN FINNS BARA TILLGNGLIG P ENGELSKA.

OM EN KUNDS SERVICETEKNIKER HAR BEHOV AV ETT ANNAT SPRK N
ENGELSKA ANSVARAR KUNDEN FR ATT TILLHANDAHLLA
VERSTTNINGSTJNSTER.
VARNING FRSK INTE UTFRA SERVICE P UTRUSTNINGEN OM DU INTE HAR LST
(SV) OCH FRSTR DEN HR SERVICEHANDBOKEN.
OM DU INTE TAR HNSYN TILL DEN HR VARNINGEN KAN DET RESULTERA I
SKADOR P SERVICETEKNIKERN, OPERATREN ELLER PATIENTEN TILL
FLJD AV ELEKTRISKA STTAR, MEKANISKA FAROR ELLER ANDRA FAROR.
vi -
1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
(JA)
(ZH-CN)
(KO)
vii
1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION
All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent write Damage In
Shipment on ALL copies of the freight or express bill BEFORE delivery is accepted or signed for by
a GE representative or hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be
reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the
contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company will not pay a claim
for damage if an inspection is not requested within this 14 day period.
CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT - FOR USA ONLY

All electrical Installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the
equipment shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of
electrical equipment, calibrations and testing shall be performed by qualified GE Healthcare personnel.
In performing all electrical work on these products, GE will use its own specially trained field engineers.
All of GEs electrical work on these products will comply with the requirements of the applicable
electrical codes.
The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GEs field engineers,
personnel of third-party service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform
electrical servicing on the equipment.
OMISSIONS & ERRORS

If there are any omissions, errors or suggestions for improving this documentation, please contact the
GE Healthcare Global Documentation Group with specific information listing the system type, manual
title, part number, revision number, page number and suggestion details. Mail the information to:
Service Documentation, 9900 Innovation Drive (RP-2123), Wauwatosa, WI 53226, USA.
GE Healthcare employees should use TRACKWISE to report all documentation errors or omissions.
SERVICE SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS

DANGER DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN
THIS EQUIPMENT. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN HANDLING, TESTING AND
ADJUSTING.
WARNING Use all Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) such as gloves, safety shoes, safety
glasses, and kneeling pad, to reduce the risk of injury.
For a complete review of all safety requirements, see the Chapter 1, Safety Considerations section of
the LOGIQ 9 Basic Service Manual (2294853-100).
viii -
1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
LEGAL NOTES
The contents of this publication may not be copied or duplicated in any form, in whole or in part, without
prior written permission of GE Healthcare.
GE Healthcare may revise this publication from time to time without written notice.
TRADEMARKS
All products and their name brands are trademarks of their respective holders.
COPYRIGHTS
All Material Copyright 2002-2010 by General Electric Company Inc. All Rights Reserved
ix
10/12/10
GE H EALTHCARE
Revision History
Date
Revision (YYYY/MM/DD) Reason for change
0 2002/04/08 Initial Release
1 2002/11/08 Update for BT02 Release, BEP and FEP changes
2 2003/04/04 Update for R2.1.1 Release and hardware changes
3 2003/10/23 Update for R3.0 Release and hardware changes
4 2004/09/15 Update for R4.0 Release, BEP3, 4D option, CW option
5 2004/11/13 Update for R4.1.0
6 2005/10/25 M3 Update for R6.x release, Added Legal Page, Cover Revision, Flat Monitor, TD Board changes
7 2005/11/21 Update for R6.0.5O.
8 2006/07/25 Update for R7.x release. Added DVR, hardware changes. Release for MS
9 2006/08/01 Update for R7.x release. Release for M3
10 2006/09/06 Update for R7.x release.
Update for R7.x, branding cover updates, additional precaution languages, 19 LCD, BEP4.x, FRU
11 2007/12/04
numbers, R7.x baseload instructions.
12 2009/05/27 Update for R9.x
13 2010/01/15 Update for IE6 60601-1-6
14 2010/10/12 Updated for removal of CE Mark
List of Effected Pages(LOEP)
Pages Revision Pages Revision Pages Revision

Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/
Chapter 2 - Site Preparation
Title Page N/A 14 Troubleshooting 14
pages 2-1 to 2-10
pages 7-1 to 7-34
Chapter 8 - Replacement
Important Precautions Chapter 3 - System Setup
14 14 Procedures 14
pages i to iv pages 3-1 to 3-26
pages 8-1 to 8-98
Rev History/LOEP Chapter 4 - Functional Checks Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts
14 14 14
pages v to x pages 4-1 to 4-28 pages 9-1 to 9-72
Chapter 5 - Components and
Table of Contents Chapter 10 - Care & Maintenance
14 Functions (Theory) 14 14
pages ix to xxxiii pages 10-1 to 10-30
pages 5-1 to 5-98
Chapter 1 - Introduction Chapter 6 - Service Adjustments Index
14 14 14
pages 1-1 to 1-24 pages 6-1 to 6-18 pages I to IV
Back Cover N/A
x -
1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
L9_TOC.FM
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1
Introduction
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
Purpose of Chapter 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
Purpose of Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
Service Manual Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2

Contents in this Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2
Typical Users of the Basic Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2
LOGIQ 9 Models Covered by this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 3
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 4
Overview of the Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 4
History - Hardware/Software versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7
History - Peripherals/Software versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7
FRUs for Back End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7
History - Supported Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7
How to Turn the Scanner On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7
How to Check for Hardware/Software version and Installed Options 1 - 7
Product Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 8
Purpose of Operator Manual(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 8
Important Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Conventions Used in Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Model Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Safety Precaution Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Standard Hazard Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 10
Product Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 11
Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 16
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 16
Human Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 16
Mechanical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 16
Electrical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 17
Safe Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 17
Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 18
Labels Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 18
xi Table of Contents
1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
L9_TOC.FM
Dangerous Procedure Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 18
Battery Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 20
Lockout/Tagout Requirements (For USA Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 21
Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 21
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 22

What is EMC? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 22
Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 22
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 22
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 23
Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 23
System Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 24
xii Table of Contents

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
L9_TOC.FM
CHAPTER 2
Site Preparation
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
Purpose of Chapter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
General Console Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Console Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Electrical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
LOGIQ 9 Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Inrush Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Site Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Site Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Unit Power Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Power Stability Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
EMI Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Scan Probe Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Time and Manpower Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Facility Needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Purchaser Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Required Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Desirable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Minimal Floor Plan Suggestion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Networking Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Stand Alone Scanner (without Network Connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Scanner Connected to Hospitals Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Purpose of the DICOM Network Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
DICOM Option Pre-installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
InSite Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Table of Contents xiii

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
L9_TOC.FM
CHAPTER 3
System Setup
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
The Purpose of Chapter 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
Set Up Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2
Average Set Up Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2
Set Up Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2
Brake Pedal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2
Operator I/O Panel Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2
Safety Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3
Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 4
Preparing for Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 6

Verify Customer Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 6
Physical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 6
System Voltage Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 6
Rating Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 6
ETL Testing Laboratories Safety Rating Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 7
Video Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 7
EMI Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 7
Completing the Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 8

Power On / Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 8
Scanner Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 8
Back-end Processor Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9
Power Off / Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9
Back-end Processor Power Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9
Scanner Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 10
Transducer Connection and Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 10
System Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11
System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11
Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11
Console Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11
Acoustic Noise Output: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11
Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11
On-Board Optional Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 12
External I/O Connector Panel (Back of system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 13
External I/O Pin Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 15
Other I/O Ports (Front of system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 17
Video Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 20
xiv Table of Contents

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
L9_TOC.FM
Available Probes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 21
Software/Option Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 21
Connectivity Setup Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 22
Before Starting a Software Upgrade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 23
Loading Base Image Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 23
Loading Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 23
System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 23
Connecting USB Line Printers - Black/White and Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 24

Printer Set Up (R4.x and later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 24
Printer Set Up (R2.x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 24
To Set Up Printer Before Installing Application Software . . . . . . . . . 3 - 24
Paperwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 25
Product Locator Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 25
User Manual(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 25
Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 26
Table of Contents xv
1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
L9_TOC.FM
CHAPTER 4
Functional Checks
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
Required Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
General Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2
System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 3
Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 3
Touch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 4
Monitor Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 5
Power On / Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 6
To Connect Mains Power to the Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 6
To Boot Up Back End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 7
Standby Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 8
To Place System in Standby Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 8
To Wake the System from Standby Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 8
Power Off / Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 9
To Power Off Back-End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 9
To Shut Down Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 10
Probe/Connectors Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11
To Connect a Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11
To Activate a Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11
To Deactivate a Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11
To Disconnect a Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11
Using CINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12
To Activate CINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12
To Omit Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12
To Restore Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12
To Move Quickly to Start/End Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12
To Start Frame/End Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12
To Adjust the CINE Loop Playback Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12
To Disconnect B-Mode CINE from Timeline CINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12
To Move through a CINE Loop Frame By Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12
Image Management Quick Guide / User Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 13
System B/M-Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 14
System CFM and PWD Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 15
Basic Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 16
To Measure Distance and Tissue Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 16
To Measure Circumference/Area (Ellipse) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 16
Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 17
Report Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 17
The MOD (Magnetic Optical Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 18
xvi Table of Contents

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
L9_TOC.FM
For BT03 and prior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 18

For BT04 and later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 19
Using the MOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 21
USB Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 22
Backup and Restore Database, Preset Configurations and Images . . . . . 4 - 22
Software Configuration Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 23
Peripheral Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 24
Mechanical Function Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 25

Operator I/O Movement - Standard Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 25
Operator I/O Movement - 17 LCD (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 26
Operator I/O Movement - 19 LCD (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 27
Brakes and Direction Locks Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 28
Site Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 28
Table of Contents xvii

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
L9_TOC.FM
CHAPTER 5
Components and Functions (Theory)
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2
Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 5
Dataflow Control Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6
Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6
Front End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 7

Front End Processor Power Supply Board (FEPS, FEPS2, FEPS2.1) . . . . 5 - 8
FEPS3.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 8
Front End Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 9
XDIF (Transducer Interface) Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 9
Top Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 9
RF Amp, RF Amp1.2, RF Amp2 Board
(Radio Frequency Amplifier Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 10
TD, TD4, TD5.x, TD6 (Time Delay) Boards (8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 11
Scan Control Board (SCB, SCB2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 13
SCB, SCB2 High Level Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14
Scan Control Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14
Equalization (EQ) Board (component of EBM Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 16
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 16
Basic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 17
B/M Mode Processor (BMP) Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 18
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 18
EBM, EBM2 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 19
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 19
Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 19
EBM/EBM2 Interface with XDIF relay board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 20
BMode Output Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 21
MMode Output Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 21
Back End Processor (BEP 1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 22

Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23
PCI Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23
AGP Video Card - SVGA Video to the PCVIC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23
PCIO Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23
PCI Video Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23
UPS Battery Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 24
Internal Storage Devices: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 24
xviii Table of Contents

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
L9_TOC.FM
Location of the Back End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 24

Inputs (BEP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25
AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25
DC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25
Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25
Bi-directional Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 26
Back End Processor (BEP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 27

Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 28
PCI Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 28
AGP Video Card - DVI Video to the DGVIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 28
PCIO Board: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 28
PCVIC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 28
DGVIC, DGIO and ADD Cards BEP 2.1 (BT02, November 2002) . . . . . . 5 - 29
Additional Memory (RAM) (BT03, October 2003) - BEP2.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 29
DGVIC/DGIO Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 29
UPS Battery Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 29
Internal Storage Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 29
Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 31
AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 31
DC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 31
Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 31
USB to Serial Adapter Cable Setup
(RS232 Serial Port Connector on the External I/O) . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 32
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 33
Back End Processor (BEP 3.x). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 34

Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 35
PCI Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 35
AGP Video Card - DVI Video to the DGVIC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 35
PCI DGVIC and ADD Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 35
UPS Battery Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 35
Internal Storage Devices: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 36
Inputs (BEP 3.x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 37
AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 37
DC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 37
Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 37
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 38
Table of Contents xix

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
L9_TOC.FM
Back End Processor (BEP 4.x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 39

Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 40
PCI Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 40
AGP Video Card - DVI Video to the DGVIC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 40
PCI DGVIC2 and ADD2 Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 40
UPS Battery Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 40
Internal Storage Devices: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 41
Inputs (BEP 4.x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 42
AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 42
DC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 42
Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 42
Bi-directional Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 42
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 43
BEP Power On Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 44
BEP Power Off Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 45
Operator Console Control PWA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 46

Console Main Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 47
Main Cable Connector Functions - Prior to BT04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 47
Main Cable Connectors with Pinouts - Prior to BT04 . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 48
Main Cable Connector Functions - BT04 and after . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 51
Main Cable Connectors with Pinouts - BT04 and after (5119218) . . 5 - 52
Patient I/O (Currently not supported by the LOGIQ 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 54
Internal I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 55
Location in the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 58
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 58
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 58
Jumpers and Dip-switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 58
Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 59
DC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 59
Video Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 59
Audio Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 59
Serial Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 60
Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 60
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 61
DC Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 61
AUDIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 61
Connectors Solder Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 61
Interface Connectors Component Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 62
xx Table of Contents
1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
L9_TOC.FM
Top Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 63
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 64
External I/O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 65
Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 65
Bi-directional Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 66
Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 67
Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 68
Modem and USB Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 69

General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 69
Inputs/Outputs (non-USB Modem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 69
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 69
Jumpers and Dip-switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 69
LEDs (non-USB Modem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 70
Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 71
AC Power Distribution Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 72
AC Power PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 72
AC Controller Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 74
Mechanical Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 76
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 76
Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 76
Top Console Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 76
17 LCD (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 77
19 LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 77
Wheels/Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 78
Air Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 79

Air Flow Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 79
Service Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 79
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 79
Global Service User Interface (GSUI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 80
Internationalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 80
Service Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 80
Access / Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 80
Service Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 81
Error Logs Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 82
Table of Contents xxi

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
L9_TOC.FM
Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 83
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 84
Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 84
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 85
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 86
Diagnostics Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 86
Diagnostic Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 86
Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 87
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 87
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 88
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 89
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 89
Planned Maintenance (PM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 90
4D Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 91
Principle of Volume Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 91
4D Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 92
Motor Controller to Front Bracket Cable and 4D Probe Cable . . . . . 5 - 92
USB to Motor Controller Cable and Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 94
Motor Controller to Internal I/O Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 95
Continuous Wave Doppler Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 96

Continuous Wave Doppler Signal Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 96
PCI CW Doppler PWA card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 97

Internal CW Doppler Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 97
Probe Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 97
Mu Metal Shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 97
xxii Table of Contents

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
L9_TOC.FM
CHAPTER 6
Service Adjustments
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
Regulatory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Monitor Adjustment (Standard only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Degauss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Brightness and Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Visible Image Display Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Monitor Tilt (Standard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Monitor Tilt Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Monitor Counter-balance Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Monitor Adjustment (17 LCD Option Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Angularity Test Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Color Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Monitor Adjustment (19 LCD Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Angularity Test Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Color Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Panel Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 8
Z-Release Cable and Gas Spring Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Z-Release Cable Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Checking the Release System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Cable Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 10
Cable Adjustment at Gas Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 10
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 10
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 11
Emergency Release Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 12
Procedure Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 12
Brake Arm Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13
Table of Contents xxiii

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
L9_TOC.FM
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13
Brake Arm Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 14
Procedure Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 14
Brake Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15
Front Wheel Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15
Front Brake Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15
Rear Wheel Brakes Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 16
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 16
Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 16
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 16
Rear Wheel Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 17
Rear Wheel Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 17
xxiv Table of Contents

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
L9_TOC.FM
CHAPTER 7
Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1
Service Safety Considerations ...................................... 7-2
Gathering Trouble Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Collecting Vital System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Collecting a Trouble Image with Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Screen Captures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 13
Check and Record the P4 Key Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 13
Setting the P4 Key to Screen Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 14
Capturing a Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 15
Reset the P4 Key to Customers Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 16
Ctrl-PrintScreen Shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 17
To Capture a Screen Image Using the Shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 17
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 18
Acquisition Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 19
Diagnostic Listings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 21
Calibration Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 23
I/O Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 24
Launching the Op Panel Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 24
Trackball Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 25
Keyboard Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 26
Slidepots Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 26
Encoders Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 27
Pushbuttons Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 27
LEDs Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 28
Touchscreen Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 28
Ending the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 29
Common Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 30
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 30
Disruptive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 30
System Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 30
Table of Contents xxv

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
L9_TOC.FM
PC Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 31
Non-Interactive Tests - BT04 and earlier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 31
Non-Interactive Tests - BT06, BT07, BT09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 31
PC Diagnostics (Interactive Tests) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 32
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 33
Dicom Verify Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 33
Hard Drive Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 34
xxvi Table of Contents

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
L9_TOC.FM
CHAPTER 8
Replacement Procedures
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Purpose of Chapter 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Definitions of Left, Right, Front and Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Battery Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Battery Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 3 / BEP 3.5. . . . . . . . 8 - 10

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 10
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 10
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 10
Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 10
Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 3 / BEP 3.5 . . . . 8 - 12
Battery Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 12
Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 4.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 13

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 13
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 13
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 13
Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure - BEP 4.x . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 13
Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 4.x . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 16
Battery Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 16
Before Starting a Software Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 17

Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 17
Table of Contents xxvii

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
L9_TOC.FM
Save Connectivity Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 17

DICOM TCPIP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 17
Image Management Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 18

Managing Patient Data and Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 18
Patient Images and Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 18
Preset Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 18
Backup Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 18
EZBackup/Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 19
User-Defined Backup Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 22
Loading Base Image Software - R4.x.x and prior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 26

Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 26
To Prepare to Load Base Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 26
Base Image Load Procedure - R4.x.x and prior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 28
Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 33
Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 38
Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 44

Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 44
Loading Application Software - R6.x.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 49

Loading Applications Software - R6.x.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 49
Wired VoiceScan Speaker Assignment - R6.x.x, R7.x.x, and R9.x.x . . . . . . 8 - 54
Loading Application Software - R7.x.x or Later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 56

Loading Applications Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 56
Functional Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 60
Generic Application Software - Upgrade Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 61

Application Software Upgrade Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 61
System Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 65
To Complete the System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 65
VCR Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 65
DVR Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 65
Printer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 65
Print Key Assignment and Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 66
Restore Patient, Report, and User-Defined Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 66
Cycle System Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 67
Standby Operation Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 68
xxviii Table of Contents

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
L9_TOC.FM
To Place the System in the Standby Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 68

To Wake the System from Standby Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 68
Console Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 70

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 70
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 70
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 70
Console Lock Assembly Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 71
Console Lock Assembly Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 71
Release Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 72

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 72
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 72
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 72
Release Lock Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 72
Release Lock Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 73
Gas Shock Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 74

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 74
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 74
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 74
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 75
Top Tray Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 76
Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 76
Gas Shock Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 78
Install the New Gas Shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 81
Reassemble Z-Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 83
Gas Spring Wirecable Replacement Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 86

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 86
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 86
Wirecable Removal Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 86
Wirecable Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 88
Wirecable Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 90
Frog Leg Angle Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 92

Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 92
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 92
Kit Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 92
Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 92
Frog Leg Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 92
Functional Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 95
Table of Contents xxix
1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
L9_TOC.FM
CHAPTER 9
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1
LOGIQ 9 Models Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 2
List of Abbreviations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 3
Console View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 4
External Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 5
Additional Console Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 7
Operator I/O Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 9

Bumper Kit, Frogleg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 12
Operator Control Panel Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 13
Gas Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 14
Monitor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 16
CRT Monitor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 16
Monitor Assembly - 17 LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 17
Monitor Assembly - 19 LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 18
Operator Control Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 20

Upper Op Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 20
Lower Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 22
Lower Op Panel - Buttons and Knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 24
Front End Processor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 26
I/O Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 32
3-D Externals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 34
Back End Processor Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 35

BEP 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 35
BEP 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 36
BEP 3.x / 4.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 38
Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 41
Interconnect Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 44
xxx Table of Contents
1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
L9_TOC.FM
Peripheral Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 44
Peripheral Cable - Analog Color Printer with BEP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 48
Peripheral Cable - USB Printer Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 49
AC Distribution Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 50
Power Distribution Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 61
Air Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 62
Voice Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 63
Voice Scan Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 65
4D Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 66
Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 67
Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 68
Customer Documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 69
Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 70
Table of Contents xxxi

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
L9_TOC.FM
CHAPTER 10
Care & Maintenance
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1
Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1
Why do Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
Keeping Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
Quality Assurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
Maintenance Task Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2

How often should care & maintenance tasks be performed? . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
Tools Required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 4
Special Tools, Supplies and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 4
Specific Requirements for Care & Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 4
System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 5
Preliminary Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 5
Functional Checks (See Also Chapter 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 6
System Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 6
Peripheral/Option Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 7
Input Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 7
Mains Cable Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 7
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 8
General Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 8
Air Filter Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 8
Physical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9
Optional Diagnostic Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9
View the Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9
Probe Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10
Probe Related Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10
Basic Probe Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10
Basic Probe Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10
Using a Phantom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10
Electrical Safety Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 11

Safety Test Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 11
GE Healthcare Leakage Current Limits for LOGIQ 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 12
Outlet Test - Wiring Arrangement - USA & Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 13
Grounding Continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 14
Meter Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 14
xxxii Table of Contents

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
L9_TOC.FM
Chassis Leakage Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 15

Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 15
Generic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 16
Data Sheet for Chassis Source Leakage Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 17
Isolated Patient Lead (Source) LeakageLead to Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 17
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 17
Generic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 18
Isolated Patient Lead (Source) LeakageLead to Lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 19
Isolated Patient Lead (Sink) Leakage-Isolation Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 19
Data Sheet for ECG Leakage Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 20
Probe Leakage Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 21
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 21
Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 21
Generic procedure on Leakage Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 23
Meter procedure using probe adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 23
Meter Procedure Using Probe Adapter to Measure Probe
Isolation (Sink) Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 25
When There's Too Much Leakage Current... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 27

ULTRASOUND INSPECTION CERTIFICATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 28
Site Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 29
Table of Contents xxxiii

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
L9_TOC.FM
xxxiv Table of Contents

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER1.FM
Chapter 1
Introduction
Section 1-1
Overview
1-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 1
This chapter describes important issues related to safely servicing the LOGIQ 9 scanner. The service
provider must read and understand all the information presented in this manual before installing or
servicing a unit.
Table 1-1 Contents in Chapter 1
Section Description Page Number

1-1 Overview 1-1
1-2 Service Manual Overview 1-2
1-3 Important Conventions 1-9
1-4 Safety Considerations 1-16
1-5 Labels Locations 1-18
1-6 Dangerous Procedure Warnings 1-18
1-7 Battery Safety 1-20
1-8 Lockout/Tagout Requirements (For USA Only) 1-21
1-9 Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts 1-21
1-10 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) 1-22
1-11 Customer Assistance 1-23
1-1-2 Purpose of Service Manual

This Service Manual provides installation and service information for the LOGIQ 9 Ultrasound
Scanning System.
Chapter 1 Introduction 1-1

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER1.FM
Section 1-2
Service Manual Overview
1-2-1 Contents in this Service Manual
1.) Chapter 1 - Introduction: Contains a content summary and warnings.
2.) Chapter 2 - Site Preparation: Contains pre-installation requirements for the LOGIQ 9.
3.) Chapter 3 - System Setup: Contains installation procedures.
4.) Chapter 4 - Functional Checks: Contains functional checks that are recommended as part of the
installation, or as required during servicing and periodic maintenance.
5.) Chapter 5 - Components and Functions (Theory): Contains block diagrams and functional
explanations of the electronics.
6.) Chapter 6 - Service Adjustments: Contains instructions on how to make available adjustments to
the LOGIQ 9.
7.) Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting: Provides procedures for running diagnostic or related
routines for the LOGIQ 9.
8.) Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures: Provides disassembly procedures and reassembly
procedures for all changeable Field Replaceable Units (FRU).
9.) Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts: Contains a complete list of field replaceable parts for the LOGIQ 9.
10.)Chapter 10 - Care & Maintenance: Provides periodic maintenance procedures for the LOGIQ 9.
1-2-2 Typical Users of the Basic Service Manual

Service Personnel (installation, maintenance, etc.)
Hospitals Service Personnel
Contractors (Some parts of Chapter 2 - Pre-Installation)
1-2 Section 1-2 - Service Manual Overview

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER1.FM
1-2-3 LOGIQ 9 Models Covered by this Manual
Table 1-2 LOGIQ 9 Model Designations
Part Number Description

2188900 LOGIQ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP1.0
2188900-2 LOGIQ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP1.0
2188900-3 LOGIQ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP1.0

2351100 LOGIQ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.1 BT02
2351100-2 LOGIQ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.1 BT02
2351100-3 LOGIQ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP2.1 BT02

2404587 LOGIQ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP3 BT04
2404587-2 LOGIQ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP3 BT04
2404587-3 LOGIQ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP3 BT04

LOGIQ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP3.5/4.x BT07 and

5177000
BT09*
LOGIQ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP3.5/4.x BT07 and
5177000-2
BT09*
LOGIQ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP3.5/4.x BT07

5177000-3
and BT09*
*BT09 is a software-only upgrade

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER1.FM
1-2-4 Product Description
1-2-4-1 Overview of the Product

LOGIQ 9 is a phased and linear array ultrasound imaging scanner. It has provisions for analog input
sources like ECG and Phono. A Doppler probe may also be connected and used.
The system can be used for:
- B-Mode
- M-Mode
- Color Flow Mode (CFM)
- Power Doppler Imaging (PDI) with topographic and directional maps
- PW Doppler with high PRF
- B-Flow Mode
- M-Color Flow Mode, with B-Mode Gray Scale and Color Flow Imaging
LOGIQ 9 is a digital beamforming system. Signal flow travels from the Probe Connector Panel to the
Front End Electronics, to the Back-End Processor, and finally displayed on the monitor and peripherals.
System configuration is stored on the hard drive and all necessary software is loaded from the hard
drive on power up.

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER1.FM
1-2-4-1 Overview of the Product (contd)
Name Plate
Monitor (CRT)
Monitor Controls
Op. Panel Upper Bezel

Gel Warmer
Touchscreen/Display
TGC Slidepot Knobs
Operator Console
B/W Printer Front Cover

VCR
3.5 MOD Probe Connector

CD-ROM
or DVD
Backend Processor Chassis

Swivel Lock
Front Bumper
Brake Release
Figure 1-1 LOGIQ 9 BT04 - Major Components

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER1.FM
17LCD Monitor
Monitor Controls
Name Plate Op. Panel Upper Bezel

Gel Warmer
Touchscreen/Display
TGC Slidepot Knobs
Subwoofer Knob
(Do not adjust)
Operator Console
VCR
Front Cover
B/W Printer
Probe Connector
CD-ROM
or DVD
Backend Processor
Chassis Swivel Lock
Front Bumper Brake Release
Figure 1-2 LOGIQ 9 BT06 with 17 LCD Option - Major Components

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER1.FM
19 LCD Monitor
Monitor Controls
Name Plate
Gel Warmer
TGC Slidepot Knobs
Subwoofer Knob
(Do not adjust) Touchscreen/Display
Operator Console
Figure 1-3 LOGIQ 9 with 19 LCD
1-2-4-2 History - Hardware/Software versions

The contents in this sub-section is in Chapter 9.
1-2-4-3 History - Peripherals/Software versions

1-2-4-4 FRUs for Back End Processor

1-2-4-5 History - Supported Probes

1-2-4-6 How to Turn the Scanner On and Off

Please refer to Chapter 4, section 4-2-2 "Power On / Boot Up" , for a detailed description of how to turn
the scanner ON and to Chapter 4, section 4-2-4 "Power Off / Shutdown" for a detailed description of
how to turn the scanner OFF.
1-2-4-7 How to Check for Hardware/Software version and Installed Options

To verify hardware versions on the boards, refer to Section 9-11 "Front End Processor Assembly"
Please refer to Section 4-3 "Software Configuration Checks" to check the software versions on local
software on the boards.
Please refer to Chapter 4 to check for installed options.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER1.FM
1-2-4-8 Product Manuals
NOTE: The LOGIQ 9 Unpacking Procedure is delivered on paper.
See Section 9-23 "Customer Documentation" for customer documentation available for the product.
1-2-4-9 Purpose of Operator Manual(s)

The Operator Manual(s) should be fully read and understood before operating the LOGIQ 9 and also
kept near the unit for quick reference.

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER1.FM
Section 1-3
Important Conventions
1-3-1 Conventions Used in Book
1-3-1-1 Model Designations

This manual covers the LOGIQ 9 scanners.
1-3-1-2 Icons
Pictures, or icons, are used wherever they reinforce the printed message. The icons, labels and
conventions used on the product and in the service information are described in this chapter.
1-3-1-3 Safety Precaution Messages

Various levels of safety precaution messages may be found on the equipment and in the service
information. The different levels of concern are identified by a flag word that precedes the precautionary
message. Known or potential hazards are labeled in one of following ways:
DANGER DANGER IS USED TO INDICATE THE PRESENCE OF A HAZARD THAT WILL

CAUSE SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH IF THE INSTRUCTIONS ARE
IGNORED.
WARNING WARNING IS USED TO INDICATE THE PRESENCE OF A HAZARD THAT CAN CAUSE
SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE IF INSTRUCTIONS ARE
IGNORED.
CAUTION Caution is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that will or can cause minor personal injury
and property damage if instructions are ignored.
NOTICE Equipment Damage Possible

Notice is used when a hazard is present that can cause property damage but has absolutely no
personal injury risk.
Example: Disk drive will crash.
NOTE: Notes provide important information about an item or a procedure.

Information contained in a NOTE can often save you time or effort.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER1.FM
1-3-2 Standard Hazard Icons
Important information will always be preceded by the exclamation point contained

within a triangle, as seen throughout this chapter. In addition to text, several different
graphical icons (symbols) may be used to make you aware of specific types of
hazards that could cause harm.
Table 1-3 Standard Hazard Icons
ELECTRICAL MECHANICAL RADIATION
LASER HEAT PINCH
LASER
LIGHT
Other hazard icons make you aware of specific procedures that should be followed.
Table 1-4 Standard Icons Indicating a Special Procedure Be Used
AVOID STATIC ELECTRICITY TAG AND LOCK OUT WEAR EYE PROTECTION
TAG
&
LOCKOUT EYE
PROTECTION
Signed Date
1-10 Section 1-3 - Important Conventions

1/18/10
GE H EALTHCARE
CHAPTER1.FM
1-3-3 Product Icons

The following table describes the purpose and location of safety labels and other important information
provided on the equipment.
Table 1-5 Product Icons
LABEL/SYMBOL PURPOSE/MEANING LOCATION
Identification and Rating Plate
Manufacturers name and address. Rear panel
Identification and Rating Plate
Date of manufacture Rating Plate
Serial Number Rating Plate
Catalog Number Rating Plate
Type/Class Label Used to indicate the degree of safety or protection.
Equipment Type BF (man in the box symbol) IEC 878- Probe connectors
02-03 indicates B Type equipment having even more
PCG connector
electrical isolation than standard Type B equipment
because it is intended for intimate patient contact. or Rear of Console
Equipment Type BF Applied Part (man in the box with

Probe
paddle) symbol is in accordance with IEC 60417-5334.
Equipment Type CF (heart in the box symbol) IEC 878- ECG connector
02-05 indicates equipment having a high degree of
Surgical probes
protection suitable for direct cardiac contact.

10/12/10
CHAPTER1.FM
GE H EALTHCARE
Table 1-5 Product Icons (Continued)
Defibrillator-proof type of equipment. At the ECG connector on front of system.
CAUTION
This unit weighs...
Special care must be used to
avoid..."
This precaution is intended to prevent injury that may
result if one person attempts to move the unit On the console where easily seen during
considerable distances or on an incline due to the weight transport
of the unit.
"CAUTION" The equilateral triangle is usually used in

combination with other symbols to advise or warn the Various
user.
Follow Instructions for Use. ATTENTION - Consult

accompanying documents is intended to alert the user
Various
to refer to the operator manual or other instructions when
complete information cannot be provided on the label.
Follow Instructions for Use. ATTENTION - Consult

accompanying documents is intended to alert the user
May appear on some probes
to refer to the operator manual or other instructions when
complete information cannot be provided on the label.
"CAUTION - Dangerous voltage" (the lightning flash with

arrowhead in equilateral triangle) is used to indicate Various
electric shock hazards.
"Mains OFF" Indicates the power off position of the

Rear of system adjacent to mains switch
mains power switch.

GE H EALTHCARE
10/12/10
CHAPTER1.FM
"OFF/Standby" Indicates the power off/standby position

of the power switch.
CAUTION Adjacent to On-Off Switch
This Power Switch DOES NOT ISOLATE Mains
Supply
"Mains ON" Indicates the power on position of the mains

power switch.
"ON" Indicates the power on position of the power
switch. Front Panel Switch
CAUTION
This Power Switch DOES NOT ISOLATE Mains
Supply
"Protective Earth" Indicates the protective earth

Internal
(grounding) terminal.
"Equipotentiality" Indicates the terminal to be used for

connecting equipotential conductors when Rear of console
interconnecting (grounding) with other equipment.
This unit carries the CE mark.

The LOGIQ 9 unit complies with regulatory
requirements of the European Directive 93/42/EEC
concerning medical devices. Rear of Console
It also complies with emission limits for a Group 1, Class
B Medical Device as stated in EN 60601-1-2
(IEC 60601-1-2).
NOTE: CE Mark not on systems manufactured after October 1,2010.
United States only

Rear Panel
Prescription Requirement label
Authorized European Representative address. Rear Panel
NOTE: EC REP Mark not on systems manufactured after October 1,2010.

10/12/10
CHAPTER1.FM
GE H EALTHCARE
ETL Listing Mark Monogram Rear Panel
GOST Symbol. Russia Regulatory Country Clearance. Rear Panel
This symbol indicates that waste electrical and electronic

equipment must not be disposed of as unsorted
municipal waste and must be collected separately.
Rear Panel
Please contact an authorized representative of the
manufacturer for information concerning the
decommissioning of your equipment.
No hazardous substance, above the maximum

concentration value, is present. Maximum concentration
values for electronic information products, as set by the
Peoples Republic of China Electronic Industry Standard
Rear Panel
SJ/T11364-2006, include the hazardous substances of
lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, cadmium,
polybrominated biphenyl (PBB), and polybrominated
diphenyl ether (PBDE).
Indicates the presence of hazardous substance(s) above

the maximum concentration value. Maximum
concentration values for electronic information products,
as set by the Peoples Republic of China Electronic
Industry Standard SJ/T11364-2006, include the
hazardous substances of lead, mercury, hexavalent
chromium, cadmium, polybrominated biphenyl (PBB), Probe
and polybrominated diphenyl ether (PBDE). 10
indicates the number of years during which the
hazardous substance(s) will not leak or mutate so that
the use of this product will not result in any severe
environmental pollution, bodily injury, or damage to any
assets.
Indicates the presence of hazardous substance(s) above

the maximum concentration value. Maximum
concentration values for electronic information products,
as set by the Peoples Republic of China Electronic
Industry Standard SJ/T11364-2006, include the
hazardous substances of lead, mercury, hexavalent
chromium, cadmium, polybrominated biphenyl (PBB), Rear Panel
and polybrominated diphenyl ether (PBDE). 20
indicates the number of years during which the
hazardous substance(s) will not leak or mutate so that
the use of this product will not result in any severe
environmental pollution, bodily injury, or damage to any
assets.

GE HEALTHCARE
10/12/10
CHAPTER1.FM
This product consists of devices that may contain

mercury, which must be recycled or disposed of in
or
accordance with local, state, or country laws. (Within this Rear Panel
system, the backlight lamps in the monitor display,
contain mercury.)
How to lower LCD prior to transport Rear of the LCD monitor.
How to lock Operator Panel prior to transport Rear of the LCD monitor.
DO NOT place a finger, hand or any object on the joint of

the monitor or monitor arm to avoid injury when moving Rear of the LCD monitor.
the monitor and monitor arm.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER1.FM
Section 1-4
Safety Considerations
1-4-1 Introduction
The following safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation, service and repair of
this equipment. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this
manual, violates safety standards of design, manufacture and intended use of the equipment.
1-4-2 Human Safety

Operating personnel must not remove the system covers.
Servicing should be performed by authorized personnel only.
Only personnel who have participated in a LOGIQ 9 Training are authorized to service the equipment.
1-4-3 Mechanical Safety
WARNING Prior to elevating scanner, verify that the floating keyboard is locked in its lowest
position. Verify that the front brake is locked and the scanner is unable to swivel.
Verify that the rear brakes are in the locked position.
WARNING Ultrasound probes are highly sensitive medical instruments that can easily be
damaged by improper handling. Use care when handling and protect from damage
when not in use. DO NOT use a damaged or defective probe. Failure to follow these
precautions can result in serious injury and equipment damage.
WARNING Never use a probe that has fallen to the floor. Even if it looks ok, it may be damaged.
WARNING REMEMBER: If the front caster swivel lock is engaged for transportation, pressing
the release pedal once disengages the swivel lock. You must depress the release
pedal a second time to engage the brake.
WARNING The system should NOT be moved with the Operator I/O Panel extended. Move the
Operator I/O Panel to its centered and locked position. Lower the Operator I/O Panel
as much as possible before moving the system.
WARNING While the software install procedure is designed to preserve data, you should save
any patient data, images, system setups to a MOD, CD, DVD or hardcopy before
doing a software upgrade.
CAUTION Remember to remove the MOD before continuing with the software install.
1-16 Section 1-4 - Safety Considerations

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER1.FM
1-4-3 Mechanical Safety (contd)

CAUTION The LOGIQ 9 weighs at least 171kg (376 lbs.) when ready to use, depending on installed
monitors and peripherals. Care must be used when moving it or replacing its parts. Failure
to follow the precautions listed could result in injury, uncontrolled motion and costly
damage.
ALWAYS:
Be sure the pathway is clear.
Use slow, careful motions.
Use two people when moving on inclines or lifting more than 16 kg (35 lbs).
CAUTION Keep the heat venting holes on the monitor unobstructed to avoid overheating of the
monitor.
CAUTION To avoid injury when you move the LCD monitor and the monitor arm, do NOT put your
finger, hand, or object on the joint of the monitor or the monitor arm.
CAUTION Before you move or transport the system, make sure to lock the LCD monitor arm firmly and
flip down the monitor to prevent damage to the system.
CAUTION Do NOT grab the speakers to move the monitor and the monitor arm when adjusting the LCD.
However, when you turn up the monitor from flip-down status, you can grab the upper corner
of the monitor.
CAUTION To avoid injury or damage to the monitor, make sure there is nothing within range of the LCD
before moving the monitor and monitor arm. This includes people as well as things.
NOTICE Be careful not to pinch any of the cables.
NOTE: Special care should be taken when transporting the unit in a vehicle:
Secure the unit in an upright position.

Lock the wheels (brake).
DO NOT use the Control Panel as an anchor point.
Place the probes in their carrying case.
Eject any Magneto Optical disk, CD or DVD from their drive.
1-4-4 Electrical Safety
1-4-4-1 Safe Practices

To minimize shock hazard, the equipment chassis must be connected to an electrical ground. The
system is equipped with a three-conductor AC power cable. This must be plugged into an approved
electrical outlet with safety ground. If an extension cord is used with the system, make sure that the total
current rating of the system does not exceed the extension cord rating.
The power outlet used for this equipment should not be shared with other types of equipment.
Both the system power cable and the power connector meet international electrical standards.
WARNING IF A LOGIQ 9 IS ENERGIZED, AND THE FRONT END POWER SUPPLY (FEPS) COVER
IS REMOVED, THE VOLTAGE TEST POINTS POSE A POTENTIAL SHOCK HAZARD.
WARNING CONNECTING A LOGIQ 9 SCANNER TO THE WRONG VOLTAGE LEVEL WILL MOST
LIKELY DESTROY THE SCANNER.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER1.FM
1-4-4-2 Probes
Follow these guidelines before connecting a probe to the scanner:
Inspect the probe prior to each use for damage or degradation to the:
- Housing
- Cable strain relief
- Lens
- Seal
- Connector pins
- Locking mechanism
Do not use a damaged or defective probe.
Never immerse the probe connector or adapter into any liquid.
Section 1-5
Labels Locations
Refer to the LOGIQ 9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 2, for the label locations.
Section 1-6
Dangerous Procedure Warnings
Warnings, such as the examples below, precede potentially dangerous procedures throughout this
manual. Instructions contained in the warnings must be followed.
DANGER DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT

IN THIS EQUIPMENT. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN HANDLING, TESTING
AND ADJUSTING.
WARNING IF THE COVERS ARE REMOVED FROM AN OPERATING LOGIQ 9, SOME METAL
SURFACES MAY BE WARM ENOUGH TO POSE A POTENTIAL HEAT HAZARD IF
TOUCHED, EVEN WHILE IN SHUT DOWN MODE.
WARNING EXPLOSION WARNING

DO NOT OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE.
OPERATION OF ANY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IN SUCH AN ENVIRONMENT
CONSTITUTES A DEFINITE SAFETY HAZARD.
WARNING Do Not Substitute Parts or Modify Equipment

Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not install substitute
parts or perform any unauthorized modification of the equipment.
1-18 Section 1-5 - Labels Locations

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER1.FM
Section 1-6 Dangerous Procedure Warnings (contd)
WARNING When the top console is in its locked position, the gas shock is compressed and
stores mechanical energy. During normal operation the top console, the weight of
the monitor and the mechanical force of the gas shock are in balance. Take care if/
when you activate this gas shock. Personal injury can occur after the panel is
removed and the shock pressure is released. Take care when you repair the
elevation assembly.
WARNING Ensure that the system is turned off and unplugged. To verify that the Front End
Power Supply (FEPS) is in a zero energy state, wait at least 20 seconds for the charge
on the FEPS capacitors to bleed off before handling the power supply board.
WARNING Use extreme caution as long as LOGIQ 9 is un-stable, not resting on all four
Casters.
WARNING Tilting the console requires two people in order to avoid injury to service personnel
and damage to the equipment.
WARNING Beware of possible sharp edges on all mechanical parts. If sharp edges are
encountered, the appropriate PPE should be used to reduce the risk of injury.
WARNING Wear all PPE including gloves as indicated in the chemical MSDS.
WARNING Do Not attempt to charge batteries other than the type included in the kit (NiMH).
Standard alkaline batteries CANNOT be recharged.
READ all safety precautions that come from the battery and battery charger
manufacturers.
WARNING Risk of electrical shock, system must be turned off and disconnected from power
source. Cord must be controlled at all times. Wait at least 20 seconds for the charge
on the FEPS capacitors to bleed off before handling the power supply board.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER1.FM
Section 1-7
Battery Safety
To avoid the risk of injury, follow the warning and cautions to make sure that the battery does not burst,
ignite, or generate heat of fumes.
CAUTION The battery pack contains a 24V charge that will cause a spark when it is re-connected to the
power supply without power applied to the Back End Processor. Be careful that this spark
does not damage any equipment or cause any personal injury.
To avoid the spark, connect the battery with power applied to the BackEnd Processor.
WARNING The battery has a safety device. Do not disassemble or alter the battery.
Charge the batteries only when the ambient temperature is between 0 and 40 C (32 and
104 F).
Do not short-circuit the battery by directly connecting the negative terminals with metal
objects.
Do not heat the battery or discard it in a fire.
Do not expose the battery to temperature over 60 C (140 F). Keep it away from fire and
other heat sources.
Do not charge the battery near a heat source, such as a fire or heater.
Do not leave the battery in direct sunlight.
Do not drop packs from height as it may cause possible malfunction damage.
Do not pierce the battery with a sharp object, hit it, or step on it.
Do not use a damaged battery.
Do not solder a battery.
Do not connect the battery to an electrical power outlet.
Do not contact PCM directly to prevent packs from ESD damage.
CAUTION To avoid the battery bursting, igniting, or fumes from the battery causing equipment
damage, observe the following precautions:
Do not immerse the battery in water or allow it to get wet.
Do not put the battery into a microwave oven or pressurized container.
If the battery leaks or emits an odor, remove it from all possible flammable sources.
If the battery emits an odor or heat, is deformed or discolored, or in a way appears
abnormal during use, recharging or storage, immediately remove it and stop using it. If
you have any questions about the battery, consult GE or your local representative.
Store the battery between -20 C (-4 F) and 60 C (140F).
Use only GE recognized batteries.
In case of the long term (3 months or more) storage:
Store the battery in a temperature range of 10 C (50 F) and 30 C (86F).
When charging for the first time after long-term storage, recover such packs to
original performance by repeating several cycles of full charging and discharging.
When storing packs for more than 6 months, charge at least once per 6 month period to
prevent leakage and deterioration in performance due to self-discharging.
1-20 Section 1-7 - Battery Safety

1/18/10
GE H EALTHCARE
CHAPTER1.FM
Section 1-8
Lockout/Tagout Requirements (For USA Only)
Follow OSHA Lockout/Tagout requirements by ensuring you are in total control of the electrical Mains
plug.
To apply Lockout/Tagout:
1.) Plan and prepare for shutdown.

2.) Shutdown the equipment.
3.) Isolate the equipment.
4.) Apply Lockout/Tagout Devices.
5.) Control all stored and residual energy.
6.) Verify isolation.
All potentially hazardous stored or residual energy is relieved.
NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ 9

When servicing parts of the system where there is exposure to voltage greater than 30 Volts:
1. Turn off the breaker.
2. Unplug the system.
3. Maintain control of the system power plug.
TAG
LOCKOUT
& 4. Wait for at least 20 seconds for capacitors to discharge as there are no test points to verify isolation.
Signed Date
Beware that the AC Control Box, Front End Processor and Back End Processor may be energized even
if the power is turned off when the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.
Section 1-9
Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts
Equipment being returned must be clean and free of blood and other infectious substances.
GEHC policy states that body fluids must be properly removed from any part or equipment prior to
shipment. GEHC employees, as well as customers, are responsible for ensuring that parts/equipment
have been properly decontaminated prior to shipment. Under no circumstance should a part or
equipment with visible body fluids be taken or shipped from a clinic or site (for example, body coils or
an ultrasound probe).
The purpose of the regulation is to protect employees in the transportation industry, as well as the
people who will receive or open this package.
NOTE: The US Department of Transportation (DOT) has ruled that items that were saturated and/or
dripping with human blood that are now caked with dried blood; or which were used or intended
for use in patient care are regulated medical waste for transportation purposes and must be
transported as a hazardous material.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER1.FM
Section 1-10
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
1-10-1 What is EMC?

Electromagnetic compatibility describes a level of performance of a device within its electromagnetic
environment. This environment consists of the device itself and its surroundings including other
equipment, power sources and persons with which the device must interface. Inadequate compatibility
results when a susceptible device fails to perform as intended due interference from its environment or
when the device produces unacceptable levels of emission to its environment. This interference is often
referred to as radiofrequency or electromagnetic interference (RFI/EMI) and can be radiated through
space or conducted over interconnecting power of signal cables. In addition to electromagnetic energy,
EMC also includes possible effects from electrical fields, magnetic fields, electrostatic discharge and
disturbances in the electrical power supply.
1-10-2 Compliance
The LOGIQ 9 unit conforms to all applicable conducted and radiated emission limits and to immunity
from electrostatic discharge, radiated and conducted RF fields, magnetic fields and power line transient
requirements.
For applicable standards refer to the Safety Chapter in the Basic User Manual.
NOTE: For CE Compliance, it is critical that all covers, screws, shielding, gaskets, mesh, clamps, are in
good condition, installed tightly without skew or stress. Proper installation following all
comments noted in this service manual is required in order to achieve full EMC performance.
1-10-3 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Prevention
WARNING Do not touch any boards with integrated circuits prior to taking the necessary ESD
precautions:
1. Always connect yourself, via an arm-wrist strap, to the advised ESD connection
point located on the Rear of the scanner (to the right of the power connector).
2. Follow general guidelines for handling of electrostatic sensitive equipment.
WARNING Risk of electrical shock, system must be turned off. Avoid all contact with electrical
contacts, conductors and components. Always use non-conductive handles designed
for the removal and replacement of ESD sensitive parts. All parts that have the potential
for storing energy must be discharged or isolated before making contact.
1-22 Section 1-10 - Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER1.FM
Section 1-11
Customer Assistance
1-11-1 Contact Information
If this equipment does not work as indicated in this Service Manual or in the User Manual, or if you
require additional assistance, please contact the local distributor or appropriate support resource, as
listed below.
Before you call, identify the following information, and acquire image (Alt+D) to send to Milwaukee:
1.) System ID serial number.

2.) Software version.
3.) Date and time of occurrence.
4.) Sequence of events leading to issue.
5.) Is the issue repeatable?
6.) Imaging mode, probe, preset/application.
7.) Media brand, speed, capacity, type.
8.) Save secondary image capture, cine loop, 4D multi-volume loop.
NOTE: Restart the application before resuming clinical scanning.
Table 1-6 Phone Numbers for Customer Assistance
Location Phone Number
USA Service: On-site 1-8004371171

GE Healthcare
Ultrasound Service Engineering Service: Parts 1-800-558-2040
9900 Innovation Drive
Wauwatosa, WI 53226 Applications Support 1-800-682-5327 or 1-262-524-5698
Canada 1-800-668-0732
Service 1-800-321-7937
Latin America
Applications Support 1-262-524-5698
Europe Phone: +33 (0) 130-831-300 (General Imaging and Cardiac)

GE Ultraschall Deutschland GmbH& Co. KG +43 (0) 7682-3800-26 (Voluson-Logiqbook)
BeethovenstraBe 239
Postfach 11 05 60, D-42655 Solingen Fax: +49 (0)2122-8024-31
Germany
Asia (Singapore)
Tel: +65 6291-8528
GE Ultrasound Asia
Service Department - Ultrasound
298 Tiong Bahru Road #15-01/06
Fax: +65 6291-7006
Central Plaza
Singapore 169730
Phone: 81-426-48-2940
Japan Support Center
Fax: 81-426-48-2905

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER1.FM
1-11-2 System Manufacturer
Table 1-7 System Manufacturer
Manufacturer FAX Number
GE Healthcare
- GE Medical Systems Ultrasound and Primary Care Diagnostics, LLC
9900 Innovation Drive 414-721-3865
Wauwatosa, WI 53226
USA
1-24 Section 1-11 - Customer Assistance

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER2.FM
Chapter 2
Site Preparation
Section 2-1
Overview
This chapter provides the information required to plan and prepare for the installation of a LOGIQ 9.
Included are descriptions of the facility and electrical needs to be met by the purchaser of the unit.

2-1 Overview 2-1
2-2 General Console Requirements 2-2
2-3 Facility Needs 2-6
Chapter 2 Site Preparation 2-1

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER2.FM
Section 2-2
General Console Requirements
2-2-1 Console Environmental Requirements
Table 2-2 Environmental Requirements - LOGIQ 9
Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Humidity Heat Dissipation
10o to 35oC -10 to 60 C 30 - 85% non-condensing 3500 BTU pr hour
NOTE: Temperature in degrees C. Conversion to Degrees F = ((Degrees C * 9/5) + 32).
2-2-1-1 Cooling
The cooling requirement for the LOGIQ 9 is 3500 BTU/hr. This figure does not include cooling needed
for lights, people, or other equipment in the room. Each person in the room places an additional 300
BTU/hr. demand on the cooling system.
2-2-1-2 Lighting
Bright light is needed for system installation, updates and repairs. However, operator and patient
comfort may be optimized if the room light is subdued and indirect. Therefore a combination lighting
system (dim/bright) is recommended. Keep in mind that lighting controls and dimmers can be a source
of EMI which could degrade image quality. These controls should be selected to minimize possible
interference.
2-2-2 Electrical Requirements

NOTE: GE Healthcare requires a dedicated power and ground for the proper operation of its
Ultrasound equipment. This dedicated power shall originate at the last distribution panel before
the system.
Sites with a mains power system with defined Neutral and Live
The dedicated line shall consist of one phase, a neutral (not shared with any other circuit), and a full
size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet.
Sites with a mains power system without a defined Neutral

The dedicated line shall consist of one phase (two lines), not shared with any other circuit, and a full
NOTE: Please note that image artifacts can occur, if at any time within the facility, the ground from the
main facility's incoming power source to the Ultrasound unit is only a conduit.
2-2-2-1 LOGIQ 9 Power Requirements
Table 2-3 Electrical Specifications for LOGIQ 9
Voltage Tolerances Current Frequency

100-120 VAC 10% 9.5 A 50-60 Hz
200-240 VAC 10% 4.75 A 50-60 Hz
2-2-2-2 Inrush Current

Inrush current is not a factor to consider due to the inrush current limiting properties of the power
supplies.
2-2 Section 2-2 - General Console Requirements

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER2.FM
2-2-2-3 Site Circuit Breaker

It is recommended that the branch circuit breaker for the machine be readily accessible.
CAUTION POWER OUTAGE MAY OCCUR.

The LOGIQ 9 requires a dedicated single branch circuit. To avoid circuit overload and
possible loss of critical care equipment, make sure you DO NOT have any other equipment
operating on the same circuit.
2-2-2-4 Site Power Outlets

A dedicated AC power outlet must be within reach of the unit without extension cords. Other adequate
outlets for the external peripherals, medical and test equipment needed to support this unit must also
be present within 1 m (3.2 ft.) of the unit. Electrical installation must meet all current local, state, and
national electrical codes.
2-2-2-5 Unit Power Plug

If the unit arrives without a power plug, or with the wrong plug, you must contact your GE dealer or the
installation engineer must supply what is locally required.
2-2-2-6 Power Stability Requirements
Voltage drop-out
Max 10 ms.
Power Transients
(All applications)
Less than 25% of nominal peak voltage for less than 1 millisecond for any type of transient, including
line frequency, synchronous, asynchronous, or aperiodic transients.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER2.FM
2-2-3 EMI Limitations

Ultrasound machines are susceptible to Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) from radio frequencies,
magnetic fields, and transients in the air or wiring. Ultrasound machines also generate EMI. The
LOGIQ 9 complies with limits as stated on the EMC label. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation.
Possible EMI sources should be identified before the unit is installed.
Electrical and electronic equipment may produce EMI unintentionally as the result of a defect. These
sources include:
medical lasers,
scanners,
cauterizing guns,
computers,
monitors,
fans,
gel warmers,
microwave ovens,
light dimmers
portable phones.
The presence of a broadcast station or broadcast van may also cause interference.
See Table 2-4 for EMI Prevention tips.
Table 2-4 EMI Prevention/Abatement
EMI Rule Details
Keep the unit at least 5 meters or 15 feet away from other EMI sources. Special shielding may be
Be aware of RF sources required to eliminate interference problems caused by high frequency, high powered radio or video
broadcast signals.
Poor grounding is the most likely reason a unit will have noisy images. Check grounding of the
Ground the unit
power cord and power outlet.
After you finish repairing or updating the system, replace all covers and tighten all screws. Any
Replace all screws, RF cable with an external connection requires a magnet wrap at each end. Install the shield over the
gaskets, covers, cores front of card cage. Loose or missing covers or RF gaskets allow radio frequencies to interfere with
the ultrasound signals.
If more than 20% or a pair of the fingers on an RF gasket are broken, replace the gasket. Do not
Replace broken RF gaskets
turn on the unit until any loose metallic part is removed.
Do not place labels where Never place a label where RF gaskets meet the unit. Otherwise, the gap created will permit RF
RF gaskets touch metal leakage. Or, if a label has been found in such a position, move the label.
Use GE specified harnesses The interconnect cables are grounded and require ferrite beads and other shielding. Also, cable
and peripherals length, material, and routing are all important; do not change from what is specified.
Take care with cellular

Cellular phones may transmit a 5 V/m signal; that could cause image artifacts.
phones
Do not allow cables to lie across the top of the card cage or hang out of the peripheral bays. Loop
Properly dress peripheral
the excess length for peripheral cables inside the peripheral bays. Attach the monitor cables to the
cables
frame.
2-4 Section 2-2 - General Console Requirements

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER2.FM
2-2-4 Scan Probe Environmental Requirements

Table 2-5 Environmental Requirements - Probes
Operating Temperature Storage Temperature

Standard Probes 10o to 40o C -10 to 60 C
4D Probes 18o to 40o C -10o to 50 o C
NOTE: Temperature in degrees C. Conversion to Degrees F = (Degrees C * 9/5) + 32).
NOTICE SYSTEMS AND ELECTRONIC PROBES ARE DESIGNED FOR STORAGE TEMPERATURES
OF -20 TO +50 degrees C. WHEN EXPOSED TO LARGE TEMPERATURE VARIATIONS, THE
PRODUCT SHOULD BE KEPT IN ROOM TEMPERATURE FOR 10 HOURS BEFORE USE.
2-2-5 Time and Manpower Requirements

Site preparation takes time. Begin Pre-installation checks as soon as possible. If possible, allow six
weeks before delivery, for enough time to make necessary changes.
CAUTION The LOGIQ 9 weighs at least 168kg (370 lbs.) when ready to use, depending on installed
monitors and peripherals. Care must be used when moving it or replacing its parts. Failure
to follow the precautions listed could result in injury, uncontrolled motion and costly
damage.
ALWAYS:
Be sure the pathway is clear.
Use slow, careful motions.
Use two people when moving on inclines or lifting more than 16 kg (35 lbs).

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER2.FM
Section 2-3
Facility Needs
2-3-1 Purchaser Responsibilities
The work and materials needed to prepare the site is the responsibility of the purchaser. Delay,
confusion, and waste of manpower can be avoided by completing pre-installation work before delivery.
Use the Pre installation checklist to verify that all needed steps have been taken. Purchaser
responsibility includes:
Procuring the materials required.

Completing the preparations before delivery of the ultrasound system.
Paying the costs for any alterations and modifications not specifically provided in the sales contract.
NOTE: All electrical installations that are preliminary to the positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for
the equipment must be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces
of electrical equipment, calibrations, and testing must also be performed by qualified personnel. The
products involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) are highly sophisticated and special
engineering competence is required. All electrical work on these products must comply with the
requirements of applicable electrical codes. The purchaser of GE equipment must only utilize qualified
personnel to perform electrical servicing on the equipment.
The desire to use a nonlisted or customer provided product or to place an approved product further
from the system than the interface kit allows presents challenges to the installation team. To avoid
delays during installation, such variances should be made known to the individuals or group performing
the installation at the earliest possible date (preferably prior to the purchase).
The ultrasound suite must be clean prior to delivery of the machine. Carpet is not recommended
because it collects dust and creates static. Potential sources of EMI (electromagnetic interference)
should also be investigated before delivery. Dirt, static, and EMI can negatively impact system reliability.
2-6 Section 2-3 - Facility Needs

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER2.FM
2-3-2 Required Features

NOTE: GE Healthcare requires a dedicated power and ground for the proper operation of its
Ultrasound equipment. This dedicated power shall originate at the last distribution panel before
the system.
Sites with a mains power system with defined Neutral and Live
The dedicated line shall consist of one phase, a neutral (not shared with any other circuit), and a full
Sites with a mains power system without a defined Neutral

The dedicated line shall consist of one phase (two lines), not shared with any other circuit, and a full
NOTE: Please note that image artifacts can occur, if at any time within the facility, the ground from the
main facility's incoming power source to the Ultrasound unit is only a conduit.
Door opening is at least 76 cm (30 in) wide.

Proposed location for unit is at least 0.3 m (1 ft.) from the wall for cooling
Power outlet and place for any external peripheral are within 2 m (6.5 ft) of each other with
peripheral within 1 m of the unit to connect cables.
NOTE: The LOGIQ 9 has four outlets inside the unit. One is for the monitor and three for on-board
peripherals.
Power outlets for other medical equipment and gel warmer

Power outlets for test equipment and modem within 1 m (3.2 ft) of unit
Clean and protected space to store transducers (in their cases or on a rack)
Material to safely clean probes (done with a plastic container, never metal)
2-3-3 Desirable Features

Door is at least 92 cm (3 ft.) wide
Circuit breaker for dedicated power outlet is easily accessible
Sink with hot and cold water
Receptacle for biohazardous waste, like used probe sheaths
Emergency oxygen supply
Storage for linens and equipment
Nearby waiting room, lavatory, and dressing room
Dual level lighting (bright and dim)
Lockable cabinet ordered by GE for its software and proprietary manuals

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER2.FM
2-3-4 Minimal Floor Plan Suggestion
Figure 2-1 Minimal Floor Plan

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER2.FM
2-3-5 Networking Setup Requirements
2-3-5-1 Stand Alone Scanner (without Network Connection)

None.
2-3-5-2 Scanner Connected to Hospitals Network

Supported networks: DICOM Network (option)
2-3-5-3 Purpose of the DICOM Network Function

DICOM services provide the operator with clinically useful features for moving images and patient
information over a hospital network. Examples of DICOM services include the transfer of images to
workstations for viewing or transferring images to remote printers. As an added benefit, transferring
images in this manner frees up the on-board monitor and peripherals, enabling viewing to be done while
scanning continues. With DICOM, images can be archived, stored, and retrieved faster, easier, and at
a lower cost.
2-3-5-4 DICOM Option Pre-installation Requirements

To configure the LOGIQ 9 to work with other network connections, the sites network administrator
must provide some necessary information.
Use the Connectivity Setup Worksheet on 3-22 to record the required information that must include:
A host name, local port number, AE Title, IP address and Net Mask for the LOGIQ 9.
The IP addresses for the default gateway and other routers at the site for ROUTING
INFORMATION.
The host name, IP address, port and AE Title for each device the site wants connected to the
LOGIQ 9 for DICOM APPLICATION INFORMATION. A field for the make (manufacturer) and
the revision of the device, is also included. This information may be useful for solving errors.
2-3-5-5 InSite Requirements

Network 10/100 or 10/100/1G Interface.
Optional analog phone line for older products.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER2.FM
This page was intentionally left blank.

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER3.FM
Chapter 3
System Setup
Section 3-1
Overview
3-1-1 The Purpose of Chapter 3
This chapter contains information needed to unpack and set up the unit. Included are procedures to
receive, unpack and configure the equipment. System operation is verified at the factory.

3-1 Overview 3-1
3-2 Set Up Reminders 3-2
3-3 Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment 3-4
3-4 Preparing for Set Up 3-6
3-5 Completing the Setup 3-8
3-6 System Configuration 3-11
3-7 Available Probes 3-21
3-8 Software/Option Configuration 3-21
3-9 Connectivity Setup Worksheet 3-22
3-10 Before Starting a Software Upgrade 3-23
3-11 Loading Base Image Software 3-23
3-12 Loading Application Software 3-23
3-13 System Setup 3-23
3-14 Connecting USB Line Printers - Black/White and Color 3-24
3-15 Paperwork 3-25
3-16 Checks 3-26
Chapter 3 System Setup 3-1

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER3.FM
Section 3-2
Set Up Reminders
3-2-1 Average Set Up Time
Table 3-2 Average Set Up Time
Description Average Set Up Time Comments

Unpacking the scanner 0.5 hours
Scanner wo/options 0.5 hours Dependant on the required configuration
DICOM Option 0.5 - 2.0 hours Dependant on the configuration amount
3-2-2 Set Up Warnings

1.) Since the LOGIQ 9 weighs at least 168kg (370 lbs.) without options, two people are required to
unpack it. Two people are also required for installing any additional items in excess of 16 kg (35 lbs).
2.) There are no operator serviceable components. To prevent shock, do not remove any covers or
panels. Should problems or malfunctions occur, turn off the breaker, and unplug the power cord.
Only qualified service personnel should carry out servicing and troubleshooting.
3.) After being transported, the unit may be very cold or hot. If this is the case, allow the unit to
acclimate before you turn it on. It requires one hour for each 2.5C increment its temperature is
below 10C or above 40C.
CAUTION Equipment damage possibility. Turning the system on without acclimation after arriving at site
may cause the system to be damaged.
Table 3-3 Acclimation Time
C 60 55 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 -5 -10 -15 -20 -25 -30 -35 -40
F 140 131 122 113 104 96 86 77 68 59 50 41 32 23 14 5 -4 -13 -22 -31 -40
hrs 8 6 4 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
3-2-2-1 Brake Pedal Operation
WARNING REMEMBER: If the front caster swivel lock is engaged for transportation, pressing the
release pedal once disengages the swivel lock. You must depress the release pedal a
second time to engage the brake.
3-2-2-2 Operator I/O Panel Position

If weight is placed on the Operator I/O Panel in its extended position, the console could tip over
WARNING The system should NOT be moved with the Operator I/O Panel extended. Move the
Operator I/O Panel to its centered and locked position. Lower the Operator I/O Panel as
much as possible before moving the system.
3-2 Section 3-2 - Set Up Reminders

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER3.FM
3-2-3 Safety Reminders
DANGER WHEN USING ANY TEST INSTRUMENT THAT IS CAPABLE OF OPENING THE
AC GROUND LINE (I.E., METERS GROUND SWITCH IS OPEN), DONT TOUCH
THE UNIT!
CAUTION Two people should unpack the unit because of its weight. Two people are required whenever
a part weighing 16 kg (35 lbs) or more must be lifted.
CAUTION If the unit is very cold or hot, do not turn on its power until it has had a chance to acclimate
to its operating environment.
CAUTION To prevent electrical shock, connect the unit to a properly grounded power outlet. Do not use
a three- to two-prong adapter. This defeats safety grounding.
CAUTION Do NOT wear the ESD wrist strap when you work on live circuits and more than 30 V peak is
present.
CAUTION Do not use a 20 Amp to 15 Amp adapter on the 120 Vac units power cord. This unit requires
a dedicated 20 A circuit and can have a 15A plug if the on-board peripherals do not cause the
unit to draw more than 14.0 amps.
CAUTION Do not operate this unit unless all board covers and frame panels are securely in place.
System performance and cooling require this.
CAUTION OPERATOR MANUAL(S)

The User Manual(s) should be fully read and understood before operating the LOGIQ 9 and
kept near the unit for quick reference.
CAUTION ACOUSTIC OUTPUT HAZARD

Although the ultrasound energy transmitted from the LOGIQ 9 probe is within FDA limits,
avoid unnecessary exposure. Ultrasound energy can produce heat and mechanical damage.
Figure 3-1 Environmental Labels

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER3.FM
Section 3-3
Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment
CAUTION Two people are needed to unpack the unit because of its weight.
Attempts to move the unit considerable distances or on an incline by one person could result
in injury or damage or both.
Two people are required whenever a part weighing 16 kg (35 lbs) or more must be lifted or
pushed up or down a slope.
CAUTION Remember to use relevant Personal Protecting Equipment during packing/unpacking. Check
with your local EHS representative.
Table 3-4 Unpacking Procedure
Step Task
1. Open the four hinges on each door
2. Remove the doors at both ends of the box
3. Place the front door against the rear edge of the pallet. The front door can be used as a ramp.
Front Door Be sure to place the

used as ramp. ramp (front door) as
illustrated here.
4. Carefully remove the accessory box, and any other items, including the wooden shelf above the scanners keyboard and all the filling
material, from the wooden box.
3-4 Section 3-3 - Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment

1/18/10
GE H EALTHCARE
CHAPTER3.FM
Table 3-4 Unpacking Procedure (Continued)
Step Task
5. Press once on the swivel lock to release the brake.
Swivel Lock
Caution: Two people are needed in the next step due to the weight of the equipment.
6. Carefully move the scanner out of the wooden box, down the ramp.
7. Remove the clear plastic (wrapped around the scanner) from the unit.

10/12/10
CHAPTER3.FM
GE H EALTHCARE
Section 3-4
Preparing for Set Up
3-4-1 Verify Customer Order
Compare items received by the customer to that which is listed on the delivery order. Report any items
that are missing, back ordered, or damaged.
3-4-2 Physical Inspection
3-4-2-1 System Voltage Settings

Verify that the scanner is set to the correct voltage.
The Voltage settings for the LOGIQ 9 Scanner are found on a label to the right of the Power switch
and External I/O, on the rear of the system.
3-4-2-2 Rating Plate
NOTE: This Rating Plate example is a representation of several designs used.
GE Healthcare LOGIQ 9
CISPR 11
GROUP 1 CLASS A
200 kg
Rating Plate
Figure 3-2 Rating Plate Example
3-6 Section 3-4 - Preparing for Set Up

GE HEALTHCARE
10/12/10
CHAPTER3.FM
3-4-2-3 ETL Testing Laboratories Safety Rating Label

This ETL label is required for all USA systems.
GE Healthcare LOGIQ 9
ETL Label
CISPR 11
GROUP 1 CLASS A
200 kg
Figure 3-3 ETL Label Example
WARNING CONNECTING A LOGIQ 9 SCANNER TO THE WRONG VOLTAGE LEVEL WILL MOST
LIKELY DESTROY THE SCANNER.
3-4-2-4 Video Formats

Check that the video format is set to the locally used video standard, NTSC or PAL.
3-4-3 EMI Protection

This unit has been designed to minimize the effects of Electo-Magnetic Interference (EMI). Many of the
covers, shields, and screws are provided primarily to protect the system from image artifacts caused by
this interference. For this reason, it is imperative that all covers and hardware are installed and secured
before the unit is put into operation.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER3.FM
Section 3-5
Completing the Setup
3-5-1 Power On / Boot Up
NOTE: After turning off a system, wait at least ten seconds before turning it on again. The system may not be
able to boot if power is recycled too quickly.
3-5-1-1 Scanner Power On

1.) Connect the Power Cable to the back of the system.
2.) Ensure the Cable Clip slips securely over the shoulders on the molded plug.
3.) Connect the Main Power Cable to a hospital grade power receptacle with the proper rated voltage.
Never use an adapter that would circumvent the safety ground.
4.) Switch ON the Circuit Breaker at the rear of the system.
When power is applied to the scanner and the rear Circuit Breaker is turned ON, power is
distributed to the Cooling Unit, Control Panel, Monitor, Internal and External I/O Boards,
Peripherals and the Back-end Processor.
Cable Clip
Circuit Breaker
Mains Power Cable
Figure 3-4 Circuit Breaker and Power Cable on Back of Scanner, with Power On
NOTICE When AC power is applied to the scanner, the On / Off switch on the Control panel (Figure 3-5) indicates
the Back End Processor is in standby mode:
For BT03 systems and prior, the On / Off switch illuminates amber.
For BT04 systems and later, the On / Off switch blinks amber and green.
3-8 Section 3-5 - Completing the Setup

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER3.FM
3-5-1-2 Back-end Processor Boot Up

1.) Press the On / Off switch on the Control Panel once.
When the On / Off switch on the Control Panel is pressed once, the Back-end Processor starts
and the software code is distributed to initiate the scanner.
No status messages are displayed during this process.
On / Off switch
Figure 3-5 On / Off switch
3-5-2 Power Off / Shutdown

3-5-2-1 Back-end Processor Power Down

1.) Press the On / Off switch on the Control Panel once to display the SYSTEM - EXIT menu.
2.) Select Shutdown from the SYSTEM - EXIT menu.
Figure 3-6 System Exit Menu

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER3.FM
3-5-2-2 Scanner Shutdown
Cable Clip
Circuit Breaker
Mains Power Cable
Figure 3-7 Circuit Breaker and Power Cable on Back of Scanner, with Power On
1.) Switch OFF the Circuit Breaker at the back of the system.
2.) Disconnect the Mains Power Cable is necessary. For example: Relocating the scanner.
NOTICE Disconnecting the Mains Power Cable before switching OFF the Circuit Breaker will activate the
uninterruptible power system (UPS) in the backend processor, forcing an ordered shutdown of the
system.
NOTICE The UPS serves only as a battery backup that allows for a soft shut-down of the scanner to prevent file
corruption. IT DOES NOT REGULATE INCOMING VOLTAGE.
3-5-3 Transducer Connection and Removal

1.) To connect a transducer to one of the three right-most transducer receptacles:
a.) Ensure that the transducer twist lock lever is in the horizontal position.
b.) Insert the transducer connector on the receptacle guide pin until it touches the receptacle
mating surface.
c.) Twist the transducer twist lock lever to vertical position to lock it in place.
2.) To disconnect a transducer from one of the three right-most transducer receptacles:
a.) Turn the transducer twist lock lever to the horizontal position.
b.) Separate the transducer connector from the receptacle mating surface.
NOTE: It is not necessary to turn OFF power to connect or disconnect a transducer.
3-10 Section 3-5 - Completing the Setup

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER3.FM
Section 3-6
System Configuration
3-6-1 System Specifications
3-6-1-1 Physical Dimensions

The physical dimensions of the LOGIQ 9 unit are summarized in Table 3-5 and Table 3-6.
Table 3-1 lists the size of LOGIQ 9, with monitor and on-board peripherals.
Table 3-5 Physical Dimensions of LOGIQ 9
Height
Width Depth
Minimum Maximum
127 cm / 50 inches 160.7 cm / 63.25 inches 64 cm / 25.2 inches 89.9 cm / 35.4 inches
3-6-1-2 Console Weight
Table 3-6 Weight of LOGIQ 9 and Monitors, With and Without Peripherals
Model With Peripherals - kg [lbs] Without Peripherals - kg [lbs]

LOGIQ 9 with CRT 206 [454] 185 [408]
LOGIQ 9 with CRT,

Upgraded to LCD 206 [454] 185 [408]
(includes counterweight)
LOGIQ 9 with LCD 192 [423] 168 [370]
3-6-1-3 Acoustic Noise Output:

Less than 70dB(A) according to DIN 45635 - 19 - 01 - KL2.
3-6-2 Electrical Specifications

Table 3-7 Electrical Specifications for LOGIQ 9
Voltage Tolerances Current Frequency

100-120 VAC 10% 9.5 A 50-60 Hz
200-240 VAC 10% 4.75 A 50-60 Hz

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER3.FM
3-6-3 On-Board Optional Peripherals

Table 3-8 Approved On-Board Peripherals
Device Manufacturer Model Video Signal

B/W Video Printer SONY UP-895MDW NA
B/W Video Printer SONY UP-D897MD NA
HS_MD3000U NTSC
Video Cassette Recorder Mitsubishi
HS_MD3000E PAL
SVO-9500MD NTSC
Video Cassette Recorder SONY
SVO-9500-MDP PAL
UP-51MD
UP-D21
Color Video Printer SONY
UP-D55
UP-D23MD
3-12 Section 3-6 - System Configuration

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER3.FM
3-6-4 External I/O Connector Panel (Back of system)
Figure 3-8 External I/O Panel Labels (Prior to BT03)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Figure 3-9 External I/O Panel Connectors

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER3.FM
3-6-4 External I/O Connector Panel (Back of system) (contd)
Table 3-9 External I/O Connector Descriptions
Item Connector Name Table Number Description
1 Audio Output (Left) RCA Phono Jack
2 Audio Output (Right) RCA Phono Jack
3 Trigger Output BNC Connector
Hirose Electric Co. RM12BRB-5S,

4 Footswitch Table 3-10
Footswich transport shelf is in the back at the bottom
5 RS232 Com1 DSUB 9 pin male
6 Expose 1 Table 3-11 Mini-phone Jack
7 Expose 2 Table 3-11 Mini-phone Jack
8 Modem Connection Table 3-12 RJ-11 with global adapter kit for connection
9 Composite Video Out BNC Connector, Color Output
10 B/W Video Out BNC Connector, Black and White Output
11 S-Video Output Table 3-13 4 pin mini-DIN
12 S-VGA Output Table 3-14 DSUB-HD22 15 Pin female
13 USB (1) Table 3-15
14 Ethernet Connection Table 3-16 RJ-45 Connector

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER3.FM
3-6-4-1 External I/O Pin Outs
Table 3-10 Footswitch Connector
Pin No Output Signal Description

1 Foot 1 Left switch
2 Floating Ground Ground
3 Foot 2 Center switch
4 Floating Ground Ground
5 Foot 3 Right switch
Table 3-11 Remote Expose 1 & 2 Connectors
1 SHUTTER/PRINT Print command to external device
2 Signal GND Ground
Table 3-12 Modem, RJ11 Modular 6 Pin
2 TEL L4 Telephone L4
Others NC Non-connection
Table 3-13 S-Video Connector, 4 Pin

1 SVIDEO OUT/IN YG Y (Luma) GND
2 SVIDEO OUT/IN CG C (Chroma) GND
3 SVIDEO OUT/IN Y Y (Luma) SIGNAL
4 SVIDEO OUT/IN C C (Chroma) SIGNAL

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER3.FM
3-6-4-1 External I/O Pin Outs (contd)
Table 3-14 S-VGA Connector, Shrinked Sub-D 15 Pin
1 VGA OUT1 R Red
2 VGA OUT1 G Green
3 VGA OUT1 B Blue
4, 9,11,12,15 N/C N/C
5, 6, 7, 8, 10 GND GND
13 VGA OUT1 HS H Sync
14 VGA OUT1 VS V Sync
Table 3-15 USB (A) Connector
1 VCC USB Power Supply
2 - Data USB Data (-)
3 + Data USB Data (+)
4 GND USB Power Ground
Table 3-16 Ethernet Connector, RJ45 Modular 8 Pin
1 ETHER TD Ethernet RD+
2 ETHER TD Ethernet RD-
3 ETHER RD Ethernet TD+
6 ETHER RD Ethernet TD-
Others NC Non-connection

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER3.FM
3-6-5 Other I/O Ports (Front of system)
1 2
5
Figure 3-10 Front Connectors
Table 3-17 Front I/O Connector Descriptions
Item Connector Name Description
1 USB On BEP 3.x/4.x Only
2 USB On BEP 3.x/4.x Only
3 CW CW probe connection port (optional)
4 4D 4D Probe connection port (optional)
The two left most connectors are recommended for

5 Probe Connectors
4D Probe placement
6 USB On upper console for wired voice connection Only

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER3.FM
3-6-5 Other I/O Ports (Front of system) (contd)
Table 3-18 CW Connector, J1 (Optional)
2 DOPIN COAX CENTER, RED JACKET
3 DOPIN GND COAX SHIELD, RED JACKET
5 ID0 R1-2
6 PCW COAX CENTER, WHT JACKET
7 PCW GND COAX SHIELD, WHT JACKET
8 ID1 R1-1
10 OUTER SHIELD
Shell OUTER SHIELD
Table 3-19 4D Connector (Optional)
Pin No Signal
4 GND
8 SIN_DRV
7 SIN_RTN
2 ACTIVE
5 COS_RTN
6 COS_DRV
3 HALL1
Table 3-20 Flock of Birds, Small Connector (Optional, not shown in Figure 3-10)
Pin No Signal
1 EEC
2 EXC_RTN
3 Rx_Y
4 Rx_X
5 Rx_RTN
6 Rx_Z
7 EXC
8 EED

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER3.FM
3-6-5 Other I/O Ports (Front of system) (contd)
Table 3-21 Flock of Birds, Large Connector (Optional, not shown in Figure 3-10)
Pin No Signal
1 TYRTNO
2 EECO_TX
3 EED_TX
4 PWM_EMI
5 TXRTN0
6 TZRTN0
7 VCC_
8 GND
Center TYRTNO

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER3.FM
3-6-6 Video Specification

Video specifications may be needed to be able to connect laser cameras or other devices to the
LOGIQ 9.
NOTE: 800x600 75hz is the only output available for external video connectors
Table 3-22 Video Specifications
External Video
Connection
CRT CRT and LCD LCD
1024x768 800x600 1280x1024

Timing Parameter 75Hz 75Hz 60Hz
Horizontal Rate [kHz] 60.02 46.88 64.00
Horizontal Period [s] 16.66 21.33 15.62
Pixel Clock [MHz] 78.75 49.50 108.00
H Blank Width [s] 3.66 5.17 3.77

H Sync Width [s] 1.22 1.62 1.03
H Front Porch [s] 0.20 0.32 0.44
Active Horizontal Period [s] 13.00 16.16 11.85
Vertical Rate [Hz] 75.03 75.00 60.00
Vertical Period [ms] 13.33 13.33 16.67
not available at
V Sync Width [lines=ms] 32=0.53 25=0.53
printing
V Front Porch [lines=s] 3=50.00 3=64.00 .016ms
Equalization Gate [lines=s] 1=16.66 1=21.3 N/A
Lines: Field/Frame 800 625 1066
Active Lines/Frame 768 600 1024

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER3.FM
Section 3-7
Available Probes
See Specifications in the LOGIQ 9 User Reference Manual for probes and intended use.
See Chapter 9 "Renewal Parts" on page 9-1, for part numbers to be used when ordering new or
replacement probes.
Section 3-8
Software/Option Configuration
Refer to the LOGIQ 9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 16, Customizing Your System for information on
configuring items like Hospital, Department, Language, Units (of measure), Date, Time and Date
Format.
For information on configuring Software Options, Refer to the LOGIQ 9 Basic User Manual, Chapter
16, Customizing Your System.
For information on configuring DICOM Connectivity, Refer to the LOGIQ 9 Basic User Manual,
Chapter 16, Customizing Your System.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER3.FM
Section 3-9
Connectivity Setup Worksheet
Site System Information
Floor: Comments:
Site:
Dept: Room:
LOGIQ SN: Type: REV:
CONTACT INFORMATION
Name Title Phone E-Mail Address
TCP/IP Settings
Name - AE Title:
IP Settings Remote Archive Setup
IP Address: Remote Archive IP:

Subnet Mask: Remote Archive Name:
Default Gateway:
Services (Destination Devices)

Device Type Manufacturer Name IP Address Port AE Title
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
3-22 Section 3-9 - Connectivity Setup Worksheet

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER3.FM
Section 3-10
Before Starting a Software Upgrade
This information has been moved, see
Section 8-6 "Before Starting a Software Load" on page 8-17
Section 3-11
Loading Base Image Software
Section 8-8 "Loading Base Image Software - R4.x.x and prior" on page 8-26
Section 8-9 "Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x" on page 8-33, or
Section 8-10 "Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later" on page 8-38
Section 3-12
Loading Application Software
Section 8-11 "Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior" on page 8-44
Section 8-12 "Loading Application Software - R6.x.x" on page 8-49, or
Section 8-13 "Loading Application Software - R7.x.x or Later" on page 8-56
Section 3-13
System Setup
This section has been moved - See Section 8-15 on page 8-65

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER3.FM
Section 3-14
Connecting USB Line Printers - Black/White and Color
3-14-1 Printer Set Up (R4.x and later)

1.) Attach the USB cable from the printer to the USB port on the back of the ultrasound system. The
New Hardware detected pop-up will be displayed briefly.
2.) If youre attaching an HP Deskjet 990Cxi or 970Cxi printer or HP Deskjet 6122, the system should
immediately recognize the newly attached printer and automatically install and configure the printer
for you without any additional user intervention.
On Systems Running Software prior to R4.x.x follow the steps in 3-14-2 on page 3-24.
3-14-2 Printer Set Up (R2.x)
3-14-2-1 To Set Up Printer Before Installing Application Software

If you must connect the printer in the following order:
Base Image Software -> Printer -> Application software, complete the following steps:
1.) Install the Base Image Software.

2.) Plug in the printer USB cable and the system will recognize the device.
3.) Load the Application Software.
.
3-24 Section 3-14 - Connecting USB Line Printers - Black/White and Color
1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER3.FM
Section 3-15
Paperwork
NOTE: During and after installation, the documentation (i.e. User Manuals, Installation Manuals...) for the
peripheral units must be kept as part of the original system documentation. This will ensure that all
relevant safety and user information is available during operation and service of the complete system.
3-15-1 Product Locator Installation

Upon completion of the system set up, complete and mail the Product Locator Installation card.
NOTE: The Product Locator Installation card may vary from the Product Locator cards below.
Figure 3-11 Product Locator Installation Card
3-15-2 User Manual(s)

Check that the correct User Manual(s), for the system and software revision, is included with the
installation. Specific language versions of the User Manual may also be available. Check with your GE
Sales Representative for availability.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER3.FM
Section 3-16
Checks
Perform all functional checks.
3-26 Section 3-16 - Checks

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER4.FM
Chapter 4
Functional Checks
Section 4-1
Overview
This chapter provides procedures for quickly checking major functions of the LOGIQ 9 scanner
diagnostics by using the built-in service software, and power supply adjustments. System operation is
verified at the factory.
Table 4-1 Chapter 4 Contents

4-1 Overview 4-1
4-2 General Procedure 4-2
4-3 Software Configuration Checks 4-23
4-4 Peripheral Checks 4-24
4-5 Mechanical Function Checks 4-25
NOTICE Most of the information pertaining to this Functional Checks chapter is found in the LOGIQ 9
Quick Guide / User Guide (see below).
Table 4-2 Quick Guide / User Guide Direction Numbers
Application Software Version Direction Number

R2.X 2309820-100
R3.X 2384458-100
R4.X 5113779-100
R6.X 5140807-100
R7.X 5173872-100
R9.X 5338270-100 (User Guide)
4-1-2 Required Equipment

An empty (blank) MO Disk (If system has a Magneto-Optical Drive) or blank CD-R or DVD-R.
At least one transducer. See Probes on page 1-70. for an overview.
(normally you should check all the transducers used on the system)
Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4-1

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER4.FM
Section 4-2
General Procedure
CAUTION SYSTEM REQUIRES ALL COVERS

Operate this unit only when all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. The
covers are required for safe operation, good system performance and cooling purposes.

TAG
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
4-2 Section 4-2 - General Procedure

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER4.FM
4-2-1 System Features
4-2-1-1 Control Panel
15 2 1 5
19
18
11 17
16
14
3
6
4
14
7
13
8 10 9 12
Figure 4-1 Control Panel Tour
1. Touch Panel and Controls 11. Depth

2. Touch Panel Brightness Control 12. Imaging Feature Keys
3. Video 13. Freeze and Print Keys
4. Audio On/Off and Volume 14. Probe Holder

5. TGC 15. Gel Holder
6. Reverse 16. On/Off Switch
7. Additional Feature Keys 17. 4D probe holder insert
8. Keyboard 18. USB Connector - for wired mic only
9. Mode/Gain Keys 19. Subwoofer Volume knob - retain settings set at factory
10. Imaging/Measurement Keys

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER4.FM
4-2-1-2 Touch Panel
Figure 4-2 Touch Panel Display Tour - BT06
Table 4-3 Touch Panel Display

1. Patient Enters Patient screen.
2. Scan Enters scanning mode screen.
3. Reports Activates default report and Touch Panel of report choices.
4. End Exam Activates Image Management and Touch Panel with end of exam options.
5. Utility Activates the configuration system.
6. Preset Selects the application to use.
7. Probe Indicator Indicates and selects the probes.
NOTE: Different menus are displayed depending on which Touch Panel Menu is selected.
At the bottom of the Touch Panel, there are five combination rotary dials/push buttons. The functionality
of these rotaries changes, depending upon the currently displayed menu. Press the button to switch
between controls (as with Focus Position/Number), or rotate the dial to adjust the value.

1/18/10
GE H EALTHCARE
CHAPTER4.FM
4-2-1-3 Monitor Display
Figure 4-3 Monitor Display Tour
Table 4-4 Monitor Display Features

1. Institution/Hospital Name, Date, Time, Operator Identification. 15. Imaging Parameters by Mode.
2. Patient Name, Patient Identification. 16. Focal Zone Indicator.
3. Power Output Readout 17. TGC.
4. GE Symbol: Probe Orientation Marker. 18. Depth Scale.
5. Image Preview. 19. Body Pattern.
6. Gray/Color Bar. 20. Image Management Icons: Active Images, Delete, Previous/Next
7. Cine Gauges Image and Menu.
8. Worksheet/Direct Report 21. Current date and time, Caps Lock: (lit when on), network
9. Measurement Summary Window. connection indicator (PC=connected, PC with X=not connected),
10. Image. Human face (VoiceScan), iLinq, system messages display.
11. Measurement Calipers. 22. Trackball Functionality Status: Scroll, M&A (Measurement and
12. Measurement Results Window + Direct Report Analysis), Position, Size, Scan Area Width and Tilt.
13. Image Clipboard.
14. Probe Identifier. Exam Preset.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER4.FM
DANGER ALWAYS CONNECT THE UNIT TO A FIXED POWER SOCKET WHICH HAS THE
PROTECTIVE GROUNDING CONNECTOR.
DANGER NEVER USE A THREE-TO-TWO PRONG ADAPTER; THIS DEFEATS THE

SAFETY GROUND.
DANGER ENSURE THAT THE POWER CORD AND PLUG ARE INTACT AND THAT THE
POWER PLUG IS THE PROPER HOSPITAL-GRADE TYPE (WHERE REQUIRED).

OPERATE THIS UNIT ONLY WHEN ALL BOARD COVERS AND FRAME PANELS ARE
SECURELY IN PLACE. THE COVERS ARE REQUIRED FOR SAFE OPERATION, GOOD SYSTEM
PERFORMANCE AND COOLING PURPOSES.
NOTICE Use only power supply cords, cables, and plugs provided by or designated by GE Healthcare.
NOTE: Do not cycle the Circuit Breaker ON-OFF-ON in less than five -5- seconds. When turning OFF the
Circuit Breaker, the system should de-energize completely before turning the circuit breaker ON.
NOTE: When turning on a system from standby mode, it takes a few seconds before it responds. Do not push
the On/off button again during this period. A second push will initiate a full shutdown.
NOTE: If the unit has been unplugged or main breaker in the OFF state for more than 3 to 5 days, the unit may
not boot, or may beep when turned on.
NOTE: On BEP3.X and BEP4.X, there is a blinking stand-by indicator. When the ON/OFF switch blinks
between green and amber, the system is in STANDBY.
4-2-2-1 To Connect Mains Power to the Scanner

Connecting the LOGIQ 9 scanner involves preliminary checks of the power cord, voltage level and
compliance with electrical safety requirements.
1.) Ensure that the wall outlet is of appropriate type, and that the power switch is turned OFF.
2.) Verify that the onsite mains voltage is within the limits indicated on the rating label near the Circuit
Breaker on the rear of the unit.
3.) Verify the Circuit Breaker at the rear of the scanner is OFF.
4.) Verify that the power cable is without any visible damage.
5.) Connect the Power Cable to the back of the system.
6.) Ensure the Cable Clip slips securely over the shoulders on the molded plug.

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER4.FM
4-2-2 Power On / Boot Up (contd)

7.) Connect the Power Cable to an appropriate mains power outlet, allowing sufficient slack so that the
unit can be moved slightly.
8.) Switch ON the Circuit Breaker at the rear of the system.
Cable Clip
Circuit Breaker
Mains Power Cable
Figure 4-4 Circuit Breaker and Power Cable on Back of Scanner
When power is applied to the scanner and the rear Circuit Breaker is turned ON, power is distributed to
the Cooling Unit, Control Panel, Monitor, Internal and External I/O Boards, Peripherals, the Back End
Processor and the Front End Power Supply.
NOTICE When AC power is applied to the scanner, the ON/OFF switch on the Control panel illuminates amber,
indicating the system is in System Ready Mode.
NOTE: If the system is left in the OFF condition (system unplugged from the wall and circuit breaker in the OFF
position) for an extended period of time (greater than three days), the system may not boot up or beep
when turned on. If this occurs, plug in the system, set the circuit breaker to the ON position, and allow
the systems UPS battery to recharge for several hours. DO NOT use standby during this time.
4-2-2-2 To Boot Up Back End Processor

1.) Press the ON/OFF switch on the Control Panel once.
The Back-End Processor starts and the software code is distributed to initiate the scanner. No
status messages are displayed during this process.
ON / OFF Switch
Figure 4-5 ON/OFF switch for Back End Processor Boot Up

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER4.FM
4-2-3 Standby Mode

Use Standby Mode to decrease the power off/on time while transporting system for a portable exam.
NOTE: DO NOT put the system in Standby Mode more than 20 times in a row. You should power off
the system daily.
4-2-3-1 To Place System in Standby Mode

1.) Press the ON/OFF switch at the front of the system once. The System-Exit window displays.
2.) Use the Trackball to select Standby.
The Monitor Display and Touch Panel turn black. The On/Off switch indicator is green.
3.) After the monitor blacks out, wait at least 20 additional seconds before unplugging the power
cable or switching off the breaker.
The system does not fully enter Standby Mode until after the following occurs:
- If you have a CD/DVD drive, the Power On/Off button starts blinking on/off.
- If you have a CD drive only, the green lights beneath the CD drive show no activity for 15
seconds.
NOTE: Starting with BT04, the ON/OFF Switch will blink while the system is in Standby Mode. Because
of a hardware dependency, this feature is not supported on systems that upgrade to BT04.
4.) Once in Standby Mode, unplug the system from the wall.
The system beeps.
NOTE: DO NOT press the ON/OFF switch while the system is unplugged, this will turn the system off.
5.) Transport the system as needed and plug it back in within 15 minutes.
If the system is unplugged for longer than 15 minutes, the battery is discharged and the system
shuts down. This assumes a fully-charged battery.
NOTE: It takes ten hours to recharge the battery. Expected battery lifetime for frequent standby use is
six months.To maintain battery life, keep the system plugged in with the circuit breaker in the
ON position.
NOTE: If the system is left in the OFF condition (system unplugged from the wall and circuit breaker in
the OFF position) for an extended period of time (greater than three days), the system may not
boot up or beep when turned on. If this occurs, plug in the system, set the circuit breaker to the
ON position, and allow the systems UPS battery to recharge for several hours. DO NOT use
standby during this time.
See Moving the System in the Basic User Manual for more information.
4-2-3-2 To Wake the System from Standby Mode

1.) Press ON/OFF switch QUICKLY! Less than.25 seconds. If you press the On/Off switch too long,
the system will shutdown. It takes about 45 seconds for the system to become fully functional.
NOTE: If the ON/OFF switch is pressed too long, the system shuts down instead of coming out of
Standby Mode.
NOTE: Waking the system from Standby without AC connected will turn off the system.

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER4.FM

4-2-4-1 To Power Off Back-End Processor

1.) Press the ON/OFF switch on the Control Panel once to display the SYSTEM - EXIT menu.
2.) Select Shutdown from the SYSTEM - EXIT menu.
3.) Allow the system to close files and shutdown. Wait until the standby light turns amber.
Figure 4-6 System Exit Menu for Back End Processor Power Off

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER4.FM
4-2-4-2 To Shut Down Scanner
Cable Clip
Circuit Breaker
Mains Power Cable
Figure 4-7 Circuit Breaker and Power Cable on Back of Scanner
NOTICE Disconnecting the Mains Power Cable before switching OFF the Circuit Breaker will activate the
uninterruptible power system (UPS) in the backend processor, forcing an ordered shutdown of the
system.
NOTICE The UPS serves only as a battery backup that allows for a soft shut-down of the scanner to prevent file
corruption. IT DOES NOT REGULATE INCOMING VOLTAGE.
WARNING Disconnecting the Mains Power Cable is required before servicing or relocating the
scanner.
For USA only:
Follow OSHA Lockout/Tagout requirements by ensuring you are in total control of the
TAG
electrical Mains Power Cable plug.
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ 9
4. Wait for at least 20 seconds for capacitors to discharge as there are no test points to verify isolation.
1.) From the rear of the system, switch OFF the Circuit Breaker.
2.) Slip the Cable Clip off the shoulders on the molded plug, then disconnect the Mains Power Cable
from the scanner.

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER4.FM
4-2-5 Probe/Connectors Usage
4-2-5-1 To Connect a Probe

1.) Place the probe's carrying case on a stable surface and open the case.
2.) Carefully remove the probe and unwrap the probe cable.
3.) DO NOT allow the probe head to hang free. Impact to the probe head could result in irreparable
damage.
4.) Turn the connector locking handle counterclockwise.
5.) Align the connector with the probe port and carefully push into place.
6.) Turn the connector locking handle clockwise to secure the probe connector.
7.) Carefully position the probe cable in the probe cord holder spot so it is free to move, but not
resting on the floor.
4-2-5-2 To Activate a Probe

Select the appropriate probe from the probe indicators on the Touch Panel.
The probe activates in the currently-selected operating mode. The probe's default settings for the mode
and selected exam are used automatically.
4-2-5-3 To Deactivate a Probe

When deactivating the probe, the probe is automatically placed in standby mode.
1.) Press the Freeze key.

2.) Gently wipe the excess gel from the face of the probe. (Refer to the Basic User Manual for
complete probe cleaning instructions.)
3.) Carefully slide the probe around the right side of the keyboard, toward the probe holder.
Ensure that the probe is placed gently in the probe holder.
4-2-5-4 To Disconnect a Probe

Probes can be disconnected at any time. However, the probe should not be selected as the active
probe.
1.) Move the probe locking handle counterclockwise. Pull the probe and connector straight out of
the probe port.
2.) Carefully slide the probe and connector away from the probe port and around the right side of
the keyboard. Ensure the cable is free.
3.) Be sure that the probe head is clean before placing the probe in its storage box.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER4.FM
4-2-6 Using CINE
4-2-6-1 To Activate CINE

1.) Press Freeze, then roll the Trackball to activate CINE.
2.) To start CINE Loop playback, press Run/Stop. To stop CINE Loop playback, press Run/Stop.
4-2-6-2 To Omit Images

1.) Roll the Trackball to the frame you want to delete and press Omit Image.
4-2-6-3 To Restore Images

1.) To undo deleting an image from the CINE Loop, press Restore Image.
4-2-6-4 To Move Quickly to Start/End Frame

1.) Press First to move to the first CINE frame.
2.) Press Last to move to the last CINE frame.
4-2-6-5 To Start Frame/End Frame

1.) Turn the Start Frame dial to the left to move to the beginning of the CINE Loop. Turn the dial
to the right to move forward through the CINE Loop.
2.) Turn the End Frame dial to the right to move to the end of the CINE Loop. Turn the dial to the
left to move backward through the CINE Loop.
4-2-6-6 To Adjust the CINE Loop Playback Speed

1.) Turn the Loop Speed dial right/left to increase/decrease the CINE Loop playback speed.
4-2-6-7 To Disconnect B-Mode CINE from Timeline CINE

1.) To review the B-Mode CINE Loop only, press Cine Mode Selection and select B Only.
2.) To review the Timeline CINE Loop only, press Cine Mode Selection and select TL Only.
3.) To return to linked B-Mode and Timeline CINE Loop review, press Cine Mode Selection and
select B/TL.
4-2-6-8 To Move through a CINE Loop Frame By Frame

1.) Turn Frame by Frame to move through CINE memory one frame at a time.

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER4.FM
4-2-7 Image Management Quick Guide / User Guide

For Image Management functionality, refer to the LOGIQ 9 Quick Guide / User Guide. It talks about
several topics:
Clipboard TCP/IP
Printing Images Services (Destinations)
Browsing and Managing an Exams Stored Image Buttons

Connectivity, and Dataflow Concept and Creation Views
Starting an Exam Verifying and Pinging a Device
Configuring Connectivity
Table 4-5 Quick Guide / User Guide Direction Numbers
Application Software Version Direction Number

R2.X 2309820-100
R3.X 2384458-100
R4.X 5113779-100
R6.X 5140807-100
R7.X 5173872-100
R9.X 5338270-100 (User Guide)

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER4.FM
4-2-8 System B/M-Mode Checks

For a basic functional check of the systems different modes, the Quick Guide / User Guide will
familiarize you with image optimization for B-Mode, M-Mode, Color Flow, and Doppler.
Figure 4-8
Table 4-6 B/M-Mode Functions
Control Description
Optimizes image quality and allows user to reduce beam intensity. 10% increments between 0-100%.
Power Output (Acoustic Power)
Values greater than 0.1 are displayed
Controls how echo intensities are converted to shades of gray, thereby increasing the adjustable range of
Dynamic Range
contrast.
Increases the number of transmit focal zones or moves the focal zone(s) so that you can tighten up the beam
Focus Number and Position for a specific area. A graphic caret corresponding to the focal zone position(s) appears on the right edge of
the image.
Selects a level below which echoes will not be amplified (an echo must have a certain minimum amplitude
Rejection
before it will be processed).
Brings out subtle tissue differences and boundaries by enhancing the gray scale differences corresponding
Edge Enhance
to the edges of structures. Adjustments to M Mode's edge enhancement affects the M Mode only.
Frame Average Temporal filter that averages frames together. This has the effect of presenting a smoother, softer image.
Colorize Enables gray scale image colorization. To deactivate, reselect a Gray Map.
Gray Map Determines how the echo intensity levels received are presented as shades of gray.
Rotation (Up/Down) Rotates the image by selecting the value from the pop up menu.
Frequency Multi Frequency mode lets you downshift to probe's next lower frequency or shift up to a higher frequency.
Frame Rate/Resolution Optimizes B Mode frame rate or spatial resolution for the best possible image.
B Flow Provides intuitive representation of non-quantitative hemodynamics in vascular structures.
Sensitivity/PRI Adjusts the sample rate for the flow signal.
Background On/Off Background On lets you view the anatomy roadmap; Background Off lets you view just flow information.
Sweep Speed Changes the speed at which the timeline is swept.

1/18/10
GE H EALTHCARE
CHAPTER4.FM
4-2-9 System CFM and PWD Checks
Figure 4-9 CFM and PWD Functions
Table 4-7 CFM and PWD Functions
Baseline Adjusts the baseline to accommodate faster or slower blood flows to eliminate aliasing.
Velocity scale determines pulse repetition frequency. If the sample volume gate range exceeds single gate
PRF/Wall Filter PRF capability, the system automatically switches to high PRF mode. Multiple gates appear, and HPRF is
indicated on the display.
Estimates the flow velocity in a direction at an angle to the Doppler vector by computing the angle between
Angle Correct
the Doppler vector and the flow to be measured
Threshold Assigns the gray scale level at which color information stops.
Allows a specific color map to be selected. After a selection has been made, the color bar displays the
Map
resultant map.
Allows blood flow to be viewed from a different perspective, i.e. red away (negative velocities) and blue
Invert
toward (positive velocities). The real-time or frozen image can be inverted.
Packet Size Controls the number of samples gathered for a single color flow vector.
Quick Angle Correct Quickly adjusts the angle by 60 degrees
Display layout can be preset to have B-Mode and Time-motion side-by-side or over-under.
In the side-by-side layout, there are three display alternatives defined: equal priority, time-motion priority or
Doppler Display Formats time-motion with B-Mode reference.
In the over-under layout, there are three display alternatives defined: time-motion priority, B Mode priority
or equal priority.
Sample Volume Gate Length Sizes the sample volume gate
Scan Area Slants the B-Mode or Color Flow linear image left or right to get more information without moving the probe

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER4.FM
4-2-10 Basic Measurements

NOTE: The following instructions assume that you first scan the patient and then press Freeze.
4-2-10-1 To Measure Distance and Tissue Depth

1.) Press Measure once to display an active caliper.
2.) Move the Trackball to position the active caliper at the start point (distance) or the most
anterior point (tissue depth).
3.) Press Set to fix the start point.
The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper.
4.) Move the Trackball to position the second active caliper at the end point (distance) or the most
posterior point (tissue depth).
5.) Press Set to complete the measurement.
The system displays the distance or tissue depth value in the measurement results window.
NOTE: Before you complete a measurement:

To toggle between active calipers, press Measure.
To erase the second caliper and the current data measured and start the measurement again, press
Clear once.
NOTE: To rotate through and activate previously fixed calipers, turn Cursor Select.
NOTE: After you complete the measurement, to erase all data that has been measured to this point,
but not data entered onto worksheets, press Clear.
4-2-10-2 To Measure Circumference/Area (Ellipse)

1.) Press Measure once to display an active caliper.
2.) Move the Trackball to position the active caliper.
3.) Press Set to fix the start point.
The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper.
4.) Move the Trackball to position the second caliper.

5.) Turn the Ellipse control; an ellipse with an initial circle shape appears.
NOTE: Be careful not to press the Ellipse control as this activates the Body Pattern.
6.) Move the Trackball to position the ellipse and to size the measured axes (the calipers).
7.) To increase the size, turn the Ellipse control in a clockwise direction. To decrease the size,
turn the Ellipse control in a counterclockwise direction.
8.) To toggle between active calipers, press Measure.
9.) Press Set to complete the measurement.
The system displays the circumference and area in the measurement results window.
NOTE: Before you complete a measurement:

To erase the ellipse and the current data measured, press Clear once. The original caliper is
displayed to restart the measurement.
To exit the measurement function without completing the measurement, press Clear again.

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER4.FM
4-2-10-3 Worksheets
Measurement/Calculation worksheets are available to display and edit measurements and calculations.
There are generic worksheets as well as Application specific worksheets. The worksheets are selected
from the Measurement Touch Panel.
4-2-10-4 Report Pages

Measurements/Calculations that are included on the worksheet can also be displayed on Report Pages.
Report Pages can be customized to meet the appropriate needs of the user.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER4.FM
4-2-11 The MOD (Magnetic Optical Drive)
4-2-11-1 For BT03 and prior

The onboard 3.5 inch Magnetic Optical disk drive supports the following densities:
- Standard: 640MB; 540MB; 230MB; and 128MB
- Overwrite: 1.3GB, 640MB; and 540MB
Magnetic Optical Drive (MOD)

Eject Button
Figure 4-10 Magnetic Optical Drive - BT03 and prior

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER4.FM
4-2-11-2 For BT04 and later

The LOGIQ 9 supports the portable, external Fujitsu DynaMO 1300 U2 Pocket Magnetic Optical (MO)
drive to read old media and to use up unused MO disks.
NOTE: The MO drive is intended to be a temporary storage solution only and NOT for everyday use.
For permanent storage, ALWAYS use the DVD drive that is shipped with your system.
Figure 4-11 Magnetic Optical Drive - BT04 and later
To Connect the Portable MO Drive
1.) Connect the USB cable to the back of the MO drive. The MO drive is powered by the USB port;
therefore, no power cord is needed.
2.) Set the MO drive inside the side Peripheral Storage Area, next to the image printer. Make sure the
MO drive sits far enough inside the storage area, but close enough to reach while plugged into the
USB port.
3.) Connect the USB cable to the USB port on the back of the system.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER4.FM
4-2-11-2 For BT04 and later (contd)

Alternative Site for MO Drive. If you have a printer that takes up the entire storage area, there is an
alternative site above the Front Peripheral Storage Area. To connect the portable MO drive to the
LOGIQ 9 system:
1.) Connect the USB cable to the back of the MO drive.

2.) Set the MO drive above the Front Peripheral Storage Area, far enough away from the edge.
3.) Connect the USB cable to the USB port on the front of the system.
Figure 4-12 Magnetic Optical Drive - BT04 and later
CAUTION DO NOT connect the MO drive to the USB port adjacent to the top of the Control Panel.
If you intend to use the MO drive semi-permanently, attach the MO drive to the system using velcro, or
other secure method (not supplied by GE).
DO NOT lock the Control Panel into place while the MO Drive is located above the Front Peripheral
Storage Area. DO NOT load any CDs that accompany the MO device.

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER4.FM
4-2-11-3 Using the MOD

1.) Before installing an MO disk in the MOD, check the MO disk for loose hardware or damaged labels
which could jam inside the MOD. Also, ensure that the slide switch in one corner of the disk is set
so that the disk is write enabled (disk hole closed).
2.) Insert the disk into the MOD with the label facing up.
NOTICE Never move the unit with a disk in the MOD because the drive actuator will not be locked and
the MOD could break.
3.) There are different methods to eject a disk from the MOD. In some cases disk ejection is automatic.
Manual ejection methods are listed below in preferred order from best (1) to worst (4).
a.) When in Archive Menu, use the softkey choice or
click Image Presets up, then click the left softkey switch up for ARCHIVE, then toggle the
switch under EJECT MOD.
b.) Press the Eject switch on the MOD while system is ON.
c.) Press and hold the Eject switch while the system is booting.
d.) Mechanical ejection. Insert the end of a paper clip into the hole next to the Eject switch while
system power is OFF.
NOTICE Avoid mechanical ejection whenever possible. Mechanical ejection leaves the actuator
unlocked and the MOD susceptible to damage if moved. If forced to use this method, reboot the
system, then insert and eject a known good disk using one of the other manual ejection
methods.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER4.FM
4-2-12 USB Drives

Connect only one USB drive (USB HDD/USB flash drive) to the system in total. DO NOT connect two
or more devices at the same time.
NOTE: Do not create multiple partitions. Use USB Drive with single partition.
The USB Flash Drive is an ESD-sensitive device. GE only supports the NDL 256MByte 066E0690 USB
Flash Drive.
CAUTION Before removing the USB Flash Drive from the USB port, press Eject (F3) and select USB Drive from
the pull-down menu to disconnect the USB Flash Drive.
4-2-13 Backup and Restore Database, Preset Configurations and Images

The Backup and Restore procedures vary based on the application software that is installed. For the
appropriate Backup and Restore information, see the LOGIQ 9 Quick Guide / User Guide

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER4.FM
Section 4-3
Software Configuration Checks
Table 4-8 Software Configuration Checks
Step Task to do Notes

1. Verify Date and Time is correct
2. Verify that Location (Hospital Name) is correct
3. Verify Language settings are correct

4. Verify assignment of Printer Keys
5. Verify all of the customers options are set up correctly

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER4.FM
Section 4-4
Peripheral Checks
Check that peripherals work as described below:
Table 4-9 Peripheral Checks
Step Task to do Notes
1. Press Freeze. Stops image acquisition.
Press (Print 1), (Print 2), (Print 3) or Prints image displayed on the screen on B&W or Color printer,
2.
(Print 4) on the Control Panel depending on the key assignment configuration
3. Press VIDEO on the Control Panel. Starts the video counter at a different point:
4. Press UPDATE MENU in the Trackball area. Displays the Video Set Counter / Search Dialog window
Use the alphanumeric keyboard to enter the

5. Displays number
counter number in the counter field.
6. Press Set Counter to save the change. Saves number
7. Press VIDEO on the Control Panel Returns to the scanning mode
Starts Recording
8. Press REC/PAUSE on the Control panel. Displays a red dot in the VCR status area on the Title bar to indicate that
recording has begun
Stops recording
9. Press REC/PAUSE on the Control panel.
Changes the video status icon to (Pause)
10. Press video on the Control Panel and the

Plays back an examination
assignable play
Performs actions on the recorded session, such as stop, pause, rewind

11. Use the Assignable keys on the Control Panel or fast forward.
Updates the video status icon accordingly
While in playback mode, use the Trackball to

12. adjust the video playback speed and scroll Searches on the tape
through the record.
13. Press the assignable PAUSE Stops the tape at the desired frame.
Stores the last few seconds of a recorded sequence as a cineloop.

14. Press Freeze while playing back a recorded
Enables the user to perform further operations on the stored section
session.
(see 4-2-6 for further information on cineloop operation).
4-24 Section 4-4 - Peripheral Checks

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER4.FM
Section 4-5
Mechanical Function Checks
4-5-1 Operator I/O Movement - Standard Monitor
Figure 4-13
Step Task Note(s)
1. Pull handle up under the platform towards you to Maneuvers the Display Platform horizontally at
release horizontal lock present level of height
2. Maneuvers the Display Platform up and down

Pull handle at left hand grip toward you to release the
(between the vertical end stops) as long as you pull
Vertical Lock
the handle toward you
3. Maneuvers the Display Platform both horizontally and

Pull both handles toward you to release both Vertical
vertically as long as you keep pulling these handles
and Horizontal locks
toward you
Table 4-10 Standard Display Platform Maneuverability Checks

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER4.FM
4-5-2 Operator I/O Movement - 17 LCD (Option)
Hold here for

Steps 1 and 2
Hold here for

Step 3 Hold here for
Step 3
Hold here for

Steps 1 and 2
Figure 4-14 Operator Movement
Step Task Note(s)
1. Use both hands, one at the top 17 LCD the 17 LCD and
Move Up/Down
one at the bottom, to adjust the LCD up and down,
2. Use both hands, one at the top of the 17 LCD and one at
Tilt Forward/Back
the bottom, to rotate the screen forward and back.
3. Use both hands, one at the lower left handle hold of the 17
Move Left/Right LCD and one at the lower right handle hold, to adjust the
screen left and right.
Table 4-11 17 LCD Display Platform Maneuverability Checks
4-26 Section 4-5 - Mechanical Function Checks

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER4.FM
Hold here for

Steps 1 and 2
Hold here for

Step 3
Figure 4-15 Operator Movement
Step Task Note(s)
1 Use both hands, one at the top of the 19 LCD and one at the
Tilt Forward/Back
bottom, to rotate the screen forward and back.
2. Use both hands, one at the lower left handle hold of the 19 LCD
Move Left/Right and one at the lower right handle hold, to adjust the screen left
and right.
Table 4-12 19 LCD Display Platform Maneuverability Checks

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER4.FM
4-5-4 Brakes and Direction Locks Checks

Check that the brakes and direction locks function as described below.
Table 4-13 Brakes and Direction Lock Instructions
Step Task Note(s)

1. Press on pedal no. 2
Engages the brakes in full lock
2. Press on pedal no.1
Releases the brake
Engages swivel lock.

You may need to move the system around a
little to get the wheels to lock into the locked
direction.
Releases swivel lock
NOTE: The swivel lock and brake cannot be engaged (pressed down) at the same time since pressing the main
brake releases the swivel lock and pressing the swivel lock releases the main brake. Therefore, if the
swivel lock is engaged you need to press the main brake pedal (#2) twice to lock the scanner from
rolling. Once will release the swivel lock and once again will engage the main brake in full lock as stated
in step 1.
4-5-5 Site Log

Use the site log found on Section 10-9 "Site Log" on page 10-29 to record site visits.
4-28 Section 4-5 - Mechanical Function Checks

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
Chapter 5
Components and Functions (Theory)
Section 5-1
Overview
This chapter explains LOGIQ 9s system concepts, component arrangement, and subsystem
function. It also describes the Power Distribution System (PDS) and probes.

5-1 Overview 5-1
5-2 General Information 5-2
5-3 Front End Processor 5-7
5-4 Back End Processor (BEP 1) 5-22
5-5 Back End Processor (BEP 2) 5-27
5-6 Back End Processor (BEP 3.x) 5-34
5-7 Back End Processor (BEP 4.x) 5-39
5-8 BEP Power On Path 5-44
5-9 BEP Power Off Path 5-45
5-10 Operator Console Control PWA 5-46
5-11 Patient I/O (Currently not supported by the LOGIQ 9) 5-54
5-12 Internal I/O 5-55
5-13 Top Console 5-63
5-14 Monitor 5-64
5-15 External I/O 5-65
5-16 Peripherals 5-68
5-17 Modem and USB Modem 5-69
5-18 Power Distribution 5-71
5-19 Mechanical Descriptions 5-76
5-20 Air Flow Control 5-79
5-21 Service Platform 5-79
5-22 4D Option 5-91
5-23 Continuous Wave Doppler Option 5-96
5-24 PCI CW Doppler PWA card 5-97
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-1

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-2
General Information
LOGIQ 9 is a phased and linear array ultrasound imaging scanner. It has provisions for analog input
sources like ECG and Phono. A Doppler probe may also be connected and used.
The system can be used for:
- B-Mode
- M-Mode
- Color Flow Mode (CFM)
- Power Doppler Imaging (PDI) with topographic and directional maps
- PW Doppler with high PRF
- B-Flow Mode
- M-Color Flow Mode, with B-Mode Gray Scale and Color Flow Imaging
LOGIQ 9 is a digital beamforming system. Signal flow travels from the Probe Connector Panel to the
Front End Electronics, to the Back-End Processor, and finally displayed on the monitor and peripherals.
System configuration is stored on the hard drive and all necessary software is loaded from the hard
drive on power up.
Name Plate
Monitor
Monitor Controls

Gel Warmer
Touchscreen/Display
TGC Slidepot Knobs
Operator Console
B/W Printer Front Cover

VCR
3.5 MOD Probe Connector

CD-ROM
or DVD
Backend Processor Chassis

Swivel Lock
Front Bumper
Brake Release
Figure 5-1 LOGIQ 9 BT04 - Major Components

5-2 Section 5-2 - General Information
1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-2 General Information (contd)
17LCD Monitor
Monitor Controls
Name Plate Op. Panel Upper Bezel

Gel Warmer
Touchscreen/Display
TGC Slidepot Knobs
Subwoofer Knob
(Do not adjust)
Operator Console
VCR
Front Cover
B/W Printer
Probe Connector
CD-ROM
or DVD
Backend Processor
Chassis Swivel Lock
Front Bumper Brake Release
Figure 5-2 LOGIQ 9 BT06 with LCD Option - Major Components

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-2 General Information (contd)
19 LCD Monitor
Monitor Controls
Name Plate
Gel Warmer
TGC Slidepot Knobs
Subwoofer Knob
(Do not adjust) Touchscreen/Display
Operator Console
Figure 5-3 LOGIQ 9 with 19 LCD

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-2-1 Block Diagram
BACK END PROCESSOR

USER INTERFACE ECG Patient Interface
AC POWER
3.5" MOD
OP I/O PANEL 17" Monitor
UPS
Hard Drive CD-ROM
ATX POWER SUPPLY
POWER ON/OFF (RESET*)
PC MOTHERBOARD
SONY COLOR PRINTER FLOCK
UP-2900MD AGP PCI SOUND OF PC2IP Ethernet
PCVIC PC2IO VIDEO VIDEO CARD BIRDS
(optional)
SONY VCR
Network Connection
SVO-9500MD
USB Connection
Video Outputs
SONY B/W PRINTER
UP-890MD
FRONT END PROCESSOR

PROBES FRONT END BACKPLANE
DOPPLER
INTERNAL I/O
EXTERNAL I/O
RFAMP
XDIF
FEPS
SCB
EQ4
BMP
TD7
TD0
TD1
TD3
TD5
TD6
TD2
TD4
PCI CABLE
FRONTPLANE
AC CONTROLLER
MODEM
XFMR BOX 230Vac
TO MODEM
230Vac
115Vac 115Vac
TO MONITOR
TO CARD RACK
230Vac TO PC
230Vac
TO PERIPHERIALS
115 or 230Vac TO OUTLET
Figure 5-4 LOGIQ 9 Simple Block Diagram

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-2-2 Dataflow Control Description
5-2-2-1 Data Sets

Each scan mode will produce data to a corresponding data set in the Image Memory. The data sets are
represented in ring-buffers. Each active data set will be allocated to one of the following types of
acquisition data:
2-D tissue data

Doppler data
M-mode data
2-D Color flow
Trace data
Video Y-component data
Video UV-component data
Color M-mode data
RF data

1/18/10
GE H EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-3
Front End Processor
The Front End Processor generates the strong bursts transmitted by the probes as ultrasound into the
body. It also receives weak ultrasound echoes from blood cells and body structure, amplifies these
signals and converts them to a digital signal.
Equalization B Mode Processor

I,Q
Barrel Shift I,Q
NCO FIR Synthetic Axial Interp Vector Smoothing
Digital Gain Aperture Detector Compound Filter
XDIF TD
Pulser Rate Dynamic
TGC Gen I2C Master Converter Range
T/R Switch
Probe Rigel
Port
A/D XDIF
Power
Temperature Focal Grey 2D, M
MUX Supply Edge B Mode
Control Sensors Zone M Mode
Monitors Enhance
Splicer Output
Top Plane PreAmp TGC Board HV M Peak
Sum Commutator Scan Bus Hold
Pwr Sup Scan Bus
Control Interface
Control Interface
RFAmp
PCI Bus
40P0
TD 40P1 Scan Bus
Control TxSync
Bus BPCLK
System
TxSync
Clock
Front End TD Control
Generator/
RxSync
Power Supply Generator
Distributor
+3.3 V
+5 V
Scan Bus
+5 V analog
240
VAC PCI Bus
-5 V analog
Scan
+12 V Sequencer
+120 V I,Q
Capture
PS ON
Processed
PCI-PCI Capture
Bridge (B, M)
Video
Ring Buffer Capture
Scan Control Board
Internal I/O
PCI Cable to BEP
Figure 5-5 The Front End

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-3-1 Front End Processor Power Supply Board (FEPS, FEPS2, FEPS2.1)
The power supply assembly receives approximately 220VAC from the secondary side of the mains
isolation transformer.
The FEPS assembly supplies DC regulated power to the Front End card rack of the LOGIQ 9. The
assembly is configured as a PCB which fits into the right-most slot of the Front End card rack. It
interfaces with the back plane to supply power to the Front End circuit boards.
A general enable signal (PS_ON) controls enabling and disabling all FEPS Low Voltage outputs. These
include +5VA, -5VA, +5V, 3V3, +12V, and +15V (all except PHVP High Voltage). An Enable circuit on
the FEPS detects when PS_ON becomes valid and holds all outputs off until then.
The high voltage lockout circuit monitors the +5VA, -5VA, +12VA and 3V3 supplies and locks out the
PHVP supply in the event that any one of them go below 10% of their nominal value.
PWR_OK is an active high TTL compatible output which provides a status indication of the AC input
power. It should be capable of sinking 5mA maximum. The signal switches to a TTL High when the AC
input voltage reaches the minimum specified input level at power up. Upon loss of input voltage,
PWR_OK will go Low.
5-3-2 FEPS3.x
The FEPS3 Board was introduced with R3.0.0 Software and BT03. It is not backward compatible with
prior hardware as it provides the new voltages (+/- 6V and 13V) required by the TDs (5.x and TD6) and
RFAMP2.
Table 5-2 FEPS, Output Comparison
FEPS, FEPS2, FEPS2.1 FEPS3.x

System Name Nominal Output Nominal Output
5VPA +5.05V +6.0V
5VNA -5.05V -6.0V
5VP +5.05V +5.05V

3V3 3.33V 3.33V
PHVP +121.2V / +24.2 +121.2V / +24.24V
12VP 12.12 13.0V

15VP +15.15 +15.15
5-8 Section 5-3 - Front End Processor

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-3-3 Front End Subsystem

The LOGIQ 9 Front End Subsystem consists the XDIF (Transducer Interface) board, RF Amp board
and eight TD (Transmit Delay) boards.
Figure 5-6 Basic Front End SubSystem
The Front End Subsystem provides 128 receive and 128 transmit channels as well as gain and
bandpass filtering of the received signal.
5-3-3-1 XDIF (Transducer Interface) Board
Figure 5-7 XDIF Board Functions
The XDIF supports four 128 Channel probe ports with the ability to select one of the four probe ports.
The XDIF supports a probe multiplexer requiring a 200V (+100V and -100V). The multiplexer in the
probe will select 128 of the out of up to 192 channels.
The XDIF uses a T/R (Transmit/Receive) switch on each output to the RF Amplifier board. During
transmit the T/R switch prevents the high voltage transmit pulser from damaging the receive
preamplifier. During receive the T/R switch isolates the receive preamp from the transmit high voltage
pulser.
5-3-3-2 Top Plane

Connects the receive signals from the XDIF board to the RF Amplifier board at the front of the circuit
boards.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-3-3-3 RF Amp, RF Amp1.2, RF Amp2 Board

(Radio Frequency Amplifier Board)
Figure 5-8 RF Amp, RF Amp2 Functions
Figure 5-9 RF Amp Board Functional Block Diagram
The RF Amplifier board shall contain 128 channels of the circuitry that is necessary to amplify the small
electronic echo signals that are received from the probe transducers. Each channel shall consist of a
low-noise, active input termination preamplifier, a time-gain compensation (TGC) amplifier, and a low
noise differential drive amplifier (buffer). The RF Amp board shall physically reside in the Beamformer
card cage adjacent to the XDIFF board.
The probe level analog input signals shall enter the RF Amp board on a series of board to board
connectors that mate the RF Amplifier Board to the XDIFF Board. These connectors carry the
transducer level receive signals that originate at the probe and make their way through the probe
interface relays, and T/R switches. The digital interface, power supplies, and reference ground shall be
provided to the RF Amp board by the system backplane.
Each amplified signal generated by the RF Amp board shall provide a differential output and drive filter
circuitry located on the TD boards via the system backplane. The TD boards perform an anti-alias
filtering operation and convert the transducer signals to a 12 bit data stream that feeds the digital
beamforming electronics.
RF Amp2 Board
The RF Amp2 Board was introduced with R3.0.0 Software and BT03. It is not backward compatible with
prior hardware as it requires the new voltages (+/- 6V and 13V) provided by the FEPS3 Board.

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-3-3-4 TD, TD4, TD5.x, TD6 (Time Delay) Boards (8)
Figure 5-10 Basic TD Board Functions
Major functions of the TD boards are:
- Transmitter
- Analog Receive
- A/D (Analog to Digital conversion)
- Digital Receiver (Rigel Beamformer Chip)
- Control & Timing
Figure 5-11 Basic TD Input/Output Signals
The TD (Time Delay) boards send 128 transmit signals to the XDIF board. The 128 receive channels
from the RF board get low pas filtered, converted from analog to digital and then use the Rigel
beamformer chip to generate complex digital data signals representing one or two beams of ultrasound
echo information sent to the EQ board.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-3-3-4 TD, TD4, TD5.x, TD6 (Time Delay) Boards (8) (contd)
Figure 5-12 Basic TD Input/Output Control Signals
Major control signal from the EQ board are the Digital TGC/VREF and Serial Control Bus (I2C). Control
signal between the Scan Control board consist of Power, Timing Clocks, TD Control Bus and Fault
Interrupts
Time Delay (TD, TD4, TD5) Board Function Summary:
Each board assigned to a subset of 16 channels.

Generates and amplifies the excitation waveform for each channel.
Digitizes the input RF signal from the RF Amplifier board.
Applies dynamic apodization, dynamic receive delays, and filters to the digitized RF signal.
Automatically adapts receive beams for speed or resolution depending on scans.
Sums detected echo channel to channel, then board to board. (Boards must be contiguous.) The
last TD forwards the total output to the EQ.
Monitors current consumed for transmit and issues a fault signal if overcurrent is detected.
TD5 and TD5.1 (Time Delay 5)

The TD5 Board was introduced with R3.0.0 Software and BT03. It is not backward compatible with prior
hardware as it requires the new voltages (+/- 6V and 13V) provided by the FEPS3 Board.
TD5.1 has same functionality as TD5 but larger and fewer ASICs. You can mix TD5s and TD5.1s
TD6 and (Time Delay 6)

The TD6 Board was introduced with R6.0.0 Software and BT06. It is not backward compatible with prior
hardware as it requires the new voltages (+/- 6V and 13V) provided by the FEPS3 Board.
TD6 has same functionality as TD5.
NOTICE DO NOT MIX TD6 boards with TD5.x boards.

d

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-3-4 Scan Control Board (SCB, SCB2)

The Scan Control Board combines onto one board the basic functionality of Image Port (IP), Front End
Control and Timing (FECT), Scan Sequencer (SS2) and the Scan Trigger (System Timing).
EQ_BE_RxSync
SCAN SEQUENCER BLOCK
PA_SCB_ACFAIL(1:0)
QRS* VP_DAT(7:0)
IMAGE PORT 2 BLOCK LOC_CLK Scan Sequencer Scan Bus

and VP_ADR(4:0) I/F To MEQ, BMP (EBM)
DSP PCI & CTRL Peripherals SYS_SCAN_BUS(13:0)
IP_CLK PCI Slave
and VP_STB
Decode
To MEQ & BMP (EBM) SCAN I/F LE
GLOB_SEC_PCI(61:0)
Cable From PC (From IP2 Block)

PRIM_PCI(52:0) LOC_SCAN_BUS(17:0) SCAN TIGGERS(2:0)
PCI Interface
IP_CLK
LOC_SLV_PCI_BUS(60:0)
SYSTEM TIMING BLOCK
System Clocks
LOC_CLK IP_CLK MFG Test Clocks
IP SCB_EQ_RxSync
CONTROL
System
Clock
Timing
Image Generation
Control PCI 33MHz
IP CTRL
Memory
IP_CLK
Local PCI Bus
VID_CLK
VIDEO_DAT(4:0) IP_CLK FE_SYTM_BUS(59:0) FECB_CLK(10:0)
From BMP (EBM) Video

BM_SCB_DAT(9:0) and FECT BLOCK
Pipelink
From MEQ (EBM) Input LOC_SCAN_BUS(13:0) To TD Boards
IQ_SCB_DAT(31:0)
FEC_TD_BUS(80:0)
EQ_BE_RxSync
Front End Control
Board Block
FEC INT:
TD_HVFAULT* IP_CLK
HVINT*
I2CINT*
PRBINT*
CWINT*
Figure 5-13 SCB Simplified Block Diagram

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-3-4-1 SCB, SCB2 High Level Features

Generates and buffers system clocks:
- 40 MHz (40P0 and 40P1)
- 10 Mhz (BPCLK)
- TXSync
- RxSync
Configures the beamformer to fire B/M-Mode, Color, or PW Doppler vectors.
Controls scan sequencing in real-time; setting the vector firing order and timing intervals.
PCI interface to Back End Processor (BEP), BMP, and EQ or EBM/EBM2.
Buffers B/M data from BMP/EBM/EBM2, data from the EQ/EBM/EBM2 (for Color and PW Doppler),
and video data from the VCR to transmit to the BEP for software processing and display.
Interface between Host PCI and TD boards.
5-3-4-2 Compatibility
Only SCB2 Boards should be used with R3.0.0 software and greater
5-3-4-3 Scan Control Board LEDs
Table 5-3 SCB LED Indications
Function LED
Monitored Number LED Color LED Function
I960 Processor DS1 Red i960 Fail
DS2 Yellow i960 Local Bus Activity
Image Port DS3 Red Toggles during Image Port Frames
DS4 Green Toggles during Image Port Frames
DS5 Yellow IP Master Enable
DS6 Yellow IP Master Ready
Pipelink DS7 Red IQ Left FIFO Error
DS8 Red IQ Right FIFO Error
DS9 Red BM FIFO Error
DS10 FIFOs Empty
Scan Sequence DS11 Red Crash
DS12 Yellow FIFO Error
DS13 Yellow Command Pulse
DS14 Yellow Unused
DS15 Yellow Pause
DS16 Green Unused
DS17 Green Happy Light - Toggles during Scan Sequence
DS18 Green Happy Light - Toggles during Scan Sequence

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-3-4-3 Scan Control Board LEDs (contd)
Table 5-4 SCB2 2365739 LED Indications
LED
Number LED Color LED Function
DS1 Green FPGA Programming Done (Passed)
DS2 Red i960 Fail
DS5 Green Toggles during Image Port Frames
DS6 Red Toggles during Image Port Frames
DS7 Red Crash
DS8 Yellow FIFO Error
DS9 Yellow Command Pause
DS10 Yellow Unused
DS11 Yellow Pause
DS12 Green Unused
DS13 Green Happy Light (toggles during Scan Sequence)
DS14 Green Happy Light (toggles during Scan Sequence)

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-3-5 Equalization (EQ) Board (component of EBM Board)
5-3-5-1 General Description

The EQ dynamically gains and filters the received signal output from the final beamformer sum. TGC
control calculates range dependent analog and digital gains. The digital gain is applied to the I/Q signal.
The gained signal is then rotated in frequency to place the frequency of interest in the passband of the
subsequent FIR lowpass filter. The rotator center frequency may also be range dependent. These
controls, and the selection of the FIR coefficients may also be processing bank, vector number, or
transmit focal zone dependent.
EQ Board Block Diagram
Scan SCAN Local

Control Control Board
Bus I/F Control
Temperature Local XDIF XDIF/Probe Bus

Monitoring Board and To: XDIF & Relay
Circuits Control Probe I/F
IIC Voltage
A/D Monitoring Local Commutat
Converters Circuits Comm Control Bus
Board or To: XDIF
Control Control I/F
IIC
SPROM
CLK-10MHZ
Local Analog Base Analog TGC Bus

Board Delay TGC TGC To: TDs
Control MUX
Local
Digital V-Ref
Board
TGC Gen
Control
Dynamic
Apodization
Gain Gain Coef

Mods Mods RAM
Delay LUT
5 5 16
Td: I-dat I (L,R) BARREL I (L,R) I (L,R) I (L,R) I (L,R) I (L,R) I (L,R)
SHIFTER FIR
21 BARREL
5 17 16 16 NCO 16 16 16
SHIFT Data Pipe Bus
MULTIPLIER NCOM FPGA AND To: BMP/SCB
Td: Q-dat Q (L,R) Q (L,R) Q (L,R) Q (L,R) Q (L,R) Q (L,R) OUTPUT Q (L,R)
FIR FPGA
21 17 16 16 16 16 16
Coef
RAM
CLK-10MHZ
Figure 5-14 EQ Board Block Diagram

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-3-5-2 Basic Functions

Compensates for the attenuation of the transmitted signal in tissue by depth: performs TGC based
on focal zone.
Compensates for frequency shift (TFC) in tissue, needed in B-Mode and M-Mode.
Filters out harmonics and optimizes signal to noise ratio.
Delivers amplified and corrected I & Q data to the BMP and the Scan Control Board.
Interfaces probe detection and probe ID signals between the XDIF and the host.
Controls transducer commutator (multiplexer) for muxed probes with more elements than channels
in the beamformer.
Monitors active probe temperature.
Masters the front end (FE) I2C busses for voltage and temperature monitoring.
Turns off PHVP on the card rack power supply if a TD board pulls too much power or malfunctions.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-3-6 B/M Mode Processor (BMP) Board
5-3-6-1 General Description

The B/M-mode Processor (BMP) subsystem takes the digital complex data from the EQ subsystem and
converts it to either B-mode (2D) or M-mode (timeline) data.
Figure 5-15 BMP Internal Functions
Processes I & Q data for B-Mode and M-Mode imaging.

Calculates echo signals amplitude.
Converts sample rate to display rate.
Implements dynamic range and edge enhancement.
Splices multiple focal zones into one image.
Sends processed B/M data to the Scan Control Board.
Figure 5-16 BMP Control Inputs/Outputs

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-3-7 EBM, EBM2 Board

The EBM Board was used on forward production units starting with BT02 (November 2002). The EBM2
Board was used on forward production units starting with R3.0.0 Software (BT03 October 2003). The
detailed functionality is found in the previous EQ and BMP sections.
5-3-7-1 Overview
The EBM/EBM2 board is the data path interface board between the last Time Delay board (TD) and the
Scan Control Board (SCB). The EBM/EBM2 receives data from the Time Delay boards, processes the
data for depth attenuation effects, and passes the data on to the B/M processor, then to the Scan
Control Board. This board is composed of two main sections the Equalization (EQ) and the B/M Mode
Processor (BMP).
The EQ section compensates for the attenuation of ultrasound in tissue. The attenuation of ultrasound
in tissue is usually modeled as being linearly dependent on frequency and depth. The EQ section
provides two major data processing functions to compensate for this phenomenon, Time Gain Control
(TGC), and Time Frequency Control (TFC). Using TGC and TFC, the EQ equalizes image signals by
removing depth dependent attenuation effects from the signal, hence the name equalization board. In
layman terms, the EQ gives a point deeper in the body an equal opportunity to contribute to the
ultrasound image as one closer to the bodys surface.
The BMP section process IQ Vectors from the EQ to create B and M mode vectors. This design is
composed of 12 major blocks; Synthetic Aperture, Axial Interpolator, Detector/Vector Compounder,
Smoothing Filter, Rate Converter, Dynamic Range Compression, Edge enhance, Splicer, BMode
Output, MMode Output, Vector Configuration and the PCI Interface.
5-3-7-2 Modes of Operation

The EBM/EBM2 equalization design section supports two input data buses from the final summer of the
TD board set. The two buses are referred to as the I and Q data buses (or pipes). Each twos
complement bus is 24 bits wide and passes data from the final TD board to the EBM/EBM2 board.
Different system modes of operation cause the two data pipes to handle data in different ways. The
EBM/EBM2 board transfers output data to the Scan Control Board over two, twos complement sixteen
bit I and Q buses. Internal EBM/EBM2 board data pipes are sixteen bit twos complement format.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-3-7 EBM, EBM2 Board (contd)
HV Line Power Supply Con

I2C BUS Power Supply
PCI BUS HV Control
XDIF Probe Interf
SCAN CONTROL BUS XDIF Interface Bu
Fan Control / SCAN PCI I2C XDIF/ PS Commutator

Power Supply Ctrl I/F I/F Probe Ctrl Ctrl
Measurement I/F I/F I/F I/F
Probe
Temperature Base
Analog
Sensor TGC Analog TGC / Vref Bus
Delay MUX
TGC V-ref
High Speed Digital GEN
SSRAM TGC
~ 9Mbit
Dynamic
Apodization
Configuration Gain Mods Coef
RXSYNC Delayed
Flash 5
RAM
(Host Programmed) TFC 5
LUT NCO 32-tap I(L,R)
Barrel I(L,R)
5 Delay 16
Shift &
FIR 16 16
TD: I-Data I(L,R) I(L,R) I(L,R) Complex I(L,R) Output
Barrel 17 16 Block
24 Mult 16
TD: Q-Data Q(L,R) Shifter Q(L,R) Multiplier Q(L,R) Q(L,R) 32-tap Q(L,R) Q(L,R)
24
17 16 16 FIR 16 16
RXSYNC
TXSYNC Coef
RAM
CLK-20MHz
CLK-10MHz
CLK-40MHz
FIFO
8Kx18
IQ (Q) Data
FIFO
8Kx18 CLK-20MHz
RXSYNC Delay
FIFO
8Kx18 Test 16 Synthetic 16 Axial 16 Detector & Low Rate
Vector Aperture Interpolation Vector 15 Pass 15 Converter 15
Generator 16 16 16 Compound Filter
TXSYNC
Dynamic Edge B-Mode B/M Mode

Range Enhance Splicer 8 Output 8 (I) Data
8 8 Output
SRAM Compress 10 MSB
M-Mode Test Vector
64Kx16 8 8
Local SCAN Bus Output Capture
Vector
PCI Configuration
I/F
Figure 5-17 EBM/EBM2 Board Block Diagram
5-3-7-3 EBM/EBM2 Interface with XDIF relay board

The EBM/EBM2 EQ section supports an eight-bit read/write data interface to the XDIF relay board. The
interface is used to transfer commutator control information to the selected probe and provides host
access to the XDIF relay board itself. The EBM/EBM2 board monitors four probes present and four
probe hook lines from the XDIF relay board. The EBM/EBM2 EQ section monitors the lines, and
generates an interrupt signal when any of the signals change state. The interrupt signal will be
debounced to limit the frequency with which probe interrupts may be generated. The EBM/EBM2 board
also measures the temperature of the selected probe over two lines from the XDIF relay board. The
SCE pulse signal connected to the EBM/EBM2 EQ section in order to be able to support the Global
Beamforming future development.

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-3-7 EBM, EBM2 Board (contd)
5-3-7-4 BMode Output Blocks

The Bmode output block collect vector data and tags for delivery to the Scan Control Board. It can form
output vectors from one or multiple input vectors (multitransmit focus). The vector tags are used to
form the control bytes in the output vector. Only complete vectors are sent to the BM_OUTPUT Block.
The maximum vector length shall be 512 pixels.
5-3-7-5 MMode Output Block

Mmode acquisition is nearly always a multiple firings per output vector operation. When the vector rate
is higher than the display rate a peak accumulate function shall be used to provide an output which is
the pointbypoint peak signal amplitude of all the firings since the last output. The Mmode output
block usually outputs one processed M vector after combining the receive vectors from several firings.
The maximum ratio of input vectors to output vectors is 256, although this number is transparent to the
hardware. M_GATE tag shall control when the current peak accumulation stops, the vector is sent and
a new vector is formed. The peak accumulation shall be reset after the data is sent to the BM_OUTPUT
Block.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-4
Back End Processor (BEP 1)
The Back End Processor (BEP 1) receives the data from the Front End Electronics, stores it in memory,
performs scan conversion to pixel domain, and drives the system RGB monitor.
Back End Processor software is also providing Color Flow, Doppler, and M-Mode Processing.
SLOT 7
PC MOTHERBOARD
Front Panel
HD LED
ETHERNET
PCI Slot #5
SLOT 6
RS232 #3
RS232 #4 PC2IP
I2C
RS422
INTERNAL DRIVE BAY
PC2IP
HARD DRIVE
PCI Slot #4
SLOT 5
IDE #1
Optional 3D
TOP DRIVE BAY system
ECG PCI BIRD CARD
PCI Slot #3
SLOT 4
DIGITAL OUT
MIDDLE DRIVE BAY SPEAKER OUT
MIC IN
MOD LINE OUT
LINE IN
SOUND CARD
PCI Slot #2
SLOT 3
BOTTOM DRIVE BAY
CD RW
PCI VIDEO
PCI Slot #1
IDE #2
SLOT 2
UPS Battery
AGP VIDEO
AGP Slot
SLOT 1
JWR1
CPU #1 10/100bT
PARALLEL
256 MB DIMM
256 MB DIMM
DIMM Slot #2
DIMM Slot #1
USB1
DIMM Slot #4
DIMM Slot #3
USB2
JFP1
UPS JWOL1 CPU #2
COM1
COM2 (EXT)
AC POWER
ATX POWER SUPPLY PCIO MODULE
POWER
S/C VIDEO OUT
SVGA OUT 2
PCIO Board
Control
SVGA IN
SVGA OUT 1
RGB OUT
PCVIC Board
Figure 5-18 CPU/Back End Processor BEP1
NOTE: Specifications mentioned about the Back End Processor (BEP) will be minimum requirements.
The actual hardware could exceed these specifications as technology advances.
5-22 Section 5-4 - Back End Processor (BEP 1)

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-4-1 Enclosure
The EMC enclosure shall house an ATX Power Supply with UPS battery backup, an ATX style
motherboard with minimum of 512 MB of RAM and two 733MHz processors
5-4-2 PCI Cards

Five (5) PCI slots on the mother board shall contain the following:
1.) PCI Video Card - Digital Video to the Touch Panel

2.) Sound Card - Sound Blaster Live for audio to speakers
3.) Blank or PCI Bird 3D Card - Option
4.) PC2IP Card - GE designed. PCI Bus interface to the Front End Processor
5.) Network Interface Card - 3Com Ethernet Card
5-4-3 AGP Video Card - SVGA Video to the PCVIC Card

Analog output shall comply with the SVGA specification.
Resolution shall be 800x600.
Support for 32 bit True Color
Minimum of 8 Mbytes of high speed Video RAM, expandable to at least 16 Mbytes.
128-bit internal memory interface.
Hardware supported asynchronous bit block transfer (80 Mpixels/sec).
Full Direct 3D and Open-GI support (desirable).
5-4-4 PCIO Board

This GE designed board does not plug into any slot but is mounted to the inside of the PC chassis.
- Power and Internal PCI control signals
5-4-5 PCI Video Card

- Input from AGP Video card
- SVGA output to the image monitor
- RGB output to color printer

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-4-6 UPS Battery Operation

The UPS batteries provide power to the Back End Processor to enable a controlled shut down of the
processor. The UPS batteries will drain slightly when the system is in the off condition. The off condition
is defined as:
- Circuit Breaker in the OFF position

- System unplugged from the wall outlet
If the system is left in the OFF condition for an extended period of time (3 to 5 days or more), the system
may not boot up or may beep when turned ON. Should this occur, the system needs to recharge the
UPS batteries. This could take 15 minutes to as long as 24 hours, depending on the battery age, system
input voltage and system temperature.
To eliminate draining the UPS batteries, the system should remain plugged into the wall outlet with the
circuit breaker in the ON position.
The expected life of the battery is approximately one (1) year.
5-4-7 Internal Storage Devices:

A 20 or 40 Gigabyte EIDE Hard Disk Drive (HDD) inside the Back End Processor cabinet.
3.5 inch Magneto-Optical Drive (MOD) (available from front of scanner).
CD-RW Drive (available from front of scanner).
5-4-8 Location of the Back End Processor
P3 Backend Processor
P4 Backend Processors
typically have a fan in the
Left Side of scanner
center of the cover
Rear Side Front of

of Scanner Scanner
Figure 5-19 Backend Processor 1 mounted in scanner

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-4-9 Inputs (BEP 1)
5-4-9-1 AC Power
Table 5-5 AC Power
Input Description Connection from:

230 VAC AC Power AC Distribution Box > Backend Processor
5-4-9-2 DC Voltages
Table 5-6 DC Input Voltages
Input Description Connected to:

+5Vstb Standby voltage DC Power Supply via Backplane
GND Electrical Ground DC Power Supply via Backplane and II/O
5-4-9-3 Input Signals

Table 5-7 Input Signals
Signal Name Description Signal Path

PWR_OK* Power verification signal from Card Rack Card Rack > IIO > PC2IO
Signal from the ON/OFF switch on the Control Panel and Top Console > IIO > PC2IO
ON/OFF Switch
from the Reset button on the rear of the External I/O. ON/OFF Reset (EIO) > IIO > PC2IO
I2C Register
Interrupt signal from I2C Bus EIO > IIO > PC2IO
Interrupt
Microphone in to
Microphone signal from Monitor (Top Console) Top Console > IIO > BEP
BEP
Replay Audio from VCR > IIO > BEP

Audio in to BEP Audio from VCR or Doppler Audio
Doppler Audio Out from Card Rack > IIO > BEP
5-4-9-4 Bi-directional Signals

Table 5-8 Bi-directional Signals

UPS Control
Control Signals to and from the UPS BEP > IIO
RS232
RS232 XDCTRL Not Used PC2IO > IIO > Not Used
Data bus used for Remote Control of External Units and

I2C Bus PC2IO > IIO > EIO
for reading module versions.
Spare RS232 Not Used PC2IO > IIO > Not Used
VCR Remote Ctrl

Control signal to Internal VCR PC2IO > IIO > VCR
(RS232)
USB #1 USB bus to Top Console PC2IO > IIO > Top Console
COM 1 Can be configured to transfer report page data PC2IO > IIO > EIO
COM 2 Modem PC2IO > IIO > EIO (Rear of Module) > Modem
Ethernet Standard TCP/IP Ethernet BEP > IIO > EIO > External Network
USB #2 USB Bus for External Units BEP > IIO > EIO > External USB Unit

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-4-10 Outputs
Table 5-9 Output Signals

+5VDC DC Voltage PC2IO > IIO
+12VDC DC Voltage PC2IO > IIO
PS_ON* TBD (Active Low) PC2IO > IIO > Card Rack
Standby TBD PC2IO > IIO > Top Console
SVideo SVideo Out PCVIC > PC2IO > IIO > EIO
CVideo Composite Color Video PCVIC > PC2IO > IIO > EIO
VGA VGA High Resolution Video to External Video Screen PCVIC > PC2IO > IIO > EIO
VGA High Resolution Video to Internal Video Screen (Top

VGA BEP > Top Console
Console)
BW Video from RGB. PCVIC > PC2IO > IIO > EIO
BW Video RGB
This signal is not used on LOGIQ 9 This signal is not used on LOGIQ 9
BEP > IIO > Internal VCR
Audio Out Audio Out from BEP
BEP > IIO > EIO > External VCR
TRIG Video Trig Signal PC2IO > IIO > EIO

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-5
Back End Processor (BEP 2)
The Back End Processor (BEP 2) receives the data from the Front End Electronics, stores it in memory,
performs scan conversion to pixel domain, and drives the system RGB monitor.
PC
MOTHERBOARD
Front
Panel
USB5/6 HD Led
PCI Slot #6
RS232 #3
RS232 #4
I2C
RS422
PC2IPIIB
PCI Slot #5
INTERNAL DRIVE BAY
HARD DRIVE
PCI Slot #4
SATA 0
TOP DRIVE BAY
ECG Frame Grabber

PCI Slot #3
FP USB2
MIDDLE DRIVE
BAY
MOD
SCSI Card
PCI Slot #2
PCI Slot #1
BOTTOM DRIVE
BAY
DVD RW
IDE #2
AGP card with DVI Output

AGP Slot
FP USB 1
USB3/4
POWER
Motherboard
SVGA
512 MB DIMM
512 MB DIMM
Channel B DIMM Slot #0
Channel A DIMM Slot #0

Channel B DIMM Slot #1
Channel A DIMM Slot #1
USB3/4
USB1/2
ATX POWER SUPPLY
CPU Fan
Front Panel COM1

UPS
Header
CPU
PARALLEL
AC POWER
Chassis
Rear Fan 10/100bT
POWER
S/C VIDEO
OUT
SVGA OUT
2
DGIO Board
Control
FAN quick disconnect DVI IN
SVGA OUT
1
CHASSIE FAN RGB OUT

DGVIC Board
Figure 5-20 CPU/Back End Processor BEP2

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-5-1 Enclosure
motherboard with minimum of 512 MB of RAM and one 2GHz processor.
5-5-2 PCI Cards

Six (6) PCI slots on the mother board shall contain the following:
1.) Sound Card - Sound Blaster Live for audio to speakers

2.) Blank or FOB
3.) PCI Video Card - Digital Video to the Touch Panel
4.) USB Control
5.) PC2IP Card - GE designed. PCI Bus interface to the Front End Processor
6.) Blank or CW option
5-5-3 AGP Video Card - DVI Video to the DGVIC

5-5-4 PCIO Board:

- Power and Internal PCI control signals
5-5-5 PCVIC Card

- Input from Motherboard AGP Video (BEP 2.0)
- SVGA output to the image monitor

- RGB output to color printer

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-5-6 DGVIC, DGIO and ADD Cards BEP 2.1 (BT02, November 2002)
The ADD Card is a PCI card that mimics the AGP video and provides a digital video output to the DGVIC
board.
The DGVIC converts the digital video to RGBS, SVGA (to Monitor and External I/O), S-video and
Composite video outputs.
The DGIO provides signals and power to I/O boards. Signals like PS_ON, I2C, RS232, PC Power and
PC On/Off.
5-5-7 Additional Memory (RAM) (BT03, October 2003) - BEP2.2

Additional memory was added to the motherboard for R3.0.0 Software and BT03. One of the 256 MByte
SIMM modules was replaced with a 512 MByte module. This brings the total RAM memory to
768MBytes and designated the unit to be a BEP2.2.
5-5-8 DGVIC/DGIO Upgrade

It is possible that older P3 Back End Processor video chains could be upgraded to digital. This involves
replacing the Analog AGP Video card with a Matrox video card that has analog and video outputs.
The PC2IO/PCVIC Tray assembly is also replaced with the DGIO/DGVIC Tray.
Digital video is supplied by the Matrox video card to the DGVIC for distribution to peripherals. Monitor
video is taken directly from the Analog output of the Matrox video card instead of the DGVIC.

processor. The UPS batteries will drain slightly when the system is in the off condition. The off condition
is defined as:

The expected life of the battery is approximately one (1) year.
5-5-10 Internal Storage Devices

A 40 Gigabyte EIDE Hard Disk Drive (HDD) inside the Back End Processor cabinet.
3.5 inch Magneto-Optical Drive (MOD) (available from front of scanner).
CD-RW Drive (available from front of scanner).

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
BEP 2
Rear Side Front of

of Scanner Scanner
Left Side of scanner
Figure 5-21 Backend Processor 2 mounted in scanner

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-5-12 Inputs
5-5-12-1 AC Power
Table 5-10 AC Power

5-5-12-2 DC Voltages



ON/OFF Switch
I2C Register
Interrupt
Microphone in to
Microphone signal from Monitor (Top Console) Top Console > IIO > BEP
BEP
Replay Audio from VCR > IIO > BEP

Audio in to BEP Audio from VCR or Doppler Audio Doppler Audio Out from Card Rack > IIO >
BEP

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM

UPS Control
RS232
RS232 XDCTRL Not Used PC2IO > IIO > Not Used
Data bus used for Remote Control of External Units and for
reading module versions.
Spare RS232 Not Used PC2IO > IIO > Not Used
VCR Remote Ctrl

(RS232)
NOTE: BEP2.x processors have one Com Port and six USB Ports. The Com Port is connected to the
modem via the Internal I/O. A USB to Serial Converter feeds the external serial connection via
the Internal I/O. BEP 2.1 Processors have digital video coming from a Matrox or ADD card
going to the DGIO/DGVIC Tray. BEP 2.x processors have Ethernet and Analog Video on the
motherboard.
5-5-12-5 USB to Serial Adapter Cable Setup

(RS232 Serial Port Connector on the External I/O)
The Prolific USB to RS232 Adapter Cable (black one) should be properly set up when the Base Image
Load is applied to the system. However, if you need to set a specific parameter for the USB COM Port
(COM1) perform the following steps:
- After booting up with the Service Key (Dongle), entering Maintenance Mode and Windows,
select My Computer>Properties>Hardware Tab>Device manager.
- Under Ports (COM & LPT) select Prolific USB-to-Serial Comm/Port (COM 3) and select
Properties.
- Under the Port Settings TAB you can set the Bits per second, Data bits, Parity Stop Bits and
Flow Control to the desired values.
Table 5-14 Factory Default Values
Signal Name Setting

Bits Per Second 9600
Data Bits 8
Parity None
Stop Bits 1
Flow Control None

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-5-13 Outputs

+5VDC DC Voltage DG2IO > IIO
+12VDC DC Voltage DG2IO > IIO
PS_ON* TBD (Active Low) DG2IO > IIO > Card Rack
Standby TBD DG2IO > IIO > Top Console
SVideo SVideo Out DGVIC > DG2IO > IIO > EIO
CVideo Composite Color Video DGVIC > DG2IO > IIO > EIO
VGA VGA High Resolution Video to External Video Screen DGVIC > DG2IO > IIO > EIO
VGA High Resolution Video to Internal Video Screen BEP > Top Console
(Top Console)
VGA
BT06 17 LCD (with Matrox VID card) (2 connectors: LCD and PCI DGVIC)
BW Video from RGB. DGVIC > DG2IO > IIO > EIO
BW Video RGB

TRIG Video Trig Signal PC2IO > IIO > EIO

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-6
Back End Processor (BEP 3.x)
The Back End Processor (BEP 3.x) receives the data from the Front End Electronics, stores it in
memory, performs scan conversion to pixel domain, and drives the system RGB monitor.
On BEP 3.x with LCD units

only:
This card is replaced with

the Matrox Dual Output
video card
Figure 5-22 CPU/Back End Processor BEP3.x
5-34 Section 5-6 - Back End Processor (BEP 3.x)

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-6-1 Enclosure
motherboard with minimum of 512 MB of RAM and a 3.2 GHz processor.
5-6-2 PCI Cards

1.) USB 2.0 Hub Card

2.) Blank or PCI Bird Card
3.) PCI Video Card
4.) PCI DGVIC Card
5.) PC2IP Card
6.) Blank or CW Card
5-6-3 AGP Video Card - DVI Video to the DGVIC Card

AGP Video Card (CRT only)
Matrox Dual Output Video Card replaces standard AGP Video card (LCD only).
5-6-4 PCI DGVIC and ADD Cards

The ADD Card is a PCI card that mimics the AGP video and provides a digital video output to the PCI
DGVIC board.
The PCI DGVIC converts the digital video to SVGA (to External I/O), S-video and Composite video
outputs. It also provides signals and power to I/O boards. Signals like PS_ON, I2C, RS232, PC Power
and PC On/Off.

processor. The UPS batteries will drain slightly when the system is in the Off condition. The Off condition
is defined as:
The expected life of the battery is approximately one (1) year. Expected battery lifetime for frequent
standby use is six (6) months.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM

DVD Drive (available from front of scanner).
BEP 3 / 3.5
Front of
Scanner
Left Side of
Rear of Scanner
Scanner
Figure 5-23 Backend Processor mounted in scanner

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-6-8 Inputs (BEP 3.x)
5-6-8-1 AC Power
Table 5-16 AC Power

5-6-8-2 DC Voltages



ON/OFF Switch
I2C Register
Interrupt


UPS Control
RS232
VCR Remote Ctrl

(RS232)
NOTE: BEP3 processors have one Com Port and 12 USB Ports. The Com Port is connected to the
Internal I/O. BEP 3 Processors have digital video coming from a Matrox or ADD card going to
the DGIO/DGVIC or PCI DGVIC Tray. BEP 3 processors have Ethernet and Analog Video on
the motherboard.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-6-9 Outputs

+5VDC DC Voltage Bulkhead > IIO
PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > Card

PS_ON* TBD (Active Low)
Rack
PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > Top
Standby TBD
Console
SVideo SVideo Out PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO
CVideo Composite Color Video PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO
VGA VGA High Resolution Video to External Video Screen PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO

Console)
BW Video from RGB. PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO
BW Video RGB

TRIG Video Trig Signal PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-7
Back End Processor (BEP 4.x)
The Back End Processor (BEP 4.x) receives the data from the Front End Electronics, stores it in
memory, performs scan conversion to pixel domain, and drives the system RGB monitor.
Figure 5-24 CPU/Back End Processor BEP4.x

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-7-1 Enclosure
motherboard with minimum of 1 GB of RAM and a 3.4 GHz processor.
5-7-2 PCI Cards

1.) PCI Video Card

2.) Blank or PCI Bird Card
3.) USB Cable
4.) PCI DGVIC2 Card
5.) PC2IP3 Card
6.) Blank or CW Card
5-7-3 AGP Video Card - DVI Video to the DGVIC Card

Digital output shall comply with the DVI specification.
Resolution shall reflect the installed monitor specifications.
PCI Express Video Card
5-7-4 PCI DGVIC2 and ADD2 Cards

The ADD2 Card is a PCIe card that mimics the SVGA video and provides a digital video output to the
PCI DGVIC2 board.
The PCI DGVIC2 converts the digital video to SVGA (to External I/O), S-video and Composite video
outputs. It also provides signals and power to I/O boards. Signals like PS_ON, I2C, RS232, PC Power
and PC On/Off.

processor. The UPS batteries will drain slightly when the system is in the Off condition. The Off condition
is defined as:
needs to recharge the UPS batteries. This could take as long as 24 hours, depending on the battery
age, system input voltage and system temperature.
The expected life of the battery is approximately one (1) year. Expected battery lifetime for frequent
standby use is six (6) months.

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM

DVD Drive (available from front of scanner).
BEP 4.x
Front of
Scanner
Left Side of
Rear of Scanner
Scanner
Figure 5-25 Backend Processor mounted in scanner

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-7-8 Inputs (BEP 4.x)
5-7-8-1 AC Power
Table 5-21 AC Power

5-7-8-2 DC Voltages



Signal from the ON/OFF switch on the Control Panel.

ON/OFF Switch Top Console > IIO > PC2IO
(Reset button on the rear of the External I/O not active)
I2C Register
Interrupt


UPS Control
RS232
VCR Remote Ctrl

(RS232)
NOTE: BEP4.x processors have one Com Port and 12 USB Ports. The Com Port is connected to the
Internal I/O. BEP4.x Processors have digital video coming from an ADD2 card going to the
DGIO/DGVIC or PCI-DGVIC2 Tray. BEP4.x processors have Ethernet and Analog Video on the
motherboard.

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-7-9 Outputs

PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > Card

PS_ON* TBD (Active Low)
Rack
PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > Top
Standby TBD
Console
SVideo SVideo Out PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO
CVideo Composite Color Video PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO
VGA VGA High Resolution Video to External Video Screen PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO

Console)
BW Video from RGB. PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO
BW Video RGB

TRIG Video Trig Signal PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-8
BEP Power On Path
(refer to Figure 5-26 on page 5-44 )
The Back End Processor is powered ON by:
- Press and release the OP I/O Standby (On/Off) switch.

- The signal from the OP I/O goes to the II/O (A4) and through the rack power relay in the
Internal I/O.
- The PC Power ON signal from the II/O (B6) goes to the PC2IO (D2) then to the BEP
motherboard commanding the BEP Power Supply to turn ON.
Figure 5-26 BEP Power On Path
5-44 Section 5-8 - BEP Power On Path

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-9
BEP Power Off Path
(refer to Figure 5-27 on page 5-45 )
The Back End Processor is powered Off by:
- Press and release the OP I/O Standby (On/Off) switch.

- The signal from the OP I/O goes to the II/O (A4) and through the rack power relay in the
Internal I/O to the I2C register.
- Software detects the request to power down via the I2C buss from the II/O (B5) to the BEP
(D1).
- The system begins a controlled shut down procedure closing applications, files, turning off FE
rack power and finally BEP power.
Figure 5-27 BEP Power Off Path

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-10
Operator Console Control PWA
Figure 5-29 and Figure 5-28 show the audio path through the Operator Console Control Printed Wire
Assembly.
Figure 5-28 USB-OP Console Control PWA - Power
Figure 5-29 USB-OP Console Control PWA - Audio
5-46 Section 5-10 - Operator Console Control PWA

1/18/10
GE H EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-10-1 Console Main Cable
5-10-1-1 Main Cable Connector Functions - Prior to BT04
L
H
J
G
A M
Figure 5-30 Main Cable Drawing - prior to BT04

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-10-1-1 Main Cable Connector Functions - Prior to BT04 (contd)
Table 5-26 Main Cable Composition Prior to BT04
Item Function Lower to Description
A Safety Ground Connector A-G Safety Ground Connector
B DVI to DVI Interface B-I Interface to the Touch Screen B- I
C RGB to the Main Monitor C-H RGB to the Main Monitor C - H
D 110 VAC to the Main Monitor D-J 110 VAC to the Main Monitor D - J
E USB Audio, Microphone E-K USB Audio, Microphone and DC for Operator Panel
F DC Power and Control F-K DC Power and Control to the Operator panel
G Safety Ground Connector A-G Safety Ground Connector
H RGB to the Main Monitor C- H RGB to the Main Monitor C - H
I DVI to DVI Interface B-I Interface to the Touch Screen B - I
J 110 VAC to the Main Monitor D-J 110 VAC to the Main Monitor D - J
K USB Audio, Microphone and DC E/F - K USB Audio, Microphone and DC for Operator Panel
L Microphone to the Operator panel E-L to the Operator panel Microphone
M Z Release Cable From piston to Z release handle on the console
5-10-1-2 Main Cable Connectors with Pinouts - Prior to BT04
Table 5-27 Connector A & G- Safety Ground
Pin Signal
1 Ground
Table 5-28 Connector B & I - Touch Screen Interface
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 LVDS Data 2- 10 LVDS Data 1+ 19 Ground
2 LVDS Data 2+ 11 Ground 20
3 Ground 12 21
4 13 22 Ground
5 14 +5V 23 LVDS Clock -
6 +5V 15 Return 24 LVDS Clock +
7 Return 16 +12V Backlight
8 17 LVDS Data 2-
9 LVDS Data 1- 18 LVDS Data 2-

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
Table 5-29 Connector C & H - Touch Screen Interface
1 Red 6 Red Ground 11 nc
2 Green 7 Green Ground 12 nc
3 Blue 8 Blue Ground 13 H Sync
4 nc 9 nc 14 V Sync
5 nc 10 Sync Ground 15 nc
Table 5-30 Connector D & J - 110VAC to Monitor
1 110 VAC 2 Ground 3 Neutral
Table 5-31 Connector E - USB, Audio & Microphone
1 nc 6 USB 5V 11 Ground Audio - Right
2 nc 7 USB 5V 12 Ground Microphone
3 Audio - Left 8 USB D+ 13 Ground USB
4 Audio - Right 9 nc 14 Ground USB
5 Microphone 10 Ground Audio - Left 15 USB D-
Table 5-32 Connector F - Op Console Power
1 +15 6 +12V 11 Standby LED 0
2 +15 7 +12V 12 nc
3 nc 8 +12v 13 +12 Ground
4 On/Off SW0 9 +15 Ground 14 Ground USB
5 On/Off SW1 10 +15 Ground 15 USB D-

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
Table 5-33 Connector K- Op Console Power, Audio, Mic, Control
1 Standby LED 0 13 +15V 25 nc
2 nc 14 + 15V Ground 26 nc
3 On/Off SW1 15 nc 27 USB 5V
4 On/Off SW0 16 nc 28 USB Ground
5 +12V 17 MIcrophone 29 USB 5V
6 +12V Ground 18 Microphone Ground 30 USB Ground
7 +12V 19 Shield Power/Control 31 USB D+
8 +12V Ground 20 Shield Audio/Mic 32 USB D-
9 +12V 21 Audio - Left 33 Shield USB
10 +12V Ground 22 Audio - Left Ground 34 nc
11 +15V 23 Audio - Right
12 + 15V Ground 24 Audio - Right Ground
Table 5-34 Connector L- Console Microphone
Pin Signal
1 Microphone
Microphone Ground

1/18/10
GE H EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-10-1-3 Main Cable Connector Functions - BT04 and after
H
F
J
G
E
A M
Figure 5-31 Main Cable - BT04 and after
Table 5-35 Main Cable Composition - BT04 and after
Item Function Lower to Description
A Safety Ground Connector A&G Safety Ground Connector
B DVI to DVI Interface B&I Interface to the Touch Screen B- I
C Housing Terminals C&H Video for Main CRT
D 110 VAC to the Main Monitor D&J 110 VAC to the Main Monitor D - J
E USB Audio, Microphone E-K USB Audio, Microphone and DC for Operator Panel
F DC Power and Control F-K DC Power and Control to the Operator panel
G Safety Ground Connector A&G Safety Ground Connector
H RGB to the Main Monitor C&H RGB to the Main Monitor C - H
I DVI to DVI Interface B&I Interface to the Touch Screen B - I
J 110 VAC to the Main Monitor D&J 110 VAC to the Main Monitor D - J
K USB Audio, Microphone and DC E/F - K USB Audio, Microphone and DC for Operator Panel
M Z Release Cable From piston to Z release handle on the console

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-10-1-4 Main Cable Connectors with Pinouts - BT04 and after (5119218)
Table 5-36 Connector A & G- Safety Ground - BT04 and after (5119218)
Pin Signal
1 Ground
Table 5-37 Connector B & I - Touch Screen Interface - BT04 and after (5119218)
1 LVDS Data 2- 10 LVDS Data 1+ 19 Ground
2 LVDS Data 2+ 11 Ground 20
3 Ground 12 21
4 13 22 Ground
5 14 +5V 23 LVDS Clock -
6 +5V 15 Return 24 LVDS Clock +
7 Return 16 +12V Backlight
8 17 LVDS Data 0-
9 LVDS Data 1- 18 LVDS Data 0+
Table 5-38 Connector C & H - Video for Main CRT - BT04 and after (5119218)
1 TMDS Data 2- 10 TMDS Data 1+ 19 Ground
2 TMDS Data 2+ 11 Ground 20 nc
3 Ground 12 nc 21 nc
4 nc 13 nc 22 Ground
5 nc 14 +5V 23 TMDS Clock -
6 DDC Clock (SCL) 15 +5 Return 24 TMDS Clock +
7 DDC Data (SCA) 16 Hot Plug Detect C1 Analog Red
8 Analog Vert Sync 17 TMDS Data 0- C2 Analog Green
9 TMDS Data 1- 18 TMDS Data 0+ C3 Analog Blue
C4 Analog Horz Sync
C5 Ground

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-10-1-4 Main Cable Connectors with Pinouts - BT04 and after (5119218) (contd)
Table 5-39 Connector D & J - 110VAC to Monitor - BT04 and after (5119218)
1 110 VAC 2 Ground 3 Neutral
Table 5-40 Connector E - USB, Audio & Microphone - BT04 and after (5119218)
1 nc 6 USB 5V 11 Ground Audio - Right
2 nc 7 USB 5V 12 Ground Microphone
3 Audio - Left 8 USB D+ 13 Ground USB
4 Audio - Right 9 nc 14 Ground USB
5 Microphone 10 Ground Audio - Left 15 USB D-
Table 5-41 Connector F - Op Console Power - BT04 and after (5119218)
1 +15 6 +12V 11 Standby LED 0
2 +15 7 +12V 12 nc
3 nc 8 +12v 13 +12 Ground
4 On/Off SW0 9 +15 Ground 14 +12 Ground
5 On/Off SW1 10 +15 Ground 15 +12 Ground

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-11
Patient I/O (Currently not supported by the LOGIQ 9)
The Patient I/O is mounted inside the Backend Processors cabinet with its connector panel available
on the front of the scanner.
The Patient IO contains the electronics for ECG, phono and two analog inputs. One of the inputs has
programmable gain. The module extracts respiration from ECG. The electronics also contains a
pacemaker detector. The four inputs are separately isolated because of safety requirements.
ISOLATION
PHONO
PHONO
ECG
ECG / RESPIRATION A/D Digital Trace Data
to PC2IO
AUX 1 AUX1
AUX2
AUX 2 (Pulse/Pressure)
(Pulse/Pressure)
Figure 5-32 Patient I/O - Block Diagram
Inputs
- Phono (from a phono heart microphone)

- ECG / Respiration
- AUX1
- AUX2 (Pulse/Pressure)
These signals are optically isolated from the rest of the system.
Outputs
Serial Trace Data via Internal I/O to the SPD Board.
5-54 Section 5-11 - Patient I/O (Currently not supported by the LOGIQ 9)
1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-12
Internal I/O
The Internal I/O is the interface between the Card Cage, PC Module, and the rest of the system,
including the Top Console and the Peripherals. Table 9-26 on page 9-45 and Table 9-30 on page 9-58
have information on cable call-outs.
BACK-END PROCESSING MODULE
SVGA
SVGA BD. SVGA SVGA TOP CONSOLE
MONITOR
PCVIC
3D & FRONT-END
PERIPHERALS AC POWER
TV - RGBS ROTATION PROCESSING
USB, audio, ctrl. signals

(VCR & printers) & FANS
ADAPTER MODULE
Power
TV video,
Power
SGVA
& I2C
RS232, ctrl. signals
audio & TV video

TV video, audio,
Ctrl. signals
Ctrl. signals
Ctrl. signals
Power
Power
RS232, I2C
PC2IP & ctrl. signals
TV video, SVGA, RS232 &

I2C
INTERNAL I/O
Power
Power
RS232, USB, I2C, Ethernet,

UPS PC2IO
SVGA, TV video
& ctrl signals
RS232
Power
COM1/2 & audio
Ethernet, USB,
Serial data, I2C

PAT I/O EXTERNAL I/O
Power
Figure 5-33 Internal I/O Basic Interconnect

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-12 Internal I/O (contd)
TO CARD RACK SONY VCR SVO-9500MD

Remote
Right
Left
AUDIO OUT SONY B/W PRINTER
UP890MD
Right
Left
AUDIO IN
A8 B/W Video In
A9
RS-232C
A6
A7 RS-232C SONY
VIDEO OUT
COLOR PRINTER
A2 UP-2900MD
A15
Video Output
A11 VIDEO IN
COLOR PRNT
VIDEO RGB & Sync
A10
A1 Speaker
OP PANEL
Video/Mic Audio Amp
A3 Mic Pre-Amp
A14 AC Power
MONITOR Op Control
A4
To AC CONTROL ASSY
for FAN SPEED USB, +12PC, MIC IN, AUDIO OUT Video Rcvr
Regulation COLOR PRNT
TOUCH PANEL VIDEO
A5 VIDEO
USER INTERFACE
D5 RGB Out PC/VIC

D4 SVGA Out
50M
B5
D3 SVGA from AGP
PC2IO
SVGA VIDEO
B6
50M
D1 I/O-PC2IO
Signals Cable
B7 D2 Power from PC
B8 COM2 (EXT)
COM1
B2
MOTHERBOARD
USB #2
TO B1 On LCD units
INTERNAL I/O USB #1
PC
BOARD B3 only:
10/100 T
B9 UPS CNTRL
Matrox Dual
Line In
B4 Line Out Output video
Mic In
SOUND CARD
card
SVGA VIDEO AGP VIDEO
INTERNAL I/O BOARD TOUCH PANEL PCI VIDEO
CD/RW
VIDEO
FLOCK OF BIRDS
(option)
PCI Bus to FEP MOD
Cardrack PC2IP
Ethernet ECG
PC MODULE
Figure 5-34 Internal I/O Module Overview
Internal I/O Enhancement for BT03 (FC200423)

Modifications were made to the Internal I/O in October of 2003 to enhance the performance of the
Microphone function. Resistor values were changed in the microphone amplifier circuit to increase the
gain, a capacitor was added to reduce noise as well as a modified wiring scheme and differential
pre-amp to reduce noise. This new FRU is backwards compatible.
5-56 Section 5-12 - Internal I/O

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-12 Internal I/O (contd)
Figure 5-35 Internal I/O Back End Processor Connections
The Internal I/O board performs buffering and distribution of video and control data from various sources
to multiple destinations.
SVGA (R, G, B and Sync.) are fed from the BEP, directly up to the system monitor. Another set of
RGB can be fed to a color printer.
Composite video, black and white video and S-Video are buffered and distributed to VCR and
printers.
The analog Doppler signals are fed from the Spectrum Doppler board to the VCR audio inputs and
through a switch where audio from VCR playback also is input, to the BEP and then to the speakers.
Serial RS-232 interface signals from the BEP are fed to the destinations; VCR, Color Printer and
Modem.
Serial USB interface signals from the BEP are fed to the Front Panel and to EIO.
Remote control signals for printers are generated on the I/O board.
The Footswitch is connected to the I/O board.
An AC Power Interface controls power on/off and fan speed.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-12-1 Location in the Unit

The Internal I/O Module is plugged into the Card Rack (at the end nearest to the rear of the system).
5-12-2 LEDs
Nine green LEDs indicate that the respective DC Voltages are OK.
NOTE: The -15 V LED is not used on the LOGIQ 9. It is normal for it to be off (not lit).
Figure 5-36 Internal I/O: Green LEDs for Power Status.
5-12-3 Fuses
All output voltages are fused
5-12-4 Jumpers and Dip-switches

There are no Jumpers or Dip Switches on the Internal I/O.

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-12-5 Inputs
5-12-5-1 DC Voltages
Input Description Connection from

+3.3 VDC Input DC Voltage DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32
+5 VDC Input DC Voltage DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32
-Not used on the L9 -

-15 VDC DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32
Input DC Voltage
+6 VDC (analog) Input DC Voltage DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32
5 VDC (analog) Input DC Voltage DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32
+5 VDC Input DC Voltage Backend Processor > J17
+12 VDC Input DC Voltage Backend Processor > J17)
5-12-5-2 Video Input Signals

Table 5-43 Video Input Signals

SVGA Video Signal to External I/O PC2IO (Connector J16)
SVHS Video Signal to VCR & External I/O PC2IO(Connector J16)

SVHS Video Signal to MBD (IMP) VCR (Connector J11)
Luma Video Signal to B&W Printer and External I/O PC2IO (Connector J16)
Comp. Video Video Signal to External I/O PC2IO (Connector J16)

Comp. Video Video Signal to MBD (IMP) Color printer
5-12-5-3 Audio Input Signals

Table 5-44 Audio Input Signals

Two channel audio MBD (IMP)
Two channel audio VCR

Audio signals, summed and distributed
Two channel audio BEP

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-12-5 Inputs (contd)
5-12-5-4 Serial Ports

Table 5-45 Serial Ports

USB Standard USB Serial Bus BEPM - Top console
USB Standard USB Serial Bus BEPM - IEIO
Ethernet Standard Ethernet BEPM - IEIO
RS232 Standard RS232 Serial Bus BEPM COM1 - IEIO
RS232 Standard RS232 Serial Bus BEPM COM2 - IEIO
RS232 Standard RS232 Serial Bus PC2IO - Spare (J16)
RS232 Standard RS232 Serial Bus PC2IO - VCR (J16)
RS232 PC2IO - Color printer (Connector J16)
RS232 PC2IO UPS (Connector J16)
5-12-5-5 Control Signals

Table 5-46 Control Signals

Control signals Spare MBD/FEC (Connector J16)
Control signals Spare MBD/FEC (Connector J16)
Trace trigger To EIO PC2IO (Connector J16)

Fan control signals To AC Power MBD (Connector J16)
Power control
To MBD and AC Power PC2IO (Connector J16)
signals
Top Console ON/OFF Switch and EIO
Power on/off To Relay
Test (Connector J16)
Standby To Top Console PC2IO (Connector J16)

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-12-6 Outputs
5-12-6-1 DC Voltage
Table 5-47 DC Output Voltages
Output Description Connection to

+5 VDC
From BEP
+12 VDC
+5 VDC,
-15 VDC, From Card Rack Spare (Connector J21)
-5 VDC analog
+5 VDC
From BEP
+12 VDC
+5 VDC,
-15 VDC, From Card Rack Not Used
-5 VDC analog
+5 VDC,
From Card Rack Not Used
+15 VDC,
+12 VDC From BEP

Top Console
+15 VDC From Card Rack
+5 VDC
From BEP
+12 VDC
+5 VDC,
EIO
+15 VDC,
From Card Rack
-5 VDC analog
+6 VDC analog
5-12-6-2 AUDIO
Table 5-48 Audio Outputs
Output Description Connection to

Top Console speakers and BEP
Audio (two
Audio (Doppler sound) from MBD (IMP), VCR, BEP VCR and IEIO
channels)
5-12-6-3 Connectors Solder Side

Table 5-49 Connectors, Solder side

A12/J21 Spare power, 15pins D-sub, female
A13/J20 Spare power, 15pins D-sub, female
A14/J24 AC power ctrl, 9pins D-sub, female
Rotation adapter signals, 15pins

A15/P23
D-sub, male
A16/P22 Spare signals, 25pins D-sub, female
P30 EIO signals and power, 110pins male

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-12-6 Outputs (contd)
5-12-6-4 Interface Connectors Component Side

Table 5-50 Connectors, Component Side

A1/J1 B&W printer, 15pins HD-sub, female.
A2/P4 VCR remote ctrl RS232: 9pins D-sub, male.
A3/P5 Color printer - RS232: 9pins D-sub, male.
A4/J2 Top Console - Power & signals: 15pins D-sub, female.
A5/P4 Top Console - Signals: 15pins D-sub, male.
A6/J6 Audio out to VCR, left: Phono jack.
A7/J7 Audio out to VCR, right: Phono jack.
A8/J8 Audio in from VCR, left: Phono jack.
A9/J9 Audio in from VCR, right
A10/J10 SVHS out to VCR

A11/J11 SVHS in from VCR
B1/J12 USB to Top console
B2/J13 USB to external I/O

B3/J14 Ethernet
B4/J15 Audio I/O
B5/J16 PC2IO signals
B6/J17 PC2IO power

B7/P18 COM1
B8/P19 COM2
B9/P25 UPS remote control

J32 MBD signals and power

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-13
Top Console
The Top Console includes a Stand By/On switch, a keyboard, different controls for manipulating the
picture quality, and controls for use in Measure & Analyze (M&A).
Figure 5-37 Top Console
BT03 Consoles added a USB connector to the Upper Op Panel for the Wired Voice Scan Option. This
connection should only be used for Wired Voice Scan.
Figure 5-38 BT03 Top Console

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-14
Monitor
17-inch High Resolution Monitor with no interlace scan includes loudspeakers for stereo sound output
(used during Doppler scanning).
Figure 5-39 Monitors: CRT (top), 17 LCD option (left), 19 LCD (right)
5-64 Section 5-14 - Monitor

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-15
External I/O
The External I/O is the interface between the scanner and all external items.
Right Side
of Scanner
External I/O
Figure 5-40 External I/O

On the rear of the scanner, above the power inlet and power breaker.
5-15-2 Input Signals
Input Description Connection from/via/to

Footswitch is a mechanical switch that connect a signal to
Footswitch Footswitch > External I/O > Internal I/O
ground.
Connector > PC2IO (BEP)
Internal level is TTL (0-3.3V)
DC Voltages from BEP
+5 VDC PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External

Used for Optical Couplers on RS232 signals
+12 VDC I/O
DC Voltages from Card Rack
+5 VDC
+15 VDC
-5 VDC analog Used for Optical Couplers on Footswitch
Card Rack > Internal I/O > External I/O
+6 VDC analog

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-15-3 Bi-directional Signals

Ethernet - External I/O - Internal I/O -
Ethernet Standard 10/100 Base TX Ethernet
BEP (Ethernet Connector)
Serial RS-232 port (Can be configured to transfer report External Device - External I/O - Internal
COM1
page data to an external processor) I/O - BEP (COM1)
USB Device - External I/O - Internal I/O
USB Standard USB (Universal Serial Bus), (0-5V)
- BEP (USB #2))
Analog Phone Line - External I/O

Modem Internal Modem Telephone Line Connection (Connector Panel) - External I/O (Rear
Side)- Modem
Serial RS-232 port Modem - External I/O

COM2
(on rear side of External I/O) (Rear Side) - Internal I/O - BEP (COM1)
Burn-in Power Burn-in Power On/Off Control (on rear side of External I/O)
External I/O (Rear Side) - Internal I/O
On/Off Control - Used for factory testing.
Connection to
Internal I/O Board
SVGA OUT
USB
EXTERNAL I/O
PWB S-Video OUT
C-Video OUT
BW Video OUT
10/100Base-TX
Burn In
Power
ON/OFF
Control Audio (R)
Audio (L)
To MODEM
External I/O
RS232 (COM1:)
Upper PWB
TRIGGER
FOOTSWITCH
EXPOSE #1
Modem Phone EXPOSE #2
Connection
MODEM
EXTERNAL I/O
Module
Figure 5-41 External I/O
5-66 Section 5-15 - External I/O

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-15-4 Output Signals

Audio Source (Internal
Stereo audio to external VCR. (Same signal as delivered to
Stereo Audio VCR/Microphone/BEP) > Internal
internal VCR).
I/O > External I/O > External VCR.
External composite video, 1.0Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced, PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External
Composite Video
sync negative. I/O > External Composite Video Device
Super Video
Super Video PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External
Luminance: 1.0Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced.
(SVHS) I/O > External VCR
Color: 1.0Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced.
Black and White External black and white video PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External
video 1.0Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced, sync negative. I/O > External B/W Video Device
Trig Trigger Signal, 0-3.3V
PCIDG/DG VIC > PC2IO (BEP) >

SVGA (RGBS) high resolution video output
SVGA Internal I/O > External I/O > External
(Same signal as sent to the systems monitor) Monitor
PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External

Remote Expose #1 A SW controllable relay, to control external peripherals
I/O > External Peripheral
PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External
Remote Expose #2 A SW controllable relay, to control external peripherals
I/O > External Peripheral
Several signal are fed from the Internal I/O board to an External I/O board located on the rear of the
system. This board contains data buffers and a galvanic isolation section.
Different types of signals are fed to connectors accessible on the External I/O.
R, G, B and Sync are provided for external RGB monitors or printers.

Composite video, black and white video and S-VHS video are buffered and fed to output connectors
for external monitors and printers.
Two serial RS-232 ports are provided for external communication with e.g. the System CPU.
An Ethernet signal from the BEP is fed to an Ethernet connector. It is used for connectivity, including
DICOM Network.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-16
Peripherals
A DVR or VCR, an analog or digital Black-and-White Video Printer, and an analog or digital Color Printer
may be installed on the scanner. These devices receive video signals from the Internal I/O Board and
power from the AC Control Box.
Peripherals are generally specified and approved regionally.
BT02 (BEP 2.1 and above) systems have digital peripheral capabilities through USB or USB To SCSI
converters.
5-68 Section 5-16 - Peripherals

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-17
Modem and USB Modem
5-17-1 General Description
Multi-Tech global modem. The modem is a standard modem that connects to an analog phone line for
InSite capabilities.
A USB Modem was introduced at BT04. The USB modem does not require external power, and has no
serial connection as it plugs directly into the back of the BEP.
BT07 and later do not support the modem.
Global Modem
Figure 5-42 Modem: Location in Unit
5-17-3 Inputs/Outputs (non-USB Modem)

DC Voltage from Modem Power (AC/DC Converter)
RS232 from Backend Processor via Internal I/O and External I/O
Analog Phone line via External I/O
5-17-4 Fuses
None
5-17-5 Jumpers and Dip-switches

None

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-17-6 LEDs (non-USB Modem)

The Modem has 10 LEDs on its front.
TDRD CD 56 3314OHTRECFX
Figure 5-43 LEDs on Modems Front Panel
Table 5-54 LEDs on Modem
LED Color Description Normally State
- Red TD (Transmit Data) Flashes during use.
- Red RD (Receive Data) Flashes during use.
ON when detecting a carrier from another modem and during

- Red CD (Carrier Detect) communication.
OFF indicates no or broken connection.
- Red 56 (56K Mode) During Power On: Briefly Flashing

These LEDs indicates communication speeds above 14 kbs. If
- Red 33 (V.34 Mode) one of this LEDs are ON during communication, it will stay ON
until the modem is reset or connected the next time.
- Red 14 (V.32bis Mode) At speeds below 14 kbs, these LEDs are OFF.
ON when dialing, online, or answering a call

- Red OH (Off hook) Flashes if puls dialing
Off when modem not in use
ON when the system initializes the modem. It indicates that the

modem is ready for an outgoing or incoming call.
- Red TR (Terminal Ready) OFF indicates that communication on the RS232 (COM) port
has been broken. The connected (remote) modem will
disconnect.
ON: Error Correction (V42) is turned ON

- Red EC (Error Correction (V.42)) Blinking: Compression turned ON
OFF: Normal operation.
- Red FX (Fax) Always OFF
5-70 Section 5-17 - Modem and USB Modem

GE H
EALTHCARE
Section 5-18
L9 POWER DISTRIBUTION DIAGRAM (AC & DC)

Note :
070C5080
Replaced by 3 lead cable
Reserved for Wireless Mic To Color Printer (FC200571) and Y cable
Power Distribution
AC CONTROL BOX
Inrush current limiter 070C5080 (5112631) for BT'04 and
Peripheral voltage
selector
later systems.
To VCR
220-240V 100-120V
070C5080
Main CB
Note :
Main AC Power In 2286301 To B/W Printer BT'04 and later systems, the
P8
F1 To main monitor modem is USB attached and
DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14
For 100-120V, connect to 120V

P5 pin1-4. RC delay
does not require AC power.
AC
For 220-240V, Modem
FB200802-4 Adapter
connect to P5 pin 3-6.
P7 F2
XFMR BOX AC Detect
To peripherals
P5 12V D2
FB200804 120/230V
BEP 5V FB200798
RPWONN
RPWISON
FB200802-1 DGVIC
P6
120VAC_ A P9 &DGIO
120VAC_ B F3 To optional modem
20VAC 220V 070D2802
FB200803 12V USB1
P10 FB200802-3 BEP 5V 5V
Power 3.3V
Located under BEP F4 To BEP -12V
220V Supply 5V_stndby
FB200802-2
P11
F5 I960 RPWONN = Rack Power on
To FE card rack Minus lead has a
220V
20A fuse
PC2IP RPWISON = Rack Power is on
24V Battery Pack C22
PS_ON_L(RPWONN)
for BEP UPS For BEP Power on/off
P100
P101 FANOUT_L 12v signal path see
PCI Video
Sec 5-4-14 (on)
Voltage feedback fan Sec 5-4-15 (off)
speed control coming Motherboard
from EBM
Main Monitor Fan Assembly

FB200580
Line Filter
INTERNAL I/O FRONT END CARD RACK
120VAC FB200795 A14 PS_ON_L(RPWONN) Front
X R T T T T T T T T E S End
A4 BEP_12V
D F D D D D D D D D B C Power
RACK_15V I 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 M B Supply
(FEPS)
Figure 5-44 Overall Power Distribution

15V Audio A5 F
J31
USB USB Power_OK
HUB 12V 5VPA, 5VNA (Analog)
A12 RACK_15V
3.3V 3.3V
BEP_5V
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

INVERTER Main Cable FB200320 5VP, 3.3VP (Digital)
A13
5V 5V BEP_5V RPWISON 12VP (Digital)
INVERTER
LCD
12V PHVP (120V)
Display J10 P30 BEP_12V
EXTERNAL I/O BEP_5V
OP Panel 15VP
RACK_15V
12V comes from BEP RACK_5V
RACK_-5V J32
15V comes from FEPS +/- 100V Arrows indicate
RACK_3V3 which boards use
B1 B6 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 this voltage.
All voltages and
EBM generates +/- 100V
1/18/10
Power_OK signal
To Probe +/- 100V from 12VP from EBM are generated in
Bias On older systems the for test the FEPS except
(via XDIF) EQ provides: point only as noted.
-100V (from 12VP) on FEPS
+100V (from 120V)
CHAPTER5.FM
5-71
LOGIQ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-18-1 AC Power Distribution Overview

The AC Powers main tasks are to supply the various internal subsystems with AC power and to
galvanically isolate the scanner from the on site Mains Power System. To reduce inrush current, an
inrush current limiter as well as an EMI filter. Voltage to peripherals can be configured to either 115 VAC
or 230 VAC. The AC Power also controls and supplies the 20VAC needed by the systems cooling fan.
5-18-2 AC Power PWB
AC DISTRIBUTION PWB TO OUTLET

TRANSFORMER BOX AC INLET BOX
INRUSH
230Vac
LIMIT
115Vac
Cable #27
L Mains
230Vac switch
20Vac
230 115
TO PERIPHERIALS (115 or 230 Vac)
TO MONITOR (115 Vac)
Cable #13 TO MODEM (230 Vac)
Fan
TO PC (230 Vac)
regulator
TO CARD RACK (230 Vac)

CABLES INTERNAL IN AC CONTROL MODULE #27
TO A14 ON INTERNAL I/O

POWER SUPPLY ON, Cable #7
FAN SPEED CONTROL
M
Figure 5-45 AC Power Distribution
The mains cord has plugs in both ends. A female plug connects to the scanner and a male plug to the
mains outlet on site.
The mains voltage is routed via an EMI filter to the Mains Switch, located on the rear of the system.
The Mains Switch is of the auto fuse type, if for some reason the current grows to high, the switch will
automatically break the power.
From the Mains Switch, the AC power is routed via an Inrush Current Limiter (titled: Inrush Limiter in
Figure 5-45) to a internal outlet connector for the Mains Transformer.
The Transformer is the galvanic barrier between the rest of the scanner and the on site AC Mains.
5-72 Section 5-18 - Power Distribution

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-18-2 AC Power PWB (contd)

Input voltage to the transformer can be either 230VAC or 115 VAC (two different part numbers/FRUs).
The configuration of the plug on the cable to the AC Transformer is different for the two AC Voltages.
From the AC Transformer, there are three outlets;
20 VAC
115 VAC
230 VAC
The 20 VAC is routed via the fan regulator to the system fan. (See separate description, Chapter 5 - Air
Flow Control).
The 115 VAC is routed via a fuse to an AC Voltage selector, used for selecting the right output voltage
for the Peripherals outlet and the Monitor. (The alternative voltage to this outlet is 230 VAC.)
The 230 VAC output from the Transformer is routed via a fuse and distributed to the AC Voltage selector
for the Peripherals outlet and to the following AC outlets:
Modem
Back End Processor
Card Rack
Figure 5-46 Connectors on Back of AC Controller

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-18-3 AC Controller Differences
Figure 5-47 Original AC Controller Functions
5-74 Section 5-18 - Power Distribution

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-18-3 AC Controller Differences (contd)
AC Controller FC200403/FC200404
Figure 5-48 AC Controller FC 200403/FC200404

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-19
Mechanical Descriptions
5-19-1 Monitor
5-19-1-1 Standard
Tilt: 10 forwards and backwards.
Swivel: 90 rotation.
5-19-2 Top Console Positioning
Figure 5-49 Top Console Positioning
Vertical Access: The control panel offers 27 inches (200 mm) of vertical adjustment.
Horizontal Access: The control panel offers 45 of horizontal adjustment when the Z-arm is
released.
5-76 Section 5-19 - Mechanical Descriptions

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-19-2-1 17 LCD (Option)

Tilt Adjustable Monitor: Tilt Angle: Up 10, Down 90
Range of Movement: Up 89mm, Down 211mm
Left and Right from center: max 855mm
Monitor Arm Neck: plus or minus 90
Monitor Arm Rotary: plus or minus 150
Monitor Neck Swivel: plus or minus 90
CAUTION To avoid injury or damage, make sure nothing is within the range of motion before moving the
monitor and monitor arm. This includes both objects and people.
Pay attention to the monitor arm position to avoid hitting it against anyone or anything.
Figure 5-50 LCD Monitor - Positioning (17 LCD shown)
5-19-2-2 19 LCD
Side to side 33cm ( 15in)
Tilt/Rotate Adjustable Monitor
Tilt Angle: Up 20, Down 90
Rotate Angle: 90 right, 90 left
Fold-down and lock mechanism for transportation
CAUTION To avoid injury or damage, make sure nothing is within the range of motion before moving the
monitor and monitor arm. This includes both objects and people.
Pay attention to the monitor arm position to avoid hitting it against anyone or anything.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-19-3 Wheels/Brakes
Check that the brakes and direction locks function as described below.
Table 5-55 Brakes and Direction Lock Instructions
Step Task Expected Result(s)

To engage the brakes in full lock
To release the brake
To engage swivel lock.

You may need to move the system around a
little to get the wheels to lock into the locked
direction.
To release swivel lock
NOTE: The swivel lock and brake cannot be engaged (pressed down) at the same time since pressing the main
brake releases the swivel lock and pressing the swivel lock releases the main brake. Therefore, if the
swivel lock is engaged you need to press the main brake pedal (#2) twice to lock the scanner from
rolling. Once will release the swivel lock and once again will engage the main brake in full lock as stated
in step 1.
5-78 Section 5-19 - Mechanical Descriptions

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-20
Air Flow Control
5-20-1 Air Flow Distribution
The fan at the rear of the scanner draws air into the scanner, through the foam filter, and pushes it
through a flange that moves the air into a cavity on top of the card rack.
Air holes in the bottom of this cavity allow the air to move down through the card rack. Air exits the card
rack through holes on its internal side panel into the interior of the scanner near the rear of the Backend
Processor.
The internal fan in the Backend processor draws the air into the PC allowing it to pass through the
interior of the PC, and exit the lower front area of the scanner.
Section 5-21
Service Platform
5-21-1 Introduction
The Service Platform contains a set of software modules that are common to all ultrasound and
cardiology systems containing a PC backend. This web-enabled technology provides linkage to
e-Services, e-Commerce, and the iCenter, making GEs scanners more e-enabled than ever. The
Service Platform will increase service productivity and reduce training and service costs.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-21-2 Global Service User Interface (GSUI)
5-21-2-1 Internationalization
The user interface provided by the service platform is designed for GE personnel and as such is in
English only. There is no multi-lingual capability built into the Service Interface.
5-21-2-2 Service Login

Select the wrench icon in the status bar at the bottom of the scan display screen. This icon links the user
to the service login screen.
NOTE: In R4.x.x and after, the wrench icon has been removed from the upper display. To access the
Service Platform, click on Utility, then select Service.
Figure 5-51 Login Screen for Global Service User Interface
5-21-2-3 Access / Security

The service interface has different access and security user levels. Each user is only granted access to
the tools that are authorized for their use.
NOTE: OnLine Center access to the scanner requires a password and they must have Disruptive permission
and customer input to run diagnostics.
Table 5-56 Service Login User Levels
User Level Access Authorization Password

Operator uls
Authorized access to specified diagnostics, error logs and utilities. Same
Administrator uls
acquisition diagnostic tests as GE Service.
External Service gogems
Every access request, whether successful or not, will be logged into a service access log that is
viewable to authorized users.
5-80 Section 5-21 - Service Platform

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-21-3 Service Home Page

The navigation bar at the top of the Customer Service Home Page screen allows the user to select from
several tools and utilities.
Figure 5-52 Customer Service Home Page

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-21-4 Error Logs Tab

From the Error Logs Tab the Log Viewer displays four categories with pull-down sub-menus and an Exit
selection. The Service Interface allows scanner logs to be viewed by all service users.
NOTE: Beginning with R4.x application software, some of the Log Viewer screens are different than
those shown in this section. However, the basic functionality has not changed. Also, some
additional navigational features have been added, such as Last Page and Get Page.
The Filter Error log is keyed to GE Service login access permissions and is not available to customer
level analysis.
NOTE: Beginning with R4.x application software, filtering has been removed and all users have the
same access to the logs.
The log entries are color-coded to identify the error level severity at a glance.
Table 5-57 Log Entry Key
Severity Error Level Color Code

1 Information Green
2 Warning Blue
3 Error Red
The Service Interface supports the transfer of these logs to local destinations such as the MOD,
CD-Rom or DVD drive.
Figure 5-53 Log Viewer / Logs / Log Entries

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-21-4-1 Logs
The eight sub-menus of the Logs category are System, Power, Infomatics, Temperature, Probe, Board,
DICOM, and UPS Power.
NOTE: Figure 5-53 provides a graphical example of the log entries for the System Logs.
Log table headings for the different logs are as follows:
System
Log entry headings include Time Stamp, Error Level, Package, and Error Message, and
TouchPanel keystrokes (BT06).
Power
Log entry headings include Time Stamp, Error Level, Analog_5V, DC_5V, DC_3.3V, Pos_15V,
Analog_12V, Pos_HV, Neg_5V, Pos_100V, Neg_100V.
NOTE: For systems running R2.x and R3.x application software, the log entry headings include Time
Stamp, Error Level, Package, and Error Message.
NOTE: In R4.x application software, the Power log present in R2.x and R3.x application software was
renamed UPS Power as described below.
NOTE: All readings in the Power log are in mV. Readings for analog voltages will vary depending on
whether the system has an FEPS2.x or FEPS3.x. It is normal for the Pos_HV, Pos_100V, and
Neg_100V to read 0. Readings for these voltages are not captured in this log. To check these
voltages, run the Power Supply diagnostic.
Infomatics
Log entry headings include TimeStamp, Revision, PtID, PtDOB, PtSex, PtWeight, PtHeight,
ExamID, ExamCategory, ExamCurDate, ExamStartTime, ExamEndTime, ActiveScanTime,
FreezeTime, TimeOfImageArchived, AccessionNumber, RefPhyName, ReadingPhyName,
Operator, RoomNo, BodyPatternSelected, InstitutionName, ActiveModeTime, CalculationMade,
CalculationTime, HelpUsage, ProductName, SystemSWRev, NoOfSWModules,
SystemPowerOnTime, SystemIdleTime, NoOfBoards, ProbeChangedDate, ProbeChangedTime,
ProbeChangedStatus, NoOfProbeSlots, NoOfProbes, ProbeID, ProbeSerialNumber, and
ActiveExamProbes.
Temperature
Log entry headings include Time Stamp, Error Level, Package, Upper FEC Sensor, and Lower FEC
Sensor.
NOTE: In R4.x application software, the log entry headings include Time Stamp, Error Level, Package,
Average, TD0, TD1, TD2, TD3, TD4, TD5, TD6, TD7, EQOut, EQIn, and RFI.
Probe
Log entry headings include Time Stamp, Error Level, Package, Error Message, Severity, Revision,
and three (3) new labels that have not yet been named.
Board
Log entry headings include Time Stamp, Error Level, Package, Board, Severity, and two (2) new
labels that have yet been named.
DICOM
Log entry headings include Time Stamp, Error Level, Package, and Error Message.
UPS Power
Log entry headings include Time Stamp, Error Level, Package, and Error Message.
NOTE: This log was called Power in R2.x and R3.x application software.
1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-21-4-2 Utilities
The two sub-menus of the Utilities category are Plot Log, and Plot Page.
Plot Log Plot Page
Figure 5-54 Utilities Sub-Menus
Plot Log
Allows for the color coded plot of all Log contents with the package on the x axis and incident count
on the y axis.
Plot Page
Allows for the color coded plot of all Page contents with the package on the x axis and incident
count on the y axis.
5-21-4-3 Search
On the Text Search sub-menu of the Search category, users enter case-sensitive text they wish to find.
This filter field works well for filtering the Sys log file for the word fail.
Figure 5-55 Search Sub-Menu

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-21-4-4 Exit
The sub-menu, Exit Log Viewer, returns the user to the Service Desktop home page.
Figure 5-56 Exit Log Sub-Menu

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-21-5 Diagnostics
Detailed Diagnostic information is found in Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting.
NOTE: After performing any diagnostics, detach probes and reboot the system.
Figure 5-57 User Diagnostic Page
5-21-5-1 Diagnostics Execution

Diagnostic tests are executable by both local and remote users. The Service Platform provides top-level
diagnostic selection based on the users level and login access permissions. Remote access will require
disruptive diagnostic permissions to run Acquisition diagnostics.
5-21-5-2 Diagnostic Reports

Diagnostic tests return a report to the Service Platform. The platform retains the report and allows for
future viewing of the diagnostic logs.

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-21-6 Image Quality

The Image Quality page is intended to contain tools for troubleshooting image quality issues.
FIELD IS NOT YET POPULATED

Figure 5-58 Image Quality Page
5-21-7 Calibration
The Calibration page is intended to contain the tools used to calibrate the system.

Figure 5-59 Calibration Page

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-21-8 Configuration
The Configuration page is intended to be used to setup various configuration files on the system.
The Service Platform is the access and authorization control for remote access to the configuration
subsystem.
The enable/disable of software options can be done from this Configuration page.
Starting with BT07 and later, this page contains the remote connectivity setup for InSite ExC.
Figure 5-60 Configuration Page

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-21-9 Utilities
The Utilities page contains several miscellaneous tools such as System Shutdown, the Image Viewer
Utility, and the iLinq Configuration Utility.
Figure 5-61 Customer Utilities Page
5-21-10 Replacement
The Replacement page is intended to contain tools used to track replacement parts used in the system.

Figure 5-62 Part Replacement Page

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-21-11 Planned Maintenance (PM)

The PM page is intended to contain the tools used in periodic maintenance of the system.

Figure 5-63 Planned Maintenance Page

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-22
4D Option
Beginning with BT04 (Application Software R4.X.X), the LOGIQ 9 can be configured to perform 4D
scans.
5-22-1 Principle of Volume Acquisition

The underlying principle for 3D volume acquisition and reconstruction is the formation of an image
composed of multiple 2D scans at known elevation positions.
Central 2D-Scan
Start 2D_Scann
Range of VOL-Sweep
Figure 5-64 Volume Acquisition
The acquisition of volume data sets is performed by 2D scans with special transducers designed for 2D
scans, 3D sweeps, and real time 4D scans. These transducers have imbedded motors that control the
movement and positioning of the acoustic stack. The motor control box generates signals that
determine the direction and speed that the stack is driven. The motor controller also generates signals
sent to the Scan Control Board (routed through the internal IO) that are used for 3D image
reconstruction.
NOTE: The fan on the motor control box is thermostatically controlled. Hence, the fan will only run when
necessary. You should note that the fan activates after a fairly short period of use of a 3D/4D
probe.
NOTE: There are no LED indicators on the motor controller to aid in determining the presence/absence
of AC power to the box.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-22-2 4D Block Diagram
Figure 5-65 4D BLock Diagram
5-22-2-1 Motor Controller to Front Bracket Cable and 4D Probe Cable

The connection between the motor control box and the front bulkhead is a 15 pin sub-D (at the motor
controller) and a LEMO (at the bulkhead).
Table 5-58 maps the conversion from 15 pin sub-D to 7 pin Lemo.
Table 5-58 Motor Controller to Bracket Cable (2375551) and 4D Probe Cable (2384183) Pin
Conversions
Lemo on Probe Lemo on Probe

Signal Sub D 15 Pin on MC Lemo on L9 (12 pin) Cable, 12 Pin Cable, 7 Pin
GND 7 4 4 1
SIN_DRV 1 8 8 2
SIN_RTN 2 7 7 3
ACTIVE 14 2 2 4
COS_RTN 4 5 5 5
COS_DRV 3 6 6 6
HALL1 5 3 3 7
5-92 Section 5-22 - 4D Option

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
5-22-2 4D Block Diagram (contd)

.
8 1
6 1
12 2
7 9
2 7
5 3
6 11 10
3
4 5 4
Pin Diagram of 7 pin Lemo connector Pin Diagram of 12 pin Lemo connector
on the small end of the 4D Probe Cable on the large end of the 4D Probe Cable.
1 8
12
2 9
7
10 11
3 6
4
5
Pin Diagram of 12 pin Lemo connector on the L9 for the Motor Controller to Front Bracket Cable.
Figure 5-66 Pin Diagrams

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM

The pinout of the motor controller to the front bracket requires a 15 pin SUB-D female Connector (MC4)
with the following pinout:
Table 5-59 15-pin SUB-D Pinout for Motor Controller to Front Bracket Cable
PIN Signal name In/Out Description Characteristics
1 SIN_DRV_1 Out Sin1 Motor Drive Line 12 28 V 1,5 A rms
SIN_RTN_1/ Sin1 Motor Return Line /

In/ Out 12 28 V 1,5 A rms
2 SIN_DRV_3 Sin3 Motor Drive Line
10
3 COS_DRV_1 Out Cos1 Motor Drive Line 12 28 V 1,5 A rms
11
4 COS_RTN_1 In Cos1 Motor Return Line 12 28 V 1,5 A rms
12
5 HALL1 In Null puls detector 5V TTL level
13 STRA1 In Strobo generator sign.1 5V TTL level
6 STRB1 In Strobo generator sign.2 5V TTL level
Pull down resistor in Mot-Ctrl_Box

Out Indicates that the Mot-Ctrl-Box is with 100 Ohm to GND
ACTIVE
connected to the selected probe. Signal low = Mot-Ctrl-Box is
14 connected to sel. probe
7 GND
15 Reserved_1 IN Reserved Input 5V TTL level
8 + 5V Out Output + 5V low power
M1 GND Screw of the housing
5-22-2-2 USB to Motor Controller Cable and Power Cable

The connection between the motor control box and the PC backend requires a standard USB
compatible 5 pin USB female connector(MC2) with following pin out:
Table 5-60 USB to Motor Controller Cable and Power Cable Pin Out
1 VCC IN Power
2 DM Data minus USB 2.0 Compatible
3 DP Data plus USB 2.0 Compatible
4 GND
5 SHELL
5-94 Section 5-22 - 4D Option

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM

The LOGIQ 9 3D/4D motor control box also includes a power supply with connection to the L9 110 VAC
power distribution (MC1).
5-22-2-3 Motor Controller to Internal I/O Cable

A 9 pin SUB-D connection to the L9 Internal IO(MC3) requires the pin out as shown below.
Table 5-61 Motor Controller to Internal I/O Cable Pin Out
1 VOL_TR Out Sig. f. volume start 3,3V TTL level
6 FRAME_TR Out Sig. f. frame start 3,3V TTL level
2 DIRECTION Out indicate probe direction 3,3V TTL level
Pull down resistor in mot-Ctrl_Box

Indicate cable connection to with 100 Ohm to GND
CONN_2 Out
Mot-Ctrl-Box Signal low = Mot_Ctrl_Box is
5 connected to L9 system
7 GND
3 GND
8 NC Not connected
3,3V TTL level

RESET IN RESET for Hardware
4 signal is low active
9 NC Not connected

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-23
Continuous Wave Doppler Option
Beginning with BT04 (Application Software R4.X.X), the LOGIQ 9 can be configured to perform
Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler scans.
The parts needed to perform Continuous Wave Doppler scans include:
PCI CW Doppler PWA card

Internal CW Doppler Cable
5 mHz or 8 mHz probe
Mu Metal Shield
5-23-1 Continuous Wave Doppler Signal Flow

The signal path for the CW probes is somewhat different from other LOGIQ 9 probes. The signal-path
from the probe does not pass through the card rack, it transitions directly from the probe to the back of
the BEP. The following block diagram depicts the functional elements of the PCI CW Doppler Card in
the BEP.
Tx Gain
2
Transmitter
LIMO
Connector
PCI Bus
Prog.
2 Probe I.D.
Controller Block PCI I/F
Buffer
2 16
Receiver A/D
Local
Oscillator
Sampling Rate
Rx Gain
Figure 5-67 PCI CW Doppler PWA Block Diagram
In very simplified terms, the PCI CW Doppler PWA card generates the CW signal and sends it out C34
on the back of the BEP. The internal CW Doppler Cable transfers the signal from the BEP to the CW
Probe via a LEMO connector. The probe transmits the signal into the patient and receives the echo
back. The CW Doppler Board amplifies the received signal then sends it via the PCI Interface to PCI
Bus and on to the monitor.
5-96 Section 5-23 - Continuous Wave Doppler Option

GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-24
PCI CW Doppler PWA card
The CW Doppler has a local controller that configures transmit and receive paths. The controller
performs all required signal processing in order to produce 16 bit signed integer I/Q data path.
The CW Doppler transmitter output power is controlled in 1 Volt increments. The output power is
adjustable continuously without stopping data collection.
The receiver gain is controlled between 0 and 100% max. gain and allows for 55 dB of gain and is
programmable without stopping data collection.
The CW Doppler has a PCI interface that acts as a bus master. An interrupt is generated via the PCI
Interface to the Host PC when the defined number of data samples has been acquired in the Block
Buffer. The contents of the Block Buffer is DMA'd into Host PC memory.
5-24-1 Internal CW Doppler Cable

The internal CW Doppler Cable connects between the PCI CW Doppler PWA to a LEMO brand
connector on the LOGIQ9 chassis. The Probe cable has the following pin assignments:
P1 J1 Conductor Signal
1 2 Coax Center, red jacket DOPIN
2 3 Coax shield, Red jacket. DOPIN GND
4 5 W3 ID0
6 6 Coax center, wht jacket PCW

5 7 Coax shield, Wht jacket. PCW GND
3 8 W5 ID1
10 W1,W2 shield
Shell HW1 W1,W2 shield
5-24-2 Probe Connector

The two probes connect to the system via a LEMO connector: FFA.3S.310.CLAC11. with pin
connections provided below. A Resistor, R1, must be installed as an identifier for the probe type:
5 MHz - 75 K ohm
8 MHz - 25 K ohm
Lemo Conductor Signal

2 Coax Center, red jacket DOPIN
3 Coax shield, Red jacket. DOPIN GND

5 R1-2 ID0
6 Coax center, wht jacket PCW
7 Coax shield, Wht jacket. PCW GND

8 R1-1 ID1
10 Outer shield
Shell Outer shield

1/18/10
CHAPTER5.FM
GE H EALTHCARE
5-24-3 Mu Metal Shield

Mu metal shield is used to block flux field from the L9 isolation transformer mounted below the BEP.
5-98 Section 5-24 - PCI CW Doppler PWA card

P R E L I M I N A R Y 1/18/10
CHAPTER6.FM
GE HEALTHCARE
Chapter 6
Service Adjustments
Section 6-1
Overview
This chapter describes how to test and adjust the mechanical capabilities of a scanner that may be out
of specification. Although some tests may be optional they should only be performed by qualified
personnel.

6-1 Overview 6-1
6-2 Regulatory 6-1
6-3 Monitor 6-2
6-4 Panel Calibration 6-8
6-5 Z-Release Cable and Gas Spring Adjustment 6-8
6-6 Brake Arm Adjustment 6-13
6-7 Brake Adjustment 6-15

Operate this unit only when all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. The
covers are required for safe operation, good system performance and cooling purposes.

TAG
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
Section 6-2
Regulatory
Verify, where applicable, that any regulatory information or tests required by national law are present
and accounted for, and any regulatory tests required by national law are performed and documented.
Chapter 6 Service Adjustments 6-1

P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER6.FM
Section 6-3
Monitor
Contrast, brightness and degauss are adjusted using the three (3) keys located on the front of the
monitor just below the screen.
DECREASE MENU INCREASE

Figure 6-1 Monitor Adjustment Switches: CRT (left), 17 LCD option (center), and 19 LCD (right)
6-3-1 Monitor Adjustment (Standard only)
6-3-1-1 Degauss
Degaussing refers to the process of removing magnetic-field effects from the monitor. Operation of the
monitor within a magnetic field may adversely effect color purity. Degaussing can be used to correct this
problem.
To activate the manual degauss:
1.) Press either the <<< or >>> monitor adjustment button while the brightness/contrast adjustment
indicator is not displayed on the monitor. To cancel the manual degauss, press the <<< or >>>
adjustment button again.
2.) Press the toggle button for brightness and contrast.
3.) Press either the <<< or >>> monitor adjustment.
NOTE: The monitor automatically degausses at power on.

P R E L I M I N A R Y 1/18/10
CHAPTER6.FM
GE HEALTHCARE
6-3-1-2 Brightness and Contrast
Table 6-2 Brightness and Contrast - Standard
Room Condition Contrast Brightness
Dark Room for Radiology/Cardiology 85 35
Dim Room for Radiology/Cardiology 90 55
Bright Room 100 100
To calibrate CRT brightness and contrast, go to Utility -> Test Patterns -> Brightness Calibration. The
screen display will change as shown in Figure 6-2 on page 6-3 .
Record any changes to the final brightness and contrast settings and leave this information with the
system. Generally speaking, do not change the controls once they have been set. Once set, the display
then becomes the reference for the hard copy device(s).
Follow the instructions on the screen. Press the menu button (middle) to adjust the Contrast to 50. Press
the menu button again and adjust the Brightness to 100. Decrease the Brightness setting until the inner
gray is the same shade as the black box that surrounds it. This brightness setting should range between
35 to 55.
Final adjustment relies on customer approval. Cameras and printers may need to be adjusted to match
any monitor changes.
Figure 6-2 Monitor Brightness/Contrast Calibration Test Pattern - Standard

P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER6.FM
6-3-1-3 Visible Image Display Adjustment

If you get a monitor where the image is smaller than the physical CRT displayed area, in other words
the image does not fill the screen, you can adjust the size of the visible image display:
1.) Press and HOLD the center button "brightness/contrast (icons)" for about 10 seconds or so, you'll
then see an expanded menu. This will allow you to adjust parameters like Color, Size/Center,
Geometry, etc. and Utility.
NOTE: It is recommended that only the image size be adjusted as required and not anything else.
2.) Press the Left or Right Arrow buttons to highlight Size/Center then Press the Center button.
3.) Use the Center button to select H-Position, H-Size, V-Position or V-Size.
4.) Use the Left or Right Arrows to adjust H-Position, H-Size, V-Position or V-Size parameters.
5.) When complete use the Center button to select Exit and press the Left or Right arrow buttons
6.) Use the Left or Right Arrow buttons to select Exit and press the Center button to exit the main menu.
6-3-2 Monitor Tilt (Standard)

The monitor is capable of a full 10 forward and backward tilt. Although the default setting of the tilt
tension on the monitor should be adequate to tilt the monitor for your viewing preference, it can be easily
adjusted.
The monitor chassis is attached to the monitor mount plate that has a shaft that inserts into the top plate
of the scanner. This feature allows the monitor to swivel without need for adjustment.
The monitor mount plate has two points for adjustment.
6-3-2-1 Monitor Tilt Adjustment Procedure

Passing through the monitor mount plate on its underside is a large bolt, with a locking nut on its left
side, that provides the tension for monitor tilt. Adjust the tilt tension by loosening or tightening the locking
nut on this bolt.
NOTE: The right side of this bolt will receive an Allen wrench to provide resistance when loosening and
tightening the locking nut.
6-3-2-2 Monitor Counter-balance Adjustment Procedure

At the back of the monitor mount plate is a nut securing a bolt passing through the shaft. This bolt has
a tapered end and several spring washers that when seated into the cylinder provides a proper counter-
balance for the monitor.
6-3-2-3 Tools
Phillips screwdriver
Open-ended wrenches
6-3-2-4 Manpower
1 person, 1 hour + travel or
2 people, 1 hour + travel if the monitor needs to be removed.

P R E L I M I N A R Y 1/18/10
CHAPTER6.FM
GE HEALTHCARE
6-3-2-5 Procedure
1.) Raise the Control Panel to a height that allows you to work underneath the monitor.
2.) Remove the eight (8) Phillips screws holding the Under Shelf Cover to the Shelf Cover Assembly.
3.) Remove four (4) Phillips screws holding the monitor Rear Cover Assembly to the monitor chassis.
4.) You now have access the monitor tilt and counter-balance adjustments. Adjust accordingly.
5.) Install the monitor rear cover assembly to the monitor chassis.
6.) Position the shelf cover assembly and secure it in place with the Under Shelf Cover and the eight
Phillips screws.
Monitor Mount Plate
Tilt Adjustment Bolt Counter-balance Adjustment Bolt
Figure 6-3 Monitor Tilt Tension Adjustment

P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER6.FM
6-3-3 Monitor Adjustment (17 LCD Option Only)
Table 6-3 Brightness and Contrast - 17 LCD
Dark Room for Radiology/Cardiology
Bright Room 100 100
NOTE: On the 17 LCD monitor, the brightness adjustment comes before contrast.
6-3-3-2 Angularity Test Pattern

An Angularity test pattern has been added for the LCD. This test pattern serves as a learning tool for
you to become familiar with the effect moving the LCD has on the image.
Pixel test patterns have also been added: Blue/Yellow (B/Y and Y/B), Cyan/Red (C/R and R/C), Green/
Magenta (G/M and M/G) and Black/White (K/W and W/K). Pixel patterns should appear to be a uniform
color rectangle. If an area of the screen appears to have a dark or light grouping of pixels, first clean the
screen to ensure that gel or dust is not causing an optical defect.
Figure 6-4 Angularity Viewing Test Pattern - 17 LCD
6-3-3-3 Color Settings
Table 6-4 Color Settings - 17 LCD
Temperature Gamma Saturation Hue
15000K 2.6 0 0

P R E L I M I N A R Y 1/18/10
CHAPTER6.FM
GE HEALTHCARE
6-3-4 Monitor Adjustment (19 LCD Only)
Table 6-5 Brightness and Contrast - 19 LCD
Dark Room for Radiology/Cardiology
Bright Room 100 100
NOTE: On the 19 LCD monitor, the brightness adjustment comes before contrast.
6-3-4-2 Angularity Test Pattern

An Angularity test pattern has been added for the LCD. This test pattern serves as a learning tool for
you to become familiar with the effect moving the LCD has on the image.
Pixel test patterns have also been added: Blue/Yellow (B/Y and Y/B), Cyan/Red (C/R and R/C), Green/
Magenta (G/M and M/G) and Black/White (K/W and W/K). Pixel patterns should appear to be a uniform
color rectangle. If an area of the screen appears to have a dark or light grouping of pixels, first clean the
screen to ensure that gel or dust is not causing an optical defect.
Figure 6-5 Angularity Viewing Test Pattern - 19LCD
6-3-4-3 Color Settings
Table 6-6 Color Settings - 19 LCD
Temperature Gamma Saturation Hue
13000K 2.2 0 0

P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER6.FM
Section 6-4
Panel Calibration
The Touch Panel Adjustment/Calibration procedure can be found in Section 7-6-1-1 Calibration
Utilities on page 7-23.
Section 6-5
Z-Release Cable and Gas Spring Adjustment
The operator panel can move up and down (Z direction). A gas spring in the scanner provides a counter
force to "balance" the weight of the operator panel and allows for positioning with minimal effort. A lever
on the main handle has a cable (similar to a bicycle cable) that provides the release for the gas spring.
This cable has one end attached to the release lever and the other end attached to the mechanism on
the gas spring piston.
6-5-1 Time Required

Approximately 1 person for 1 hour plus travel.
6-5-2 Tools
10mm open-end wrench
Two (2) small slotted screwdrivers
Needle-nose pliers
Small ruler
Large slotted screwdriver
3mm Allen wrench
6-5-3 Preparations
DANGER DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT IN THIS EQUIPMENT. COMPLETELY
POWER OFF AND SHUTDOWN THE SCANNER BEFORE SERVICING.
1.) Power Off / Shutdown the scanner.
6-8 Section 6-4 - Panel Calibration

P R E L I M I N A R Y 1/18/10
CHAPTER6.FM
GE HEALTHCARE
6-5-4 Z-Release Cable Adjustment
CAUTION Before making any adjustments, check the Z-release system to determine what adjustments
need to be made.
6-5-4-1 Checking the Release System

1.) Squeeze the Z-release lever and move the operator panel to its highest position. If this is not
possible, perform the necessary steps in Emergency Release Procedure on page 6-12.
2.) Place a small ruler next to the Z-release lever as shown in the Figure 6-6 below.
3.) Gently wiggle the Z-release lever and measure the amount of play in the lever.
4.) If this amount is 3mm or more, there is too much play in the cable. Perform the steps in the section
Z-Release Cable Adjustment on page 6-9 to reduce the amount of play in the cable.
5.) Attempt to lower the operator panel by pushing down on it. The operator panel should not move.
While continuing to push down, slowly squeeze the Z-release lever.
6.) Note the position of the Z-release lever when the operator panel starts to move. It should be 1/4 to
2/3 of the levers range of motion.
Z-Release Lever
Figure 6-6 Z-Release Measurement

P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER6.FM
6-5-4-2 Cable Adjustment

1.) From underneath the handle use a 10mm open-end (small ignition style) wrench to screw in the
cable adjustment screw to tighten the Z-release cable.
2.) If you cannot remove enough of the play in the cable using this adjustment, see Cable Adjustment
at Gas Spring on page 6-10
Underside of Z-Release Lever

Underside of Screw Head Z-Release Cable
Halfway Between Casting
and Un-squeezed Lever Cable Adjustment Screw
Figure 6-7 Z-Release Cable Adjustment Screw
6-5-5 Cable Adjustment at Gas Spring
6-5-5-1 Preparations
1.) If not already performed, Power Off / Shutdown the scanner.
2.) Remove the right- and left-side covers of the scanner .
3.) Remove the front cover of the scanner .
4.) Remove the black-and-white printer.
5.) Remove the VCR.
NOTE: The height of the printer and VCR make them difficult to remove without first removing the front cover.
6-10 Section 6-5 - Z-Release Cable and Gas Spring Adjustment

P R E L I M I N A R Y 1/18/10
CHAPTER6.FM
GE HEALTHCARE
6-5-5-2 Procedure
NOTE: The operator panel must be at or near its highest position.
1.) From underneath the handle use a 10mm open-end (small ignition style) wrench to screw out the
cable adjustment screw so the underside of the screw head is about half way between the casting
and the unsqueezed lever. See Figure 6-7 on page 6-10 .
2.) There is a Wire Clamp nestled in the Forked Retainer. Refer to Figure 6-8. Using 2 slotted
screwdrivers (one on each side of the clamp) loosen the clamp.
Cable End
Wire Clamp
Forked Retainer
Figure 6-8 Gas Spring Mechanism
3.) Using needle nose pliers, hold the cable end which is above the clamp and pull upward to take up
any cable slack.
4.) Using one of the two slotted screwdrivers, push the Clamp down along the cable so that it is nestled
back in the Forked Retainer.
WARNING Do NOT attempt to pinch together or pry apart the forked retainer. If one of the tines
should break off, the gas spring piston may have to be replaced at the factory.
5.) Tighten the clamp with one screwdriver to hold the cable. Let go of the pliers and then use the two
screwdrivers to fully tighten the clamp.
6.) Without squeezing the release lever, check that the forked retainer is in its fully up position.
7.) Squeeze the release lever and watch the forked retainer move down immediately as the lever is
squeezed, there should be very little play in the cable. Small amounts of play can be taken up (or
slackened) with the cable adjustment screw per step 1.

P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER6.FM
6-5-6 Emergency Release Procedure
When the operator panel is at or near its highest position it is possible to see the gas spring mechanism
with the Black and White Printer or the VCR removed. If the operator panel is stuck in the down position,
it is not possible to see the gas spring mechanism as it is down behind the card rack. To avoid removing
the Card Rack to make adjustments, try this procedure to raise the operator panel.
1.) Using 3mm Allen Wrench, remove the shoulder bolt holding the release lever on the handle.
2.) Tilt the release lever down and pull on the cable as shown in the figure below. This will give
unlimited travel and hopefully release the gas spring. Push up on the operator panel while you are
pulling on the cable.
CAUTION Do NOT use excessive force!
Figure 6-9 Release Lever
3.) If you have no cable to pull (cable broken) or you are unable to release the gas spring in this
manner, you must remove the Card Rack to gain access to the gas spring mechanism.
6-5-7 Procedure Completion

1.) Install the VCR.
2.) Install the Black-and-White printer.
3.) Replace the front cover .
4.) Replace the side covers.
5.) If required, Power On / Bootup the scanner.
6-12 Section 6-5 - Z-Release Cable and Gas Spring Adjustment

P R E L I M I N A R Y 1/18/10
CHAPTER6.FM
GE HEALTHCARE
Section 6-6
Brake Arm Adjustment
Adjustments to the brake arm may be necessary if the pedals do not depress readily nor engage so the
front wheels lock in place and do not swivel.
6-6-1 Tools
Flat-head screwdriver
6-6-2 Manpower
One person, 1 hour + travel
6-6-3 Preparations
1.) Remove the front bumper.
TOP VIEW
Front Brake Arm

Swivel Lock Pedal / Adjustment Nuts
Brake Pedal Release
Brake Pedal /
Swivel Lock Release
Brake Arm
Adjustment Rod
Figure 6-10 Brake Adjustment

P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER6.FM
6-6-4 Brake Arm Adjustment Procedure

To adjust the brake arm it is recommended to separate both front adjustment nuts from the brake
assembly.
Adjustment Nuts
Retaining Nuts
Brake Clamp Screwdriver

Brake Assembly
Figure 6-11 Front Adjustment Hardware
2.) Remove the brake clamps that are inserted through a small hole in the front adjustment nuts and
slipped over the nut at its collar.
3.) Loosen the front retaining nuts to allow room for adjustments.
4.) With a screwdriver you can pry the front adjustment nuts away from their connectors in the brake
assembly.
5.) Set the main brake - the brake assembly should be pulled to the left.
6.) Seat the right adjustment rod into the right adjustment nut under the right front wheel as far as it will
go.
7.) Seat the right front adjustment nut onto the adjustment rod as far as it will go.
8.) In order to insure that the same length of adjustment rod is seated into the two adjustment nuts you
will turn the adjustment rod one turn out of the rear adjustment nut under the front wheel and turn
the front adjustment nut off the adjustment rod a similar turn.
9.) Repeat this alternating rotation until the front adjustment nut lines up easily with the connector in
the brake assembly.
10.)Push the adjustment nut onto the brake assembly connector and secure the retaining nut tight
against the adjustment nut.
NOTE: Repeat the same procedure to adjust the swivel lock. The only difference would be to set the swivel lock
prior to the adjustments.
6-6-5 Procedure Completion

1.) Install the front bumper.
6-14 Section 6-6 - Brake Arm Adjustment

P R E L I M I N A R Y 1/18/10
CHAPTER6.FM
GE HEALTHCARE
Section 6-7
Brake Adjustment
6-7-1 Front Wheel Brakes
Service adjustment to the front brakes involve setting the brake so it will properly bite the rear tire. The
default setting should provide proper braking. If not, follow the procedures below.
6-7-1-1 Tools
Allen Wrenches
6-7-1-2 Manpower
1.) Set the rear brakes to prevent the scanner from rolling.
2.) Remove the front bumper.
6-7-1-4 Front Brake Adjustment Procedure
Adjustment Hole Allen Wrench to Adjust Brake
Wheel Brake
Figure 6-12 Front Brake Adjustment
1.) Refer to Figure 6-12. Use the Allen wrench to add more pressure in order to get more braking
action.
2.) If the brakes are too tight, loosen the adjustment with the Allen wrench.
3.) Check the brakes and readjust as necessary before replacing the front bumper.

P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER6.FM
6-7-2 Rear Wheel Brakes Adjustment

Service adjustment to the rear brakes involves setting the brake so it will properly bite the rear tire.
The default setting should provide proper braking. If not, follow the procedures below to remove the rear
wheel and adjust the brake.
WARNING PRIOR TO ELEVATING SCANNER, VERIFY THAT THE FLOATING KEYBOARD IS

LOCKED IN ITS LOWEST POSITION. VERIFY THAT THE FRONT BRAKE IS LOCKED
AND THE SCANNER IS UNABLE TO SWIVEL. VERIFY THAT THE REAR BRAKES ARE
IN THE LOCKED POSITION.
WARNING USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN ELEVATING SCANNER. ELEVATING SCANNER WILL
MAKE IT UNSTABLE WHICH COULD CAUSE THE SCANNER TO TIP OVER.
6-7-2-1 Tools
Bottle Jack
Allen Wrenches
6-7-2-2 Manpower
1.) Remove the left- and right-side covers.
2.) Remove the upper rear cover.
3.) Remove the lower rear cover.
6-16 Section 6-7 - Brake Adjustment

P R E L I M I N A R Y 1/18/10
CHAPTER6.FM
GE HEALTHCARE
6-7-2 Rear Wheel Brakes Adjustment (contd)
Area on either side 2 screws removed

from top 2 screws removed
of bottom shield used from underside
to elevate scanner and Rear Brake Brake
remove rear wheel. Set / Release
Handle
Figure 6-13 Rear Brake Adjustment
6-7-2-4 Rear Wheel Removal Procedure

4.) Elevate the scanner by placing the bottle jack on the back frame on the side of the bottom shield of
the wheel you will be removing. You can also use a block of wood as a lever to raise the scanner
and place a second block of wood under the chassis to support the rear wheel off of the ground.
5.) Remove the four screws and remove the wheel from the scanner.
6.) Use an allen wrench to adjust the brake so it will properly bite and release the rear tire.
Figure 6-14 Rear Brake Adjustment
6-7-2-5 Rear Wheel Installation Procedure

1.) After adjusting the rear brake, install the rear wheel on the scanner. Hand tighten the four screws.
2.) Carefully lower the scanner and remove the bottle jack.
3.) Tighten the four screws using the weight of the scanner to provide resistance.
4.) Verify brake and scanner operation then replace all covers previously removed.

P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER6.FM
6-18 Section 6-7 - Brake Adjustment

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER7.FM
Chapter 7
Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
Section 7-1
Overview
This section describes how to setup and run the tools and software that help maintain image quality and
system operation. Basic host, system, and board level diagnostics are run whenever power is applied.
Some Service Tools may be run at the application level.

7-1 Overview 7-1
7-2 Service Safety Considerations 7-2
7-3 Gathering Trouble Data 7-3
7-4 Screen Captures 7-13
7-5 Diagnostics 7-18
7-6 Acquisition Diagnostics 7-19
7-7 I/O Devices 7-24
7-8 Common Diagnostics 7-30
7-9 Utilities 7-33
Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-1

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER7.FM
Section 7-2
Service Safety Considerations

ADJUSTING.
7-2 Section 7-2 - Service Safety Considerations

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER7.FM
Section 7-3
Gathering Trouble Data
7-3-1 Overview
There may be a time when it would be advantageous to capture trouble images and system data (logs)
for acquisition through remote diagnostics (InSite) or to be sent back to the manufacturer for analysis.
There are different options to acquire this data that would give different results.
7-3-2 Collecting Vital System Information

The following information is necessary in order to properly analyze data or images being reported as a
malfunction or being returned to the manufacturer:
- Product Name = LOGIQ 9
From the Utility>System>About screen:
Applications Software
- Software Version
- Software Part Number
System Base Image Software
- Base Image Revision

- Image Part Number

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER7.FM
7-3-3 Collecting a Trouble Image with Logs

If the system malfunctions, press the Alt-D keys simultaneously. This Alt-D function is available at all
times, and collects a screen capture of the image monitor, user-defined presets, and the following logs:
Keyboard Shadow Log

Error Logs
Crash Log
Vital Product Data
DICOM Logs (Beginning with R3.x.x S/W)
Windows Event Logs (Beginning with R4.x.x S/W)
Windows Modem Log (Beginning with R4.x.x S/W)
Diagnostic Logs (Beginning with R4.x.x S/W)
Service Logs (Beginning with R4.x.x S/W)
NOTE: Power Supply and Temperature logs are not currently being updated by the LOGIQ 9.
Example of R2.x.x screen Example of R3.x.x and after screen
Figure 7-1 ALT+D Dialog Box
When Alt+D is pressed, a menu box opens. Enter the following information:
System ID serial number.

Software version.
Date and time of occurrence.
Sequence of events leading to issue.
Is the issue repeatable?
Imaging mode, probe, preset/application.
Media brand, speed, capacity, type.
Save secondary image capture, cine loop, 4D multi-volume loop.
- A choice to store to a pre-formatted MOD (H: drive), CD-RW, USB memory stick, or to the
Export directory D: drive (for remote viewing through InSite).
7-4 Section 7-3 - Gathering Trouble Data

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER7.FM
7-3-3 Collecting a Trouble Image with Logs (contd)

NOTE: Restart the application before resuming clinical scanning.
NOTE: The USB memory stick option is only available in R4.0.x and after. To save to a USB memory
stick you must insert the stick in the lower front of the console , prior to starting Alt-D, then the
memory stick will appear as a destination. Do not attach the memory stick in the Wired
Microphone port on the control panel.
NOTE: You MUST select H: or CD-RW as the destination device, otherwise the data is written to the
default Export directory on the hard drive. The EXPORT directory is only used for InSite. It is
not intended for FEs or Customer use; therefore, choose the H: drive which is the MOD or
choose the CD-RW.
NOTE: NOTE: If writing to a CD be sure that it is preformatted.
The subsequent file is compressed and time stamped. The screen capture is a bitmap which eliminates
the possibility of artifacts from compression.
Double check the CD or MOD that you made to ensure it contains at least two files. An example is
shown in Figure 7-2.
Figure 7-2 Example of Zipped Trouble Image & Logs File

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER7.FM
7-3-4 Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer

A sniffer monitors network traffic and allows you to capture network data without redirecting or altering it.
1.) Access the Windows Desktop using the service dongleFrom the Start menu, select Programs >
Distinct > Network Monitor.
The Distinct Network Monitor screen opens (Figure 7-3).
Figure 7-3 Distinct Network Monitor screen
2.) On the Distinct Network Monitor Screen (Figure 7-3), select CONFIGURE.
The Configuration screen opens.
Figure 7-4 Configuration screen

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER7.FM
7-3-4 Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer (contd)

NOTE: Steps 3 - 9 describe how to filter the data so that you only record this systems network activity.
If you prefer, you may skip the filter section and start the data capture now. If you do, you will
capture all network activity, not just this systems.
3.) On the Configuration screen (Figure 7-5), select the Filters tab > New Filter.
Confirm built-in templates is selected, and select CREATE.
The Select Filter Task screen opens (Figure 7-6).
.
Figure 7-5 Configuration - Filters tab
Figure 7-6 Select Filter Task screen

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER7.FM

4.) On the Select Filter Task screen (Figure 7-6), select Show only IP packets FROM/TO one or more
IP addresses, then select NEXT.
The Enter Filter Settings screen opens (Figure 7-7).
Figure 7-7 Enter Filter Settings
5.) On the Enter Filter Settings screen, enter the IP address you wish to monitor, and click the ADD
button (Figure 7-7). Repeat this step for all IP addresses you wish to add, then select FINISH.
The Enter Filter Settings screen closes.
6.) On the Configuration Screen, select the Capture Tab (Figure 7-8).

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER7.FM

7.) In the Filter to Apply field, select My Computer.
Figure 7-8 Capture Tab on Configuration Screen
8.) Select CLOSE.

The Configuration screen closes.
9.) On the Distinct Network Monitor Screen, select Capture > Packets and Statistics (Play).
NOTE: The Network Sniffer will now collect data until you select Capture > Stop.
10.)Double-click on the Go Mushashi icon to start the system application.

11.)Perform the DICOM transaction you want to troubleshoot (such as Worklist Query, Send to PACS,
etc.).
Perform the function several times to ensure the data is captured in the sniff.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER7.FM

12.)When the transaction finishes (or fails), select Ctrl+Alt+Del to open Task Manager.
On BT07 systems and later, select Exit to close the application and return to Windows. Then open
Windows Task Manager to open the Distinct Network Monitor screen.
Figure 7-9 Capture Tab on Configuration Screen
13.)From the Task Manager Applications tab, select Distinct, and then select the Switch To button.
The Distinct Network Monitor screen opens.

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER7.FM

14.)On the Distinct Network Monitor screen (Figure 7-3), select Capture > Stop.
After stopping the data collection, a screen similar to Figure 7-10 opens.
Figure 7-10 Capture Data sample
15.)Select File > Save As. Enter the file name D:\log\Sniffer\MyLog .
16.)Select SAVE.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER7.FM

17.)On the Save As Capture File Dialog (Figure 7-11), select SAVE.
Figure 7-11 Save As Capture File
18.)Check the D:\log\Sniffer directory. At a minimum, there should be the following two files:
MyLog.cap, MyLog.num.
19.)Copy the files to media, or ask the OLC to upload the files if the system has remote connectivity.

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER7.FM
Section 7-4
Screen Captures
There may be times when the customer or field engineer will want to capture a presentation on the
screen so it may be recovered by the OnLine Center through InSite. This is accomplished by first saving
the image(s) to the clipboard using a Print Key.
The P4 key is the factory default print key to accomplish a secondary screen capture. However, the
default is for the video area only or the customer may have customized the P4 Key function. Therefore,
screen capture should involve the following steps:
1.) Check and record any custom settings for the Print4 button.
2.) Set the Print4 button to Whole Screen, Secondary Capture.
3.) Capture the required screens to the Hard Drive, MOD, CD-R, DVD-R or USB Memory Stick.
4.) Restore the Print4 button to its original settings.
7-4-1 Check and Record the P4 Key Function

Check the function of the Print 4 Key in the event that the customer may have made some custom
settings.
1.) Select Utility from the Touch Panel.

2.) Select Connectivity from the Utilities Menu.
3.) Select the Buttons tab on the Connectivity screen.
4.) In the Button field, select Print4.
The Connectivity/Buttons Screen will be displayed like the one shown in Figure 7-12 on page 7-13 .
Figure 7-12 Buttons Set Up Screen

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER7.FM
7-4-1 Check and Record the P4 Key Function (contd)

P4 is the factory default Screen Capture Key. If it is not set to Whole Screen or Screen Capture, as
shown in Figure 7-12, proceed to step 5 to record the customers custom settings.
5.) In the Destinations section, record the service that is displayed. The destinations list displays
the following information:
* Name: user defined during service configuration
* Type: the type of service
* Server: the device for which the service was configured
* Dir: direction: output, input, or both (I+O)
6.) In the Image generated section, record the parameters related to the service.
7-4-2 Setting the P4 Key to Screen Capture

If the P4 Key is not set to screen capture:
1.) While on the Connectivity screen, with the Buttons tab displayed, go to the drop down selection
menu in the Destinations section.
2.) From the drop down menu select CopyToWflow_01>Image to Buffer>MyComputer>Out.
3.) Ensure that the Image generated section for capture Area is set to Whole Screen, secondary
Capture and No Image Compression.
4.) The P4 Key should now be set up for whole screen capture, sending the screens to the image
buffer (clipboard).
7-14 Section 7-4 - Screen Captures

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER7.FM
7-4-3 Capturing a Screen

The following is a generic process to capture any screen from the scanner:
1.) Navigate to and display the image/screen to be captured.

2.) Press P4. This will place a snapshot of the screen on the clipboard displayed at the bottom
of the scan image display.
Clipboard Menu
Thumbnails
Figure 7-13 Select Image to Capture
3.) Select SCAN from the touch panel to view the image screen and the snapshots displayed on
the bottom.
4.) Highlight the snapshot to be stored to the system hard drive, MOD or CD-R.
5.) Select Menu on the right side of the image screen, then highlight and select SAVE AS.
Save As
Figure 7-14 Menu > Save As

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER7.FM
7-4-3 Capturing a Screen (contd)
Figure 7-15 Save Dialog Box
6.) A Save dialog box will be opened. Choose d:\export folder as the archive location to save the
image on the hard disk, MOD or CD-R.
7-4-4 Reset the P4 Key to Customers Functionality

If the customer had programmed the P4 Key to a function other than screen capture, restore that
functionality recorded in 7-4-1 on page 7-13. Refer to Figure 7-12.
1.) Select Utility from the Touch Panel.

2.) Select Connectivity from the Utilities Menu.
3.) Select the Buttons tab on the Connectivity screen.
4.) In the Button field, select Print4.
5.) In the Destinations section, select the service(s) recorded in step 5, Section 7-4-1. The
destinations list displays the following information:
* Name: user defined during service configuration
* Type: the type of service
* Server: the device for which the service was configured
* Dir: direction: output, input, or both (I+O)
NOTE: Only output services can be associated to the print keys.
6.) In the Image generated section, select the parameters related to the service recorded in
step 6, Section 7-4-1.
7-16 Section 7-4 - Screen Captures

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER7.FM
7-4-5 Ctrl-PrintScreen Shortcut

Starting with R4.x.x software, a Ctrl-PrintScreen shortcut is available for quickly capturing the image
displayed on the system. Images captured using this shortcut are saved in the D:\export directory using
both the JPEG (.jpg) and raw DICOM (.dcm) formats.
7-4-5-1 To Capture a Screen Image Using the Shortcut

1.) With the desired image displayed on the screen, press Ctrl and PrtSc keys simultaneously.
2.) From the touchpanel, select Utilities -> Service -> Scanner Utilities -> Image, Compress, and Delete
Utilities.
3.) Enter a checkmark in the checkbox next to the image(s) to save in the D:\export directory.
4.) Select Compress File.
A compressed file of the images is stored in d:\export. You may rely on the date and time of the
Ctrl+PrtSc procedure to identify the most recent image recorded. The uncompressed files are
stored in d:\export\service\image.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER7.FM
Section 7-5
Diagnostics
NOTE: Detach probes and reboot system after performing any diagnostics.
As described in Chapter 5 - Components and Functions (Theory), the service platform uses a web-
based user interface (UI) to provide access to common service components.
The Diagnostic home page displays a listing of test categories consisting of Acquisition Diagnostics,
I/O Devices and Common Diagnostics. Expand the desired main category to select groups or individual
tests.
Figure 7-16 Global Service User Interface Diagnostic Screen
7-18 Section 7-5 - Diagnostics

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER7.FM
Section 7-6
Acquisition Diagnostics
Acquisition Diagnostics is one of three main headings under the GSUI Diagnostics Tab.
Figure 7-17 Customer Acquisition Diagnostics
Individual selections run diagnostics and return status information identifying any problems.
When you select a test to run, the display changes as shown.
1.) Instructions Frame

- Displays either a test-specific text or the default instructions.
2.) Status Frame
- Initially displays the last known status for a selected diagnostic. Once the diagnostic starts,
the frame displays the current status of all test results.
- The Status Frame also contains the user interface elements used for Diagnostic Control and
Operator Feedback.
3.) Execute Button
- This switch has two modes - each with appropriate text:
- Execute - to start the diagnostic
- Abort - to stop a diagnostic

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER7.FM
Section 7-6 Acquisition Diagnostics (contd)
4.) Loop Count

- This is an editable text field that will only accept numeric values of 4 digits or less. When the
switch is configured as an execute switch and pressed, the loop count field will be queried
to determine the number of times to execute the diagnostic.
5.) Progress Indicator
- Displays a graphical progress indicator for the user.
6.) Short Text Message
- Displays brief messages about the tests progress during execution.
7.) Status Frame Background Color
- Initially gray, the Status Frame background color changes upon completion of a diagnostic to
indicate completion status.
- Code Status Fail = Red
- Code Status Pass = Green
- Code Status neither Pass nor Fail (Example: Aborted) = Gray (default color).
7-20 Section 7-6 - Acquisition Diagnostics

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER7.FM
7-6-1 Diagnostic Listings
Table 7-2 Acquisition Diagnostics and Utility Listing
Diagnostic/Utility Function
SCB PCI Interface Diag Tests the hosts ability to communicate with the SCB via the secondary PCI bus
SCB Memory Diag Tests all of the on-board memory, including registers.
SCB DSP Diag Tests the Scan Sequencers DSP and associated components.
SCB Scan Bus Diag Tests the local Scan Bus and the associated system timing.
SCB Image Port Diag Tests the Image Ports functionality.
BMP PCI Interface Diag Tests the hosts ability to communicate with the BMP via the PCI bus.
BMP Memory Diag Tests all of the on-board memory, including registers.
BMP Signal Path Diag Tests the entire BMP signal path.
Tests the hosts ability to communicate with the registers and memory on the EQ via
EQ PCI Interface Diag
the PCI bus.
EQ Memory Diag Tests all of the on-board memory, including registers.
EQ Signal Path Diag Tests the entire EQ signal path.
TD Memory Diag Tests all of the on-board memory, for all installed TD boards, including registers.
TD Analog Reference Diag Tests the AD_REF and VREF voltages on the TD.
Tests the signal path of every channel from the TD Rigel Transmitter Memories to the
Comprehensive Signal Path Diag
SCB, via both the EQ and the BMP.
TD Access Diag Tests all of the Access Modes utilized for Host/TD communication as well as Channel
RAM to Rigel transfers.
Analog TGC Diag Tests the generation of the analog TGC voltage.
Tests all of the XDIF functionality that is testable without a probe or probe simulator
XDIF Interface Diag
attached to the system, including the IIC communication.
Power Supply Diag Tests the system voltages available on the EQ.
Temperature Diag Tests the temperature of the system, wherever available.
Measures the noise floor of the system. The noise floor will be calculated form IQ data
Noise Floor Diag
received without a signal source.
Loopback Diag Tests the analog front-end of the system.

Acquisition Hardware Information Utility Writes a file for each Acquisition Hardware FRU containing all Vital Product Data.
Transmit Utility - Start
Transmit Utility - Change Channel
Transmit Utility - Stop
Receive Utility - Single Frame Receives signal on one channel at a time.
Receive Utility - 8 Frames
Visual Channel Utility
High Voltage Reset Utility Tests whether all TD boards can detect a high voltage fault.
Set VRF Utility Set the analog VREF to a specified value.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER7.FM
Table 7-2 Acquisition Diagnostics and Utility Listing (Continued)
Diagnostic/Utility Function
Set TGC Utility Set the analog TGC to a specified value.
Probe Select Utility Select a probe connector to be active.
Probe ID Read Utility Read the Probe ID of all installed probes.
Touchscreen Calibration Utility. Calibrates the Touch Screen.
Start Touchscreen Verification Utility. Helps verify the touchscreen calibration.
Front-End Calibration Utility Measures the Front End DC Offset, Gain, and Phase.
System Restart Test system restart
System Shutdown. Tests system shutdown.
OP Panel Interface Tests the OP Panel interface.
System Power Button Test Tests the system Power Button.
IIC PCI-DGVIC Diag Tests the IIC slave devices on the PCI-DGVIC board
IIC IIO Diag Tests the IIC slave devices on the Internal IO board.
IIC EIO Diag Tests the IIC slave devices on the External IO lower board.
IIC EIO Upper Diag Tests the IIC slave devices on the External IO lower board.
PC2IP IIC Troubleshooting Procedure Procedure featured with tests that guides and helps you to troubleshoot PC2IP IIC
Step1 through 5 failures.
Footswitch Test Utility Tests the system Power Button.
PC Diagnostics Interactive tests Tests std PC components (CPU, Hard Drive, Memory, CD/DVD drives) automatically.
PC Diagnostics Non-Interactive tests Tests standard PC components (keyboard, audio, monitor) non- interactively.
NOTE: In R4.x software and after: Front End Calibration Utility has been removed.

ADJUSTING.
7-22 Section 7-6 - Acquisition Diagnostics

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER7.FM
7-6-1-1 Calibration Utilities
Touchscreen Calibration: Follow the directions on the Touchscreen. As each of the cross-hairs
appear, touch them with your finger or a pencil eraser. You MUST hold your finger on the cross-hair
until it moves to the next location. If you just tap the calibration cross-hair, there is a better than average
chance your calibration will be corrupt.
NOTE: Do NOT use sharp, pointed objects to press on the Touchscreen. You should also be careful if
you have long, sharp finger nails. The Touchscreen can be damaged by sharp objects.
After all the cross-hairs are touched the screen is calibrated.
Start/Stop Touchscreen Verification: Select START TOUCHSCREEN VERIFICATION and

EXECUTE. The Start Touchscreen Verification brings up a grid. Each time you touch the screen a small
red dots appears.
To terminate the verification, select STOP TOUCHSCREEN VERIFICATION and EXECUTE.
Front-End Calibration Utility - DC Offset: All probes must be disconnected. Measures the DC offset
of each channel and writes a calibration file for use in zeroing the offset. Application code may utilize
these values to zero each channel's DC offset, by programming the Rigel beam forming ASIC's on TD's.
NOTE: In R4.x and after: Front End Calibration Utility has been removed. Do not run this diagnostic
test in previous versions of software.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER7.FM
Section 7-7
I/O Devices
lThe Operator Panel functionality can be tested using a program (GE Test App) available through the
Service Platform.
7-7-0-1 Launching the Op Panel Test

1.) Log onto the Service Platform, and select the Diagnostics tab.
2.) Locate the Op Panel Test under I/O Devices > Op Panel Utilities > Op Panel Interface.
3.) Select Start to launch the GE Test App.
An hour glass displays on the Service Platform window. The GE Test App window is hidden behind
the Service Platform window.
4.) When the hour glass displays, minimize the Service Platform window to reveal the GE Test App
window. See Figure 7-18.
a.) To minimize, move the cursor to the - minus icon at upper right hand corner of the window.
b.) Press the Set key.
Figure 7-18 Select System Type
5.) On the Startup tab, select the Attach button to connect the Op Panel to the test interface. The other
buttons on the Startup tab will now be active. See Figure 7-19.
7-24 Section 7-7 - I/O Devices

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER7.FM
7-6-1 Diagnostic Listings (contd)
Attach Button Active Detach and Other Buttons Active
Figure 7-19 Attach and GE Test App Startup Tab
6.) Select the tabs to test the various features of the Op Panel.
7-7-1 Trackball Tab

Test the trackball functionality by moving the pointer over the blue box. See Figure 7-20. Verify that the
X and Y position are updated as the pointer is moved.
Test the Left and Right select buttons by pressing each button on the op panel. Verify that the
corresponding button is highlighted when each button is pressed. See Figure 7-20.
Figure 7-20 Trackball Tab

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER7.FM
7-7-2 Keyboard Tab

Test the keyboard functionality by typing on the keyboard. Verify that the corresponding key is
highlighted when each key is pressed. See Figure 7-21.
NOTE: The keyboard test does not give an indication when the Print Screen button is pressed.
Figure 7-21 Keyboard Tab
7-7-3 Slidepots Tab

Test the slidepot (TGC) functionality by moving each slidepot through its range. See Figure 7-22. Verify
that the visual and numeric position of the slide pot are updated as the slide pot is moved.
Test the LED for each slide pot by pressing on the LED buttons. See Figure 7-22. Visually verify the
LED functionality on the upper operator panel.
Figure 7-22 Slidepots Tab

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER7.FM
7-7-4 Encoders Tab

Test the encoder functionality by rotating each encoder knob. See Figure 7-23. Verify that the position
is updated as the encoder is moved.
Test the encoder button selection function by pressing each knob on the op panel. Verify that the
corresponding knob is highlighted when each knob is pressed. See Figure 7-23.
Figure 7-23 Encoders Tab
7-7-5 Pushbuttons Tab

Test the pushbutton functionality by pressing each button on the operator panel. Verify that the
corresponding pushbutton is highlighted when each button is pressed. See Figure 7-24.
Figure 7-24 Pushbuttons Tab

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER7.FM
7-7-6 LEDs Tab

Test the LED functionality by selecting each button or knob on the GE Test App. See Figure 7-25. Verify
that the corresponding LED is illuminated when each button or knob is selected.
Figure 7-25 LEDs Tab
7-7-7 Touchscreen Tab

Test the touchscreen functionality by pressing on the touch screen of the upper operator panel. Verify
that the press is indicated in the black window by a highlighted circle. See Figure 7-26.
Figure 7-26 Touchscreen Tab

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER7.FM
7-7-8 Ending the Program

1.) When you have finished testing the Op Panel, close the GE Test App.
2.) In the Service Platform window, click on the Stop button.
3.) Close the Service Platform window.
4.) Shutdown the system and reboot.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER7.FM
Section 7-8
Common Diagnostics
Common Diagnostics is the second main heading under the GSUI heading of Diagnostics.
Figure 7-27 shows the top level menu choices under Common Diagnostics. The subheadings and their
respective diagnostic/troubleshooting menu choices are called out and described in the sections below.
Figure 7-27 Common Diagnostics
7-8-1 Utilities
Provides two selections:
7-8-1-1 Disruptive Mode

Allows you to enable or disable disruptive mode troubleshooting.
7-8-1-2 System Shutdown

Allows for system shutdown from the diagnostic menu. Select to Restart System or Shutdown System.
Also, select to retain Disruptive Mode or Not.
After submitting to restart or shutdown a confirmation screen gives one last chance to confirm or cancel
the request.
7-30 Section 7-8 - Common Diagnostics

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER7.FM
7-8-2 PC Diagnostics
7-8-2-1 Non-Interactive Tests - BT04 and earlier

CPU Test
Hard Drive Tests
Memory Tests
CD/DVD Drive Tests (BEP3.x only)
Video Test
USB Test
PCI Board Configuration Test
SCSI Device Test (This test normally fails since the Logiq 9 does not have any SCSI device)
AGP Video Card Test (This test is aborted, n/a for L9 BT04 or earlier)
Network Test
7-8-2-2 Non-Interactive Tests - BT06, BT07, BT09

Essential Tests (PCI bus, CMOS memory, CPU, RAM, Hard drive status and Random seek,
Network interface loopback only). It runs some of the tests below.
System board (it tests PCI Bus communication, CMOS memory, CPU, RAM, Parallel Port and
Network Interface loopback only)
Hard disk surface (over an hour, tests Drive status, Random seek, Surface scan test)
Hard disk quick test (takes about 6 min)
PCI Bus
Video card (it takes about 6 min)
Network interface (system needs to be connected to the network)
CMOS
DRAM memory
Parallel port

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER7.FM
7-8-3 PC Diagnostics (Interactive Tests)

Audio Test (not available in BT06, BT07, or BT09)
Keyboard Test
Midi - LOGIQ 9 does not support MIDI channels. If you try and run the MIDI test, the test may fail
(Not available in BT04, BT06, BT07, or BT09)
Monitor Test (not available in BT06, BT07, or BT09)
7-32 Section 7-8 - Common Diagnostics

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER7.FM
Section 7-9
Utilities
7-9-1 Dicom Verify Utility
This utility provides an easy way to verify DICOM connectivity between the scanner and DICOM devices
on the network. See Figure 7-28.
NOTE: To monitor possible network issues for BT06 and later systems, the Dicom Verify Utility can be
placed in a loop to run continuously until turned off. The BT06 Dicom Verify Utility screen has
a checkbox at the bottom to enable the continuous loop.
Figure 7-28 Dicom Verify Utility - BT04
Figure 7-29 Dicom Verify Utility - BT06 or Later
1.) Enter the AE Title, IP Address, and Port Number for the DICOM device.
2.) Click on the Verify button.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER7.FM
7-9-1 Dicom Verify Utility (contd)

3.) Examine the utility error output. See Figure 7-30 for an example.
Figure 7-30 Example Error Messages
In the event of a hard drive failure, see 7-9-1-1 "Hard Drive Failure" on page 7-34.
7-9-1-1 Hard Drive Failure

The symptoms of hard drive failures are as follows:
The results of hard drive diagnostics may indicate bad sectors on the hard drive.
The system may not boot because of bad sectors on the hard drive.
Attempts to re-image the C: partition may fail because of bad sectors on the C: partition.
The system may not boot and displays blue screen stop errors (dark blue screen with white text -
blue screen of death).
In the event of a hard drive failure, determine whether or not the customer requires recovery of data. If
the customer requires data recovery, collect the following information from the customer:
Customer contact name

Customer contact phone
Customer contact address
What data they require (e.g. studies for a date range or everything)
Whether the customer wants their data on CD or DVD media
Tell the customer GE will attempt to recover as much data as possible. Write a complaint and include
the above information, and do not discard or return the failed hard drive. A member of the Complaint
Handling Unit or the Installed Base team will contact the author of the complaint and provide instructions
for delivery of the failed hard drive to engineering. Engineering will then recover as much data as
possible and send the recovered data directly to the customer.
7-34 Section 7-9 - Utilities

GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
Chapter 8
Replacement Procedures
Section 8-1
Overview
This chapter contains replacement procedures for different modules and their subsystems. Follow all
safety precautions while servicing and repairing this equipment.

8-1 Overview 8-1
8-2 Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 1 8-4
8-3 Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 2 8-7
8-4 Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 3 / BEP 3.5 8-10
8-5 Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 4.x 8-13
8-6 Before Starting a Software Load 8-17
8-7 Image Management Guide 8-18
8-8 Loading Base Image Software - R4.x.x and prior 8-26
8-9 Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x 8-33
8-10 Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later 8-38
8-11 Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior 8-44
8-12 Loading Application Software - R6.x.x 8-49
8-13 Loading Application Software - R7.x.x or Later 8-56
8-14 Generic Application Software - Upgrade Only 8-61
8-15 System Setup 8-65
8-16 Console Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure 8-70
8-17 Release Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure 8-72
8-18 Gas Shock Replacement Procedure 8-74
8-19 Gas Spring Wirecable Replacement Procedure 8-86
8-20 Frog Leg Angle Adjustment 8-92
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-1

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM
8-1-2 Definitions of Left, Right, Front and Back
Left Front Rear Right

Figure 8-1 Console Views
8-2 Section 8-1 - Overview

GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
8-1-3 Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts

Equipment being returned must be clean and free of blood and other infectious substances.
GEHC policy states that body fluids must be properly removed from any part or equipment prior to
shipment. GEHC employees, as well as customers, are responsible for ensuring that parts/equipment
have been properly decontaminated prior to shipment. Under no circumstance should a part or
equipment with visible body fluids be taken or shipped from a clinic or site (for example, body coils or
an ultrasound probe). The purpose of the regulation is to protect employees in the transportation
industry, as well as the people who will receive or open this package.
NOTE: The US Department of Transportation (DOT) has ruled that items that were saturated and/or
dripping with human blood that are now caked with dried blood; or which were used or intended
for use in patient care are regulated medical waste for transportation purposes and must be
transported as a hazardous material.
WARNING When you return the used BEP to your local parts organization, make sure you remove ALL
PATIENT DATA from the hard drive, given that the hard drive is still functional.
In some countries, you may be required to delete all software from the disk before returning the
BEP to the parts warehouse. Follow your local policies.
WARNING Before you dispose of the hard drive, make sure you remove ALL PATIENT DATA from the hard
drive, given that the hard drive is still functional.
hard drive to the parts warehouse. Follow your local policies.
WARNING When you return the used BEP to your local parts organization, make sure you remove ALL
PATIENT DATA from the hard drive, given that the hard drive is still functional.
BEP to the parts warehouse. Follow your local policies.
WARNING Before you dispose of the hard drive, make sure you remove ALL PATIENT DATA from the hard
drive, given that the hard drive is still functional.
hard drive to the parts warehouse. Follow your local policies.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-2
Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 1
8-2-1 Manpower
One person, .5 hour + travel
8-2-2 Tools
8-2-3 Preparations
We anticipate, with the exception of a failure, batteries will only need to be replaced once every three
years.
1.) Power Off / Shutdown the system.

2.) Remove the left-side cover.
8-2-4 Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure

1.) Remove the cover of the Back End Processor.
2.) Remove the four screws from the power supply battery pack cover plate.
3.) Disconnect the battery pack connection wire.
4.) Remove the power supply battery pack from the Back End Processor.
1 2
4
3
Figure 8-2 Removing / Installing the Power Supply Battery Pack
8-4 Section 8-2 - Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 1
GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
8-2-5 Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 1
Heat-shrink holds batteries together

In Line and insulates terminals.
20A Fuse
Label to be
attached to
-
this surface
Battery 1
Spacer
+
seperates
batteries
- Battery 2 +
Compression tape used to
minimize battery pack movement
while installed in chassis
Figure 8-3 Power Supply Battery Pack
1.) Slide the new power supply battery pack into its position in the Back End Processor.
2.) Attach the power supply battery pack cover plate and secure it with the four screws removed .
3.) Apply Power .... turn the system on.
4.) Connect the new battery pack to the power supply connector while power is applied to the Back End
Processor. This will avoid a possible spark while connecting the battery.
power supply without power applied to the Back End Processor. Be careful that this spark does
not damage any equipment or cause any personal injury.
5.) Attach the cover for the Back End Processor removed.
6.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below.
Table 8-2 Functional Tests
Service Manual
Section Functional Test / Diagnostic Test Debrief Script
4-2-3 Standby Mode

Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-2.
4-2-5 Probe/Connectors Usage Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for
use.
Section 4-4 Peripheral Checks

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM
8-2-5 Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 1 (contd)

The UPS batteries will drain slightly when the system is in the OFF condition. The OFF condition is:
8-2-6 Battery Disposal

Please make sure replaced batteries are included in the recycling loop.
GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-3
Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 2
8-3-1 Manpower
One person, 15 minutes + travel
8-3-2 Tools
8-3-3 Preparations
2.) Remove the left-side covers.

2.) Remove the screw from the power supply battery pack cover plate. See Figure 8-4.
Figure 8-4 BEP 2 Power Supply Battery Pack Cover Plate
3.) Tip the power supply battery pack cover plate forward and lift up to remove, refer to Figure 8-5.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM
8-3-4 Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure (contd)
Figure 8-5 BEP 2 Power Supply Battery Pack Cover Plate Tipped Forward
4.) Disconnect the battery pack connection wire.

5.) Remove the power supply battery pack from the Back End Processor.
8-3-5 Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 2

1.) Slide the new power supply battery pack into its position in the Back End Processor.
2.) Attach the power supply battery pack cover plate and secure it with the screw removed .
6.) Replace the left-side cover .
7.) If required, Power On/Boot-up the system .
GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
8-3-5 Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 2 (contd)

Service Manual
4-2-3 Standby Mode

4-2-5 Probe/Connectors Usage Equipment passed all required tests and is ready
for use.


1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-4
Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 3 / BEP 3.5
8-4-1 Manpower
8-4-2 Tools
8-4-3 Preparations

2.) Unplug the sidefan connection. Be careful not to pinch the wires when replacing cover.
Figure 8-6 BEP 3 with cover removed
8-10 Section 8-4 - Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 3 / BEP 3.5
GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
8-4-4 Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure (contd)

3.) Disconnect the battery pack connection wires. See Figure 8-7.
Figure 8-7 Disconnect Battery Pack Connection Wires
4.) Remove the first power supply battery pack from the Back End Processor 3.x. See Figure 8-8.
Figure 8-8 BEP 3.x One Power Supply Battery Pack Removed
5.) Remove the other power supply battery pack from the Back End Processor 3.x. See Figure 8-9.
Figure 8-9 BEP 3.x Both Power Supply Battery Packs Removed

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM
8-4-5 Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 3 / BEP 3.5
1.) Slide the new power supply battery packs into position in the Back End Processor.
5.) Replace the left-side cover
6.) If required, Power On/Boot-up the system
Service Manual
4-2-3 Standby Mode

use.

8-12 Section 8-4 - Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 3 / BEP 3.5
GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-5
Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 4.x
8-5-1 Manpower
8-5-2 Tools
8-5-3 Preparations
8-5-4 Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure - BEP 4.x

1.) Remove the cover from the Back End Processor (BEP) by loosening the thumb screw on the back.
2.) Unplug the side fan.
NOTICE Whenever accessing internal BEP components, ensure the wires are clear. Avoid pinching or
damaging the wires or cables.
Figure 8-10 BEP 4.x

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM
8-5-4 Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure - BEP 4.x (contd)
3.) Disconnect the battery pack connection wires.
Figure 8-11 Battery Pack Connection Wires
4.) Remove the 8 screws holding the battery pack bracket.
Figure 8-12 BEP 4.x
8-14 Section 8-5 - Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 4.x
GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
8-5-4 Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure - BEP 4.x (contd)
5.) Take bracket off.
Figure 8-13 Remove Bracket
6.) Remove the first power supply battery pack from the Back End Processor.
7.) Remove the other power supply battery pack from the Back End Processor.
Figure 8-14 Remove Battery Pack

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM
8-5-5 Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 4.x

1.) Slide the new power supply battery packs into position in the Back End Processor.
2.) Replace the bracket.
5.) Reattach the side fan wires.

6.) Attach the cover for the Back End Processor. Be careful not to pinch the fan wires when replacing
the cover.
7.) Replace the left-side cover.
8.) If required, Power On/Boot-up the system.
Service Manual
4-2-3 Standby Mode

use.

8-16 Section 8-5 - Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 4.x
GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-6
Before Starting a Software Load
8-6-1 Printers
Any customized print settings will be lost when the new base image is loaded prior to R6.x.x. If the
customer has any on board, peripheral, or network printers, any settings they have made in the device
driver, such as Gray Scale Images, will be lost. These printer settings will need to be recorded. Go to
Utilities>System>Peripherals>Printers in order to record the printer settings.
8-6-2 Save Connectivity Settings
8-6-2-1 DICOM TCPIP Settings
NOTE: DICOM Workflows and DICOM Device Configurations are saved when you preform the
User-Defined backup procedure in Section 8-7-3 "User-Defined Backup Protocols" on page
8-22.
If you want to Import exams back on to your system after the software load, you should record any vital
DICOM data before proceeding.
1.) Select Utilities>Connectivity>TCPIP tab and record all information on that tab with particular
attention to:
- The Enable DHCP box should NOT be checked
- Computer Name: ______________________________
- IP-Address: ______/________/_________/_________
- Subnet Mask: ______/________/________/________
- Default Gateway: ______/________/________/________
- Remote Archive IP-Address: ______/________/_________/_________
- Remote Archive Name: ______________________________________
For BT07 and later, service settings can be saved along with the user-defined configuration.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-7
Image Management Guide
8-7-1 Managing Patient Data and Presets
Save to MOD, CD-R or DVD-R any patient data, images, and system presets that have been stored or
configured. Installing the base operating software may delete some patient data, images and system
setups saved on the system.
NOTE: Be sure there are no images in the clipboard or opened exams before reloading base operating
software.
8-7-1-1 Patient Images and Data

EZBackup/Move
Use this to copy both patient data and images for specified patient(s) from LOGIQ 9 to DVD-R,
CD-R or MOD.
Refer to Section 8-7-2 "EZBackup/Move" on page 8-19.
8-7-1-2 Preset Data

User-Defined Backup Protocols
Use this to copy User-Defined presets before doing a base image software load.
Refer to Section 8-7-3 "User-Defined Backup Protocols" on page 8-22.
8-7-1-3 Backup Media

DVD Media Requirements
Only DVD-R. DO NOT use DVD-RW or DVD+R.
CD-ROM Media Requirements
Only use CD-R CD-ROMs, DO NOT use CD-RW CD-ROMs. Also, the CD-R CD-ROM MUST
support 16x writing speed or greater.
CD-ROM Handling Tips
To eject the CD, always press F3. DO NOT press the eject button on the CD-ROM/DVD Drive.
Always finalize the CD-ROM. This allows you to read the CD-ROM on any other PC.
DO NOT finalize the CD if you want to add more images to the CD.
8-18 Section 8-7 - Image Management Guide

GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
8-7-2 EZBackup/Move
EZBackup/Move allows you to manage hard disk space (move images off the hard drive) while
maintaining the patient database on the scanner, as well as to back up the patient database and
images.
1.) Specify the EZBackup/Move setup on the Utility --> System --> Backup/Restore page.
Figure 8-15 Utility > System > Backup/Restore Preset Menu
Table 8-6 EZBackup/Move Preset Parameters

Preset Parameter Description
Reminder Dialog Interval days Specify the number of days after the last backup that you want the system to prompt you to
perform an EZBackup/Move procedure (only for moving images).
Enable Reminder Dialog Select to activate the EZBackup/Move reminder pop-up dialog.
Backup files older than in days The system will backup images older than the number of days specified here. If you enter a
zero (0), then all of the images from today on will be backed up.
Move files after backup Check this box to delete images from the hard drive after the backup.
Media Select media type.

Media capacity for estimate (MB) Specify the capacity of the backup media.
2.) To start the EZBackup/Move procedure, go to the Patient menu and select the EZBackup/Move
button at the lower right-hand position of the Patient list.
The EZBackup/Move Wizard starts.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM
8-7-2 EZBackup/Move (contd)
Figure 8-16 New Patient EZBackup/Move Example
NOTE: EZBackup/Move can take up to 20 minutes (or longer, depending on the size of the backup).
Make sure to schedule this at the same time daily, when no patients are scheduled.
3.) Verify the information on the first page of the EZBackup/Move Wizard, then press Next.
Figure 8-17 EZBackup/Move Wizard, Page 1

GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
8-7-2 EZBackup/Move (contd)

NOTE: You do not need to format the media prior to performing an EZBackup/Move.
NOTE: EZBackup/Move cannot span a single image across two (2) or more media. Therefore, if
EZBackup/Move encounters an image that is greater than the capacity of the media, it skips the
oversized image.
NOTE: EZBackup/Move does not store images to media in sequential order. Instead it maximizes the
most amount of images per media.
4.) Verify the information on the EZBackup/Move Wizard, Page 2.

The backup may span multiple media. This page tells you how many media you need to do this
backup. After you have gathered the media (allow for one extra media, just in case), you are ready
to begin the backup. Press Next.
5.) A pop-up message appears that provides you with the media label. Label the media, then insert the
media. Press OK.
6.) The status menu appears. When the backup/move has been completed, press Next.
NOTE: When/if you need to insert the next media, a message appears providing you with the media
label. Label the media, then insert the next media and press OK.
7.) When the backup is complete, the Backup completed page appears.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM
8-7-3 User-Defined Backup Protocols

1.) Insert the backup media. Format the CD-R or MOD. (DVD-R do not need to be formatted.) Select
the Utility tab on the Measurement Selection Menu. Select Connectivity->Tools. Label the media.
A pop-up menu displays when the formatting is complete, see Figure 8-20.
Figure 8-18 Format MOD/CD-ROM Screen
Figure 8-19 Format MOD/CD-ROM Screen - BT04 and after
2.) Press Ok to continue. Verify that the format was successful.

GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
8-7-3 User-Defined Backup Protocols (contd)
Figure 8-20 Format Successful Pop-up Menu
3.) On the Touch Panel, press Utility.

4.) On the Utility Touch Panel, press System.
5.) On the monitor display, select Backup/Restore.
The Backup/Restore screen opens.
NOTE: If you are not logged in with administrator privileges, the Operator Login window opens. Log on
with administrator privileges.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM
Figure 8-21 Backup Menu- Prior to R4.x.x
Figure 8-22 Backup / Restore Screen - R4.x.x and R6.x.x

GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM

NOTE: The detailed section of this menu decouples the user defined configuration above. This allows
you to selectively restore what you want to restore across multiple machines. Refer to Chapter
16 Customizing Your System in the Basic User Manual for more information.
6.) In the Backup list, select the items you wish to backup.
7.) In the Media field, select MOD, CD or DVD.
8.) Select Backup.
9.) Answer Ok to the following pop-up message as many times as the number of items you are
backing up.
The system performs the backup. As it proceeds, status information is displayed on the
Backup/Restore screen.
Figure 8-23 Back-up Confirmation Message
10.)After the backup is complete, press F3 to eject the media.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-8
Loading Base Image Software - R4.x.x and prior
8-8-1 Preparations
Save Connectivity Settings as described in 8-6-2 on page 8-17.
NOTE: Be sure there are no images in the clipboard or opened exams before reloading base image
software.
NOTE: After a full or partial base image load, be sure to confirm the Windows automatic Daylight
Saving Time feature is turned off (Utility ->System -> General -> Date/Time -> Time Zone tab
-> Automatically Adjust Clock checkbox) and the date and time are set correctly.
NOTE: While it is believed to be unnecessary, it would not hurt to disconnect the system from the
network and remove all transducers.
NOTE: Be sure all printers are connected and turned on. If a printer is plugged in at this time it will
automatically install and you won't have to go back to Windows to install it.
NOTE: If the system has any digital peripherals, be sure that they are turned on.
If the system you are loading software on has a BEP 2, please complete steps 1 - step 5 below. If the
system you are loading software on has a BEP1 or BEP3, proceed to step 2 of 8-8-2 "Base Image Load
Procedure - R4.x.x and prior" on page 8-28.
NOTE: How to differentiate BEPs easily

- If the MOD is 640M it should be BEP1.
- If the MOD is 1.3G it should be BEP2.X.
- There is no MOD on BEP3 and it has two USB ports.
8-8-1-1 To Prepare to Load Base Image

WARNING Risk of electrical shock, system must be turned off and disconnected from power
source. Cord must be controlled at all times. Wait at least 20 seconds for the charge on
the FEPS capacitors to bleed off before handling the power supply board.
8-26 Section 8-8 - Loading Base Image Software - R4.x.x and prior
GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
8-8-1-1 To Prepare to Load Base Image (contd)
2.) Remove the left side cover.

3.) Unplug the microphone input (C11) from the BEP, see Figure 8-24 on page 8-27 .
4.) Wrap the cable end of the plug using electrical tape to isolate it from the BEP.
By disconnecting the microphone input, you eliminate feedback during the software load. This input
may have been unplugged previously, if so, be sure it is wrapped and leave it disconnected.
C11
Audio In
Figure 8-24 BEP2 Cable Identification
5.) Replace the left side cover.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM
8-8-2 Base Image Load Procedure - R4.x.x and prior

WARNING The next steps will destroy ALL data on the Scanner.
1.) Turn on the scanner.

2.) Insert the disk labeled Base System Software Load Image, Disk 1 of 2 into the CD-ROM/DVD
drive.
NOTE: There is only one disk for the BEP 1 Base Image.
NOTE: See Section 9-15 "Software" on page 9-41 to identify the correct Base Image Load CD version
for BEP 2.x or BEP3.
3.) Properly turn off the scanner by momentarily pressing the On / Off switch. Select Shutdown from
the System Exit menu. Wait for the On / Off switch to turn amber.
Figure 8-25 Shutdown Dialog Box
NOTE: If the system exit menu does not appear, press Alt F10.
4.) If the system will not shutdown normally, hold down the Standby Switch until the light turns from
green to amber.
GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
8-8-2 Base Image Load Procedure - R4.x.x and prior (contd)

5.) Turn on the scanner. You will see a message displayed on the Touch Panel screen as shown in
Figure 8-26 on page 8-29 .
Figure 8-26 Base Load Warning Message
Now is your chance to abort the Base Image load or continue.
6.) Press any key to continue. To abort, remove the CD-ROM from the drive and press CTRL-C.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM
Figure 8-27 Base Load Option Screen
The first choice is to load the complete hard drive.
[1] Load the complete disk - All existing data will be lost.
NOTE: APPLICATION SOFTWARE WILL NEED TO BE INSTALLED WHEN THIS PROCEDURE

HAS COMPLETED. ALL PATIENT DATA (IF ANY) WILL BE DESTROYED!
Figure 8-28 Base Load Option 1 Message
Figure 8-28 is the last warning message before the complete base load process begins. Press any key
to continue or abort by pressing CTRL-C.
GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM

The second choice is to load only the bootable portion of the hard drive partition, the C partition. This
is not an option for a new hard drive that has not been previously partitioned for proper LOGIQ 9
operation.
[2] Load the bootable C: partition only - Patient data is NOT lost.
NOTE: DO NOT USE THIS OPTION ON A BRAND NEW SYSTEM. IT IS INTENDED FOR
RECOVERY OF A SYSTEM THAT WILL NOT BOOT UP. APPLICATION SOFTWARE WILL
NEED TO BE INSTALLED WHEN THIS PROCEDURE HAS COMPLETED. ALL PATIENT
DATA IS PRESERVED.
This selection will leave the remaining drive partitions intact.
Table 8-7 LOGIQ 9 Drive Partition and Usage
Drive Partition Usage
C System Files and Applications
D User Define and Presets
E Patient Archive Data
F File Swap Area
Figure 8-29 is the last warning message before the base load process begins. Press any key to continue
or abort by pressing CTRL-C.
The third choice,
[3] Exit to the A:\ prompt. Is intended for manufacturing use only.
This is NOT an option as it is intended for manufacturing use only.
If you select Option 3 by mistake, power off the system. Hold down the On / Off switch until the light
turns amber then turn the system back on.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM

Once you have chosen to continue with Option 1 or Option 2, you will see a screen showing Norton
Ghost. This automatically loads a base set of software onto the hard disk. Let it run to completion
(Approximately 8-10 mins).
7.) When prompted, remove Disk 1 from the CDROM/DVD drive. Insert Disk 2 and press Enter to
continue.
NOTE: There is only one disk for the BEP 1 Base Image.
A message, as shown in Figure 8-30, will be displayed when the process is complete.
Figure 8-30 Base Load Complete
8.) Remove the disk from the CD-ROM/DVD drive.
NOTE: Remove the CD-ROM from the drive; otherwise you will be repeating the Base System
Software Load process when the system boots up.
9.) After removing the CDROM from the drive, press Ctrl+Alt+Delete to reboot the system.
10.)When the system reboots it will automatically log on to start checking hardware. This is a normal
process and should be allowed to run to completion.
NOTE: While the script is running, several windows or dialog boxes will appear on the screen.
At times it may look like the system is unresponsive. Wait for the System Settings
Change dialog box Do You Want to Restart computer now to appear, approximately
3-4 minutes after the desktop is displayed.
NOTE: Prior to the System Settings Change dialog box, Do NOT touch the system during this
process. Activating the keyboard, mouse or front panel could corrupt the installation.
11.)When you get a message to restart Windows, select Yes.

The system will come up and map the drives, then the system will reboot again automatically. After the
second reboot, the system will come up into the Windows mode.
12.)If the customer has a USB (Digital Printer) to be installed, plug it in now. The system is still in
Windows mode and should recognize the printer and install the necessary driver.
NOTE: If the printer is installed while in application mode, excessive CPU time will be consumed and
the system will become very slow to unusable. Shutting down and rebooting will clear the
condition. The printer will function correctly.
13.)Proceed to Section 8-11 "Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior" on page 8-44.
GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-9
Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x
Contact the customer prior to this upgrade to allow them enough lead time to backup the system.
This software upgrade applies to all LOGIQ 9 BT04 systems (as well as systems upgraded to BT04),
software version R4.x.x.
NOTE: Be sure no images are in the clipboard or opened exams before loading base image software.
NOTE: Disconnect the system from the network and remove all transducers from the system.
NOTE: Be sure all USB devices are connected and turned on (except for USB Flash devices). If a
printer is plugged in at this time it is automatically installed and you won't have to go back to
Windows to install it.

2.) Record the systems TCPIP settings (IP Address, Computer Name, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway,
Network Speed) from the Utility --> Connectivity --> TCPIP page. You will add these settings back
to the system in the System Checkout section after the Upgrade has been completed.
3.) Perform a Backup from the Utility --> System --> Backup/Restore page. You need to backup the
Patient Archive, Report Archive, User Defined Configuration, Voice Training, and Service settings.
You will perform a Restore after the Upgrade has been completed.
4.) Confirm that all patient data has been archived. If not, perform the archive.
WARNING The next steps will destroy ALL data on the Scanner
5.) Insert the disk labeled Base System Software Load Image, into the CDROM/DVD drive.
NOTE: See Section 9-15 "Software" on page 9-41 to identify the correct Base Image Load version.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-9 Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x (contd)

6.) Properly turn off the scanner by momentarily pressing the Standby (ON/OFF) Switch. Select
Shutdown from the System Exit menu. Wait for the Standby Switch to turn amber.
7.) If the system does not shutdown normally, hold down Standby Switch until green light turns amber.
8.) Turn on the scanner. A message is displayed on the Touch Panel screen as shown in Figure
8-32 on page 8-34 .
9.) Press any key to continue. To abort, remove the CD-ROM from the drive and press CTRL-C.
8-34 Section 8-9 - Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x

GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
10.)Select [1] Load the complete disk - All existing data will be lost.
NOTE: YOU NEED TO INSTALL APPLICATION SOFTWARE WHEN THIS PROCEDURE HAS
COMPLETED.
WARNING ALL PATIENT DATA (IF ANY) WILL BE DESTROYED!
11.)Figure 8-28 is the last warning message before the base load process begins. Press any key to
continue or abort by pressing CTRL-C.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM

Once you have chosen to continue with Option 1, you see a screen showing Norton Ghost (see Figure
8-35. This automatically loads a base set of software onto the hard disk. Let it run to completion
(Approximately 8-10 minutes).
Figure 8-35 Norton Ghost screen.
A message similar to the one shown in Figure 8-30, is displayed when the process has completed.
If there are no error messages listed above, the Base System Software Load Image process has successfully com-
pleted. You will now need to load the Application Software onto your system.
Please remove the CDROM from the drive, power cycle the system and then continue with the Application Software
load procedure.
12.)Remove DVD from the CD-ROM/DVD drive.
NOTE: If you do not remove the DVD, the Base System Software Load process repeats when the
system boots up.
13.)After removing the CDROM from the drive, press Ctrl+Alt+Delete to reboot the system.
8-36 Section 8-9 - Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x

GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM

NOTE: If the system does not reboot, press and hold down the Power On/Off button.
14.)When the system reboots it automatically logs on to start checking hardware. This is a normal
process and should be allowed to run to completion.
NOTE: While the script is running, several windows or dialog boxes appear on the screen. At
times it may look like the system is unresponsive. Wait for the System Settings
Changedialog box Do You Want to Restart computer now to appear, approximately
1-2 minutes after the desktop is displayed.
15.)When you get a message to restart Windows, select YES (see Figure 8-37).
Figure 8-37 Restart Windows Message
16.)You now need to run the Firmware executable to update the DVD/CD-ROM drives.
a.) Determine the type of drive this LOGIQ 9 supports by right clicking on My Computer (left Set
key) --> Manage (right Set key) --> Device Manager --> DVD/CD-ROM drives. Note the type
of device.
NOTE: If the device on the LOGIQ 9 does not match any of the Firmware directories in the next
step, then you do not need to run this update.
b.) Go to the c:\Hardware_Drivers\Firmware\ directory (you can use Windows Explorer for this).
Select the directory that matches the device supported by this LOGIQ 9 system from the
previous step.
c.) Run the executable for the DVD drive. Follow the directions in this executable (the instructions
vary by device).
17.)If necessary, remap the DVD drive. The DVD drive should be drive G. Remap the drives by running
remap.bat in c:\remap.
18.)Check your Service Dongle. Plug in your Service Dongle to ensure that it is recognized and lights
up. You can then remove the Service Dongle.
19.)Proceed to Section 8-12 "Loading Application Software - R6.x.x" on page 8-49.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-10
Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later
Save all Service Presets if you are connected to InSite to restore remote connectivity after completed.
WARNING WHILE THE SOFTWARE INSTALL PROCEDURE IS DESIGNED TO PRESERVE DATA,

YOU SHOULD SAVE ANY PATIENT DATA, IMAGES, SYSTEM SETUPS TO CD, DVD OR
HARDCOPY BEFORE DOING A SOFTWARE UPGRADE
Contact the customer prior to this upgrade to allow them enough lead time to backup the system.
This software upgrade applies to all LOGIQ 9 BT07 and later systems with software version of R7.x.x
and later.
NOTE: Be sure no images are in the clipboard or opened exams before loading base image software.
NOTE: R7.x and later Base Image and Application software disables the following: the Run window
normally accessed from Start->Run, and the mouse right-click (left set key) feature.
NOTE: Disconnect the system from the network and remove all transducers from the system.
NOTE: Be sure all USB devices (printers only) are connected and turned on (except for USB Flash
devices). If a printer is plugged in at this time it is automatically installed and you won't have to
go back to Windows to install it.

2.) Turn on all digital peripherals, including the DVR.
3.) Record the systems TCPIP settings (IP Address, Computer Name, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway,
Network Speed) from the Utility --> Connectivity --> TCPIP page. You will add these settings back
to the system in the System Checkout section after the Upgrade has been completed.
4.) Record the systems installed Option strings from the Utility --> Admin --> System Admin page.
5.) Perform a Backup from the Utility-->System-->Backup/Restore page. You should back up the
Patient Archive, Report Archive, User-Defined Configuration, Voice training, and Service settings.
You will perform a Restore after the Upgrade has been completed.
6.) Confirm that all patient data has been archived. If not, perform the archive.
7.) Insert the disk labeled Base System Software Load Image, into the CDROM/DVD drive.
NOTE: See Section 9-15 "Software" on page 9-41 to identify the correct Base Image Load version.
8-38 Section 8-10 - Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later

GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-10 Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later (contd)

8.) Properly turn off the scanner by momentarily pressing the Standby (ON/OFF) Switch. Select
Shutdown from the System Exit menu. Wait for the Standby Switch to turn amber.
9.) If the system does not shutdown normally, hold down Standby Switch until green light turns amber.
10.)Turn on the scanner.
A message is displayed on the Touch Panel screen as shown in Figure 8-39 on page 8-39 .
11.)Press any key to continue. To abort, remove the CD-ROM from the drive and press CTRL-C.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM
12.)Select either option:

a.) [1] Load the complete disk -- All existing data will be lost. Or,
b.) [2] Load the bootable C: partition only - Patient data is not lost.
NOTE: YOU NEED TO INSTALL APPLICATION SOFTWARE WHEN THIS PROCEDURE HAS
COMPLETED.
You are about to reload only the C: partition. If you DO NOT want
to do this, remove the CDROM from the CDROM drive and Press CTRL-C
now to exit and power cycle your system to restart without
overwriting your disk drive's current contents.
Press any key to continue...
13.)Figure 8-28 is the last warning message before the base load process begins. Press any key to
continue or abort by pressing CTRL-C.

GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM

Once you have chosen to continue with the selected option, you see a screen showing Norton Ghost
(see Figure 8-35. This automatically loads a base set of software onto the hard disk. Let it run to
completion (Approximately 8-10 minutes).
Figure 8-42 Norton Ghost screen.
A message similar to the one shown in Figure 8-30 is displayed when the process has completed.
If there are no error messages listed above, the Base System

Software Load Image process has successfully completed. You will
now need to load the Application Software onto your system.
Please remove the CDROM from the drive, power cycle the system
and then continue with the Application Software load procedure.
Thank you!
NOTICE Do NOT proceed with the Application Software load yet.

Do NOT insert the application disc into the CD-ROM/DVD drive until you have completed all the
remaining directions in this section. If you insert any media in the drive beforehand, the drives will not
remap correctly.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM

14.)Remove DVD from the CD-ROM/DVD drive.
NOTE: If you do not remove the DVD, the Base System Software Load process repeats when the
system boots up.
15.)After removing the CDROM from the drive, press Ctrl+Alt+Delete to reboot the system.
When the system reboots, it automatically logs on to start checking hardware. This is a normal
process.
16.)Allow the hardware checking process to run to completion.
NOTE: If the system does not reboot, press and hold down the Power On/Off button (button turns
amber).
NOTE: While the script is running, several windows or dialog boxes appear on the screen. At
times it may look like the system is unresponsive.
Wait for the System Settings Change dialog box Do You Want to Restart computer
now? to appear, approximately 1-2 minutes after the desktop is displayed.
17.)When you get a message to restart Windows, select YES (see Figure 8-37).
Figure 8-44 System Settings Change dialog box - Restart Windows Message
After restart, the DriveUpdater dialog box and an Instructions dialog box open.
Figure 8-45 DriveUpdater (left) and Instructions Dialog Boxes

GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
Figure 8-46 DriveUpdater Dialog Box
18.)If the Current Version matches the New Version, proceed to step 20.
NOTE: If completing step 19, you must complete all substeps associated with the DriveUpdater dialog
box BEFORE you select OK on the Instructions dialog box.
If you select the OK button on the Instructions dialog box prematurely, the system may not
remap the drives correctly.
19.)If the Current Version does not match the New Version on the DriveUpdater dialog box:
a.) Select the Update button.
After firmware update is complete, the Update button changes to a Reboot button.
b.) Select the Reboot button.

c.) Wait for Windows to finish installing the new Driver for the upgraded firmware and to find new
hardware.
After reboot, the DriveUpdater dialog box opens again.
Do NOT exit the DriveUpdater dialog box and do NOT click OK on the Instructions Dialog box
at this time.
d.) Wait for the System Settings Change dialog box to open asking Do you want to restart you
computer now? (Figure 8-44).
Do NOT exit the DriveUpdater dialog box and do NOT click OK on the Instructions Dialog box.
NOTE: If the 'Do you want to restart your computer now?' dialog box does not open after several
minutes, select Start -> Restart to reboot and continue with step f.
e.) Select Yes to restart.

f.) Wait for the system to reboot.
After reboot, the DriveUpdater dialog box opens again.
20.)If the Current Version matches the New Version on the DriveUpdater dialog box:
a.) Select the Exit button on DriveUpdater dialog box first.
b.) Select OK in the Instructions dialog box.
At this point, the CD drive re-mapping occurs. Do not reboot the system until the
re-mapping is complete. After re-mapping, the CD/DVD drive should be drive G:\.
When the re-mapping process is complete, the re-mapping window closes.
c.) Confirm the CD\DVD drive is mapped to G:\.

21.)Proceed to 8-12-2 "Wired VoiceScan Speaker Assignment - R6.x.x, R7.x.x, and R9.x.x" on page
8-54 before loading application software R7.x.x and later.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-11
Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior
8-11-1 Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior
NOTE: If you have not done so previously, double-click on the My Computer icon. Check for the drive
letters assignments of the Removable Drive (MOD) and the CD-ROM/DVD Drive. If the
CD-ROM/DVD Drive is not drive g and the MOD drive h , manually remap the drives.
NOTE: When installing R2.1.1 software you may see error messages about not being able to replace
the following *.dll files: ginastub.dll and msvcr70.dll. These are known, non-critical issues that
are being tracked and will be fixed in the next revision of software.
NOTE: Starting with the Application S/W R3.0.0C and above, you may get a notification that the service
platform is out of date. One of the last steps in the software load is to check the service platform
version. If the version is not correct, the screen will turn yellow and you will get a pop-up
notifying you that you must reghost the C drive and reinstall software to get the latest service
software. If you do not do this service may not work.
1.) Place the Application Software CD into the CD-ROM/DVD drive.
NOTE: See Section 9-15 "Software" on page 9-41 to identify the correct Application Software version.
2.) Wait about 15 seconds.

A window will pop-up showing you the contents of the drive.
3.) Double click on LoadSoftware.bat to load the software.

4.) If this pop-up window does not open in a minute, perform steps a. and b. below.
a.) Select the Start button on the tool bar at the bottom of the monitor screen and select Run.
b.) Enter g:\LoadSoftware into the dialog box as shown in Figure 8-47.
Figure 8-47 Run Load Software
5.) After the screen opens to warn you that you are about to load software, press the Enter key or select
OK to start the process.
A Command (CMD) window opens, similar to the one shown in Figure 8-48.
8-44 Section 8-11 - Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior

GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
8-11-1 Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior (contd)
Figure 8-48 Command Window
6.) As indicated, press any key to continue.

The process is completely automated and provides you with messages as to its status. Software
provides the message in Figure 8-49.
At this point you just have to wait while the software loads (Approximately 7-8 minutes).
Figure 8-49 R2.1.1 Software Message
NOTE: When the Information Window appears asking you to select OK, do nothing. This window will
disappear automatically.
7.) In BEP 3.x systems only, the system will reboot before installing the Service Platform. You will see
the Figure 8-50 dialog briefly just before the system reboots.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM
Figure 8-50 BEP 3 Only - System Shutdown Warning Message
After the system reboots, a DOS box displays showing you the installation of the Service Platform.
When the process is complete, another dialog box displays telling you that the system is rebooting.
It is similar to Figure 8-50, but the message will be: Computer is being rebooted to complete
installation
NOTICE Do not try to prevent these actions from occurring. If you do, you may end up with hyper threading
turned off. If hyper threading is turned off the system will respond slower than expected.
NOTE: After the Service Platform installs, and during the second reboot you may get some error
messages about processes not starting because the workstation is shutting down. If present,
these messages are normal and should be ignored.
8.) In BEP 2.x systems only, when the process is complete, the window will turn dark red and display
the following message in Figure 8-51, and the system will reboot.
Figure 8-51 Software Load Complete
9.) If possible while the system is rebooting, remove the CD from the drive.
If you remove the CD, the system will automatically reboot into the applications software.
If you didnt remove the CD, a dialog box like the one shown in Figure 8-52 opens. The ME2.0 will
change to reflect the currently installed software.

GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
Figure 8-52 Start Software
10.)Remove the Applications CD.

11.)From the Start Applications dialog box, select Start.
12.)Select Cancel.
Figure 8-53 Enter Option String
13.)During the reboot process, the system may ask for the option string (valid license) to be entered.
When this happens, enter the option string provided in the installation paperwork.
NOTE: Starting with R3.x Software, all systems must have at least the basic option string in order for
the software to run. Any single option string may enable multiple options (i.e. Basic & B-Flow).
Demo option strings turn on all options for a limited period of time. Do Not leave a demo
option string in a unit when it is sold to a customer.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM

14.)Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below
.
Service Manual
4-2-5 Probe/Connectors Usage Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-11.
Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for
4-2-8 System B/M-Mode Checks use.

GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-12
Loading Application Software - R6.x.x
8-12-1 Loading Applications Software - R6.x.x
1.) Place the Application Software CD/DVD into the CDROM/DVD drive.
NOTE: See Section 9-15 "Software" on page 9-41 to identify the correct Application Software version.
2.) Wait about 30 seconds. A window pops up (see Figure 8-54) showing you the contents of the
drive. Double click on LoadSoftware.bat to load the software.
Figure 8-54 LoadSoftware.bat File
3.) If this pop-up window does not open in a minute then perform steps A and B below.
A.) Select the START button on the tool bar at the bottom of the monitor screen and select
Run.
B.) Enter g:\LoadSoftware into the dialog box as shown in Figure 8-47.
Figure 8-55 Run Load Software
4.) You see a screen that warns you that you are about to load software. Press the Enter key or
select OK to start the process.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM
8-12-1 Loading Applications Software - R6.x.x (contd)

5.) You see a window open similar to the example shown in Figure 8-48.
Figure 8-56 Command Window
6.) As indicated, press any key to continue. The process is completely automated and provides
you with messages as to its status. R6.0.4 Software provides the message in Figure 8-56.
Please wait while the software loads (Approximately 7-8 minutes).
Figure 8-57 R6.X.X Software Message
NOTE: When the Information Window appears asking you to select OK, do nothing. This window
disappears automatically.
8-50 Section 8-12 - Loading Application Software - R6.x.x

GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM

7.) The system reboots before installing the Service Platform. You will see Figure 8-50 dialog
briefly just before the system reboots.
Figure 8-58 BEP 3 Only System Shutdown Warning Message
After the system reboots, a DOS box is displayed showing you the installation of the Service Platform.
When the process has completed, you get another dialog box telling you that the system is rebooting.
It is similar to Figure 8-58 but the message will be: Computer is being rebooted to complete installation
turned off. If hyper threading is turned off, the system responds slower than expected.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM

8.) When the software has completed loading, the system reboots.
You get a dialog box like the one shown in Figure 8-59. (Version R6.0.3B in the illustration below is
an example. The actual application software version will be reflected.)
9.) REMOVE the Applications CD.

10.)From the Start Applications dialog box, select START (if the CD is still in the tray; otherwise,
the system starts up automatically).
NOTE: If the service dongle is still plugged in, you will see the Service Login instead (see Figure 8-60).
Figure 8-60 Service Login

GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM

If the Basic Option is not saved in the Option Dongle, then the SW License dialog window opens.
11.)During the reboot process, the system asks for the option string (valid license) to be entered.
When this happens, enter the option string provided in the Upgrade Kit.
NOTE: If the system does not display an image or a good image when you boot up, Do Not
troubleshoot it as a problem yet. Continue with this upgrade. Proper Vital Product Data coding
is essential to proper system function and optimization.
12.)Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided
below.
Service Manual

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM
8-12-2 Wired VoiceScan Speaker Assignment - R6.x.x, R7.x.x, and R9.x.x

If the customer had the Wired VoiceScan option on their system, the following procedure needs to be
done to change the audio output from the wired headset to the PC Speakers. This procedure only needs
to be performed after a reghost of the system.
NOTE: This procedure is not required for Wireless VoiceScan.
1.) Plug the wired headset into the USB ports on the left side of the upper control panel.
NOTE: After the system is turned on, the operating system assigns the headset as the new preferred
playback/recording device. The following steps reassign the preferred playback device.
2.) Select Start->Settings->Control Panel->Sounds and Audio Devices to bring up the Sounds and
Audio Devices properties box.
Figure 8-62 Path to Sounds and Audio Devices<$elemtextonly

GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
8-12-2 Wired VoiceScan Speaker Assignment - R6.x.x, R7.x.x, and R9.x.x (contd)
3.) Select the Audio tab.
Figure 8-63 Sounds and Audio Devices Properties Box
4.) In the Sound Playback area, select SoundMAX Digital Audio as the Default device, press Apply
then OK.
NOTE: The recording device should remain Plantronics Headset.
The system sounds should now be directed to the PC Speaker.
Complete the appropriate application load.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-13
Loading Application Software - R7.x.x or Later
If you have previously performed a Base Image Software Load, proceed to section 8-23-1, Step 1.
If you are only loading the Application Software, insert the application CD into the CD/DVD drive and
power cycle the system. At boot-up, the system shows the Start Application dialog box. Click on [Install
SW] and proceed with section 8-23-1, Step 6.
8-13-1 Loading Applications Software

1.) Confirm drive letter for CD\DVD is mapped to G:\. If the CD\DVD drive is not mapped to the
G:\ drive:
A.) From the Desktop, select My Computer.
B.) Open C:\remap.
C.) Double-click on newmap.bat to remap the drive.
2.) Place the Application Software CDROM into the CDROM/DVD drive.
See Section 9-15 "Software" on page 9-41 to confirm the correct Application Software version.
3.) Wait about 30 seconds.

A window pops up (see Figure 8-64) showing you the contents of the drive.
4.) Double-click on LoadSoftware.bat to load the software.
Figure 8-64 LoadSoftware.bat File
5.) If the pop-up window in Figure 8-64 does not open in a minute, perform steps A - C below.
A.) From the Desktop, select My Computer.
B.) Double-click the G:\ drive to open the pop-up window in Figure 8-64.
C.) Double-click on LoadSoftware.bat to load the software.
NOTE: If the base image does not match the part number and revision of the approved base image,
then the system notifies you of the required base image needed and does not run the software.
8-56 Section 8-13 - Loading Application Software - R7.x.x or Later

GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-13 Loading Application Software - R7.x.x or Later (contd)

6.) A window similar to the example shown in Figure 8-65 opens.
Figure 8-65 Command Window (Note: Application software for release R9.X L9)

The process is completely automated and provides you with messages as to its status. R9.X
Software provides the message in Figure 8-66.
8.) Wait while the software loads (Approximately 7-8 minutes).
Figure 8-66 R9.X.X and later Software Message
NOTE: When the Information Window appears asking you to select OK, do nothing. This window
disappears automatically.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM

9.) The system reboots before installing the Service Platform. You will see Figure 8-67 dialog
briefly just before the system reboots.
Figure 8-67 BEP 3.x and later System Shutdown Warning Message
After the system reboots, a DOS box is displayed showing you the installation of the Service Platform.
When the process has completed, you get another dialog box telling you that the system is rebooting.
It is similar to Figure 8-50 but the message will be: Computer is being rebooted to complete installation
turned off. If hyper threading is turned off, the system responds slower than expected.
If hyper threading turns off, you must perform the c: partition reghost and application s/w load again.

GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM

10.)When the software has completed loading, the system reboots.
A dialog box like the one shown in Figure 8-68 opens.
(Version R6.0.3B in the illustration below is an example. The actual application software
version will be reflected as R9.X.)
11.)REMOVE the Applications CD.

If the Basic Option is not saved in the Option Dongle, then the SW License dialog window
opens.
12.)During the reboot process, the system asks for the option string (valid license) to be entered.
When this happens, enter the option string provided in the Upgrade Kit.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM

NOTE: If the system does not display an image or a good image when you boot up, Do Not
troubleshoot it as a problem yet. Continue with this upgrade. Proper Vital Product Data coding
is essential to proper system function and optimization. For information on updating VPD, see
Proprietary Service Manual (2294854-100), Chapter 8, Verify and Update Vital Product Data.
8-13-2 Functional Checkout

Run functional checkout to ensure system operation.
1.) Connect each probe to ensure that it is recognized by the system.

2.) Check every probe in every mode.
3.) Reconnect to the network.
4.) Verify Software level on the Utility --> System --> About menu; also confirm the Base Image Load
and Patch CD information on this screen.
5.) Check Date, Time, and Timezone.
6.) Restore (type in) the TCPIP settings (IP Address, Computer Name, Subnet Mask, and Default
Gateway, Network Speed) on the Utility --> Connectivity --> TCPIP menu. Save these settings and
reboot the system.
7.) Verify the Presets loaded properly. The patient data should have transferred since the upgrade only
entails a C: Partition load.
If the transfer failed, perform a Restore via Utility --> System --> Backup/Restore. Select to restore
Patient Archive, Report Archive, User Defined Configuration, and Service settings. The system
automatically reboots.
8.) Perform audio test.

9.) Format a DVD, and backup Customer Presets to confirm proper CD/DVD write functionality.
10.)Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below.
Service Manual
11.)Perform basic system measurements.

12.)Replace old Base Load and Application Software CDs and Documentation.

GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-14
Generic Application Software - Upgrade Only
8-14-1 Application Software Upgrade Procedure
NOTE: When installing software you may see error messages about not being able to replace the
following *.dll files: ginastub.dll and msvcr70.dll. These are known, non-critical issues that are
being tracked and will be fixed in the next revision of software.
WARNING WHILE THE SOFTWARE INSTALL PROCEDURE IS DESIGNED TO PRESERVE DATA,

YOU SHOULD SAVE ANY PATIENT DATA, IMAGES, SYSTEM SETUPS TO A MOD, CD,
DVD OR HARDCOPY BEFORE DOING A SOFTWARE UPGRADE
CAUTION Remember to remove the MOD before continuing with the software install.
1.) Place the Application Software CD/DVD into the CD-ROM/DVD drive.
See Section 9-15 "Software" on page 9-41 to confirm the correct Application Software version.
2.) Power Down the scanner.

3.) Power up the scanner. Wait for a dialog box like the one in Figure 8-70.
Figure 8-70 Start Application Window

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM
8-14-1 Application Software Upgrade Procedure (contd)

4.) Select Install SW ... .
5.) Two separate dialog boxes open warning you that you are about to install new software as shown
in Figure 8-71. In both cases, click OK.
Figure 8-71 StartLoader Dialog Boxes
Figure 8-72 Command Window (R2.x shown)
6.) Another window will be displayed asking you to Press any key to continue.
8-62 Section 8-14 - Generic Application Software - Upgrade Only

GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM

The process is completely automated and provides you with messages as to its status. R2.1.0
Software provides the message in Figure 8-73.
Figure 8-73 R2.1.0 Software Message
At this point you just have to wait while the software loads (Approximately 10 minutes).
When the process is complete, the window will turn dark red, display the message in Figure 8-74, and
the system will reboot.
Figure 8-74 Software Load Complete
8.) If possible while the system is rebooting, remove the CD from the drive.
If you remove the CD, the system will automatically reboot into the applications software.
If you didnt remove the CD, a dialog box like the one shown in Figure 8-75 opens.
9.) Remove the Applications CD.

10.)From the Start Applications dialog box, select Start.
11.)Select Cancel.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM
12.)During the reboot process, the system may ask for the option string (valid license) to be entered.
When this happens, enter the option string provided in the installation paperwork.
Demo option strings turn on all options for a limited period of time. Do Not leave a demo option
string in a unit when it is sold to a customer.

Service Manual
8-64 Section 8-14 - Generic Application Software - Upgrade Only

GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-15
System Setup
8-15-1 To Complete the System Setup

1.) From the Touch Screen on the scanner, select Utility -> Connectivity -> TCPIP Tab.
2.) Ensure that DHCP is deselected so you can enter information manually.
3.) Input the DICOM information.
- This should be the appropriate DICOM information for the system if it is on the hospital
network. If it is not correct, input the correct data.
4.) After all information is entered, select Save Settings.
5.) Complete the InSite Checkout again. Refer to the InSite/iLinq and InSite ExC Installation Manual,
2354611-100, Rev 4 or later.
8-15-2 VCR Setup

1.) Reset the VCR and choose a Default Line Printer by going to Utilities>System>Peripherals.
2.) Under VCR, select Sony SVO-9500 VCR or Mitsubishi MD 3000, as appropriate, and SAVE.
3.) Under SETUP, select the desired default line printer and Save.
4.) Select Exit in the lower left-hand corner of the Touch Screen.
8-15-3 DVR Setup

1.) Reset the DVR and choose a Default Line Printer by going to Utilities>System>Peripherals.
2.) Under VCR, select Panasonic DVR and Save.
3.) Under SETUP, select the desired default line printer and Save.
4.) Select Exit in the lower left-hand corner of the Touch Screen.
8-15-4 Printer Setup

1.) If the customer has a USB (Digital) Printer and it was plugged in at the time the Base Image
Software was installed, it should have been recognized and automatically installed.
2.) If you did not install the printer until after the Applications software was loaded, you will need a
service key (dongle) to open Windows. Follow the manual setup procedures in the LOGIQ 9
Peripheral Installation Manual 2341053-100.
3.) For the UP-D895 Printer, you must manually set the resolution to 1920 x 1280 whenever software
is reloaded see 3-14-1 "Printer Set Up (R4.x and later)" on page 3-24.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM
8-15-5 Print Key Assignment and Checkout

Because of the addition of more printer choices, digital and analog, the factory default print key
configuration has been removed for the color and b/w printers.
1.) Determine which printers are configured on the system.

The former factory defaults were Color = P3 and B/W = P2.
2.) Consult the customer to ensure which Print keys (P1-4) should be assigned to printers.
3.) Select Utility -> Admin -> Connectivity -> Buttons. Choose the desired print button. Under
Destinations, select necessary printer choice from the drop-down list.
4.) Press the print key just configured.
The screenshot prints to the destination printer.
8-15-6 Restore Patient, Report, and User-Defined Presets

1.) Place the Backup/Restore media (MOD or CD-R) in the drive.
2.) Select the Utility tab on the Touch Panel. Select System, then Backup/Restore.
The Backup/Restore screen opens.
Figure 8-77 Backup / Restore Screen
NOTE: If you are not logged in with administrator privileges, the Operator Login window opens. Log on
with administrator privileges.
8-66 Section 8-15 - System Setup

GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
8-15-6 Restore Patient, Report, and User-Defined Presets (contd)

3.) In the Restore list, select from the following, depending on which configurations you want to restore:
- Patient Archive
- Report Archive
- User Defined Configuration
- Service (Only available with R4.x.x SW and higher)
OR, in the Detailed Restore section select one of the following:
- Imaging Presets
- Connectivity Configuration
- Measurement Configuration
- Comment/Body Pattern Configuration
- Voice Scan Training Profiles
- Report Templates
- 3D/4D (Only available with R4.x.x SW and higher)
- Fast Key (R7.x.x or Later)
- Custom Programs (R9.x.x)
- All Others
NOTE: Only restore the Service presets onto the system from which they were backed up. Do not carry
Service presets from one system to another.
4.) In the Media field, select the media that the backup is on.
5.) Select Restore.
The system performs the restore. As it proceeds, status information is displayed on the
System/Backup/Restore screen.
NOTE: If you restore Service there is another progress bar that comes up during restore. When you do
a restore, the system will automatically reboot. This only occurs after the boot where you restore
Service. After this progress bar goes away the system will load normally. The progress bar will
complete several full passes. This is normal.
8-15-7 Cycle System Power

1.) Press the ON/OFF switch on the Control Panel once to display the SYSTEM - EXIT menu.
Figure 8-78 System Exit Menu for Back-end Processor Power Down
2.) Power up the system for functional check-out.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM
8-15-8 Standby Operation Checkout
8-15-8-1 To Place the System in the Standby Mode

1.) Press the ON/OFF switch at the front of the system once. The System-Exit window displays.
2.) Use the Trackball to select Standby.
The Monitor Display and Touch Panel turn black. The On/Off switch indicator is green.
3.) After the monitor blacks out, wait at least 20 additional seconds before unplugging the power
cable or switching off the breaker.
The system does not fully enter Standby Mode until after the following occurs:
- If you have a CD/DVD drive, the Power ON/OFF button blinks.

- If you have a CD drive only, the green lights beneath the CD drive show no activity for 15
seconds.
NOTE: Starting with BT04, the ON/OFF Switch blinks while the system is in Standby Mode. Because
of a hardware dependency, this feature is not supported on systems that upgrade to BT04.
4.) Once in Standby Mode, unplug the system from the wall.
The system beeps.
NOTE: DO NOT press the ON/OFF switch while the system is unplugged. This will turn the system off.
5.) Plug the system back in within 15 minutes.

If the system is unplugged for longer than 15 minutes, the battery is discharged and the system
shuts down. This assumes a fully-charged battery.
NOTE: It takes ten hours to recharge the battery. Expected battery lifetime for frequent standby use is
six months. To maintain battery life, keep the system plugged in with the circuit breaker in the
ON position.
NOTE: If the system is left in the OFF condition (system unplugged from the wall and circuit breaker in
the OFF position) for an extended period of time (greater than three days), the system may not
boot up or beep when turned on. If this occurs, plug in the system, set the circuit breaker to the
ON position, and allow the systems UPS battery to recharge for several hours. DO NOT use
standby during this time.
See Moving the System in the Basic User Manual for more information.
8-15-8-2 To Wake the System from Standby Mode

1.) Press ON/OFF switch QUICKLY! Less than .25 seconds.
The system becomes functional after about 45 seconds.
NOTE: If the ON/OFF switch is pressed too long, the system shuts down instead of coming out of
Standby Mode.
NOTE: Waking the system from Standby without AC connected will turn off the system.
NOTE: Charge time for batteries is approximately 10 hours. Expected battery lifetime for frequent
standby use is six months. To maintain battery life, keep the system plugged in with the circuit
breaker in the ON position.
8-68 Section 8-15 - System Setup

GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM

Service Manual
2.) Reboot the system.

3.) If the system does not recognize the video card, perform a C: partition base load
(see Section 8-8 "Loading Base Image Software - R4.x.x and prior" on page 8-26, Section 8-9
"Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x" on page 8-33, or Section 8-10 "Loading Base Image
Software - R7.x.x or Later" on page 8-38).

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-16
Console Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure
8-16-1 Manpower
One person, 1 hour
8-16-2 Tools
Hexagon key 2,5 and 3 mm
Phillips screwdriver size 2
Socket 8 mm
8-16-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the system .
2.) Remove Operator Panel.
3.) Remove XY- Handle .
8-70 Section 8-16 - Console Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure

GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
8-16-4 Console Lock Assembly Removal Procedure

1.) Unscrew 8 (5 mm) and 2 (3 mm) hexagon screws .
2.) Take care of the spring.
3.) Remove the Console Lock Assembly.
8-16-5 Console Lock Assembly Installation Procedure

1.) Install the Lock Assembly.
2.) Install the spring.
3.) Fasten the 10 hexagon screws.
4.) Install Operator Panel.
Service Manual
4-5-1 or Operator I/O Movement - Standard Monitor or
4-5-2 or Operator I/O Movement - 17 LCD (Option) or

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-17
Release Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure
8-17-1 Manpower
One person, 1 hour
8-17-2 Tools
Hexagon key 2,5 and 3 mm
Phillips screwdriver size 2
Socket 8 mm
8-17-3 Preparations
1.) Shut down the system .
2.) Remove Operator Panel .
3.) Remove XY- Handle .
Strap
Screws
Screws
Screws
Figure 8-79 Release Lock Assembly
8-17-4 Release Lock Removal Procedure

1.) Unscrew 8 mm nut behind XY-Handle.
2.) Unscrew 2 hexagon screws (3 mm).
3.) Unscrew 4 hexagon screws (2,5 mm).
4.) Remove Release Lock Assembly.
8-72 Section 8-17 - Release Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure

GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
8-17-5 Release Lock Installation Procedure

1.) Install Release Lock Assembly.
2.) Fasten 6 hexagon screws.
3.) Fasten nut behind XY- Handle.
4.) Install XY-Handle .
5.) Install Operator Panel.
Strap
Screws
Screws
Screws
Figure 8-80 Release Lock Assembly
Service Manual
4-5-2 or Operator I/O Movement - 17 LCD (Option)or

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-18
Gas Shock Replacement Procedure
8-18-1 Manpower
2 persons, 4 hours
WARNING Tilting the console requires two people in order to avoid injury to service personnel and
damage to the equipment.
WARNING Beware of possible sharp edges on all metal chassis parts. if sharp edges are
8-18-2 Tools
Large coin and a large flat screwdriver
Long Phillips driver
#2 Phillips screwdriver
5 mm Hexagon key
8-18-3 Overview
Replacement of the gas shock in a LOGIQ 9 is not a difficult task but one that should be approached
with safety in mind.
The Gas Shock is used to balance the weight from the Top Console. It is located inside the frame,
between the Front End Card Cage and the Back End Processor (BEP).
1 2
Figure 8-81 Typical Gas Shock Assembly
8-74 Section 8-18 - Gas Shock Replacement Procedure

GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
8-18-3 Overview (contd)

You get access to the Gas Shock via openings in the frame behind the BEP, so the BEP must be
removed. To reduce the weight of the Top Console, the monitor should be removed.
To release the tension in the Gas Shock, the Top Console must be secured in its upper position during
replacement.
Components must be removed to remove weight from the console and to gain access to the gas shock
attachment points. Items removed are:
- Covers
- Handle
- Air Filter
- Peripherals
- VCR/Top Tray Frame
- Monitor
- Back End Processor (BEP)
Pay particular attention to all cautions and warnings in this procedure because injury could result from
improper handling of components and sharp edges on metal chassis parts.
WARNING When the top console is in its locked position, the gas shock is compressed and stores
mechanical energy. During normal operation the top console, the weight of the monitor
and the mechanical force of the gas shock are in balance. Take care if/when you
activate this gas shock. Personal injury can occur after the panel is removed and the
shock pressure is released. Take care when you repair the elevation assembly.
8-18-4 Preparations
2.) Remove the left- and/or right-side covers.
3.) Remove the upper rear cover.
4.) Remove the top cover.
5.) Remove the front cover.
6.) Remove the lower rear cover.
7.) Remove the rear handle.
8.) Remove the back-end processor
9.) Remove the monitor assembly.
10.)Remove the color video printer.
11.)Remove the black and white video printer.
12.)Remove the VCR.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM
8-18-5 Top Tray Frame

The Color Printer/Top Tray Frame should be remove to avoid damage to this part.
Top Tray Frame
Figure 8-82 Color Printer/Top Tray Frame
8-18-5-1 Removal Procedure

1.) Remove the four screws securing the frame to the chassis.
Figure 8-83 Remove Four Screws
2.) Remove the frame and set it aside.

GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
8-18-5-1 Removal Procedure (contd)

You should now have a chassis with all the necessary parts removed as shown in Figure
8-84 on page 8-77 .
Figure 8-84 Chassis with Necessary Parts Removed

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM
8-18-6 Gas Shock Removal

The stripped down system console will be tilted on its side in order to remove and replace the gas shock.
1.) Set the back brake on the Right Side of the console. The right side is the side with the Front End
Processor.
2.) Ensure that the keyboard X/Y motion (Frogleg) is locked.
3.) Carefully raise the console to its fully extended position.
4.) Place some padded material on the floor next to the right side of the chassis.
5.) Refer to Figure 8-85, with one person at the back of the chassis and one at the keyboard handles
in the front, carefully tilt the console and lay it on its right side.
Figure 8-85 Tilting the Console
6.) You should now have access to the top and bottom shock mounts as shown in Figure 8-86.

GE H EALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
8-18-6 Gas Shock Removal (contd)
Bottom Shock Mount
Top Shock Mount
Figure 8-86 Console on its Side
WARNING Beware of possible sharp edges on all metal chassis parts. if sharp edges are
7.) At the top of the shock mount there is a Wire Clamp nestled in the Forked Retainer. Using 2 slotted
screwdrivers (one on each side of the clamp) loosen the clamp. Refer to Figure 8-87.
8.) At the top shock mount remove the:
- Top C (Circlip) Clip
- Pin
- Bushings
Slide out the top shock end.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM
8-18-6 Gas Shock Removal (contd)
Wire end lock Release arm Spring
Gas Spring Axle

Circlip
Plastic strap
Figure 8-87 Upper Gas Shock Axle and Release Mechanism
9.) At the shock bottom mounting point, remove the Circlip. Refer to Figure 8-88.
10.)Remove the mounting axel and the washers. Refer to Figure 8-88.
NOTE: Take care, not to loose clips or washers.
11.)Lift up the bottom of the shock and pull it out and away from the pin.
Mounting Axel,
Circlip and
washers
Figure 8-88 Bottom Shock Mount

GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
8-18-7 Install the New Gas Shock

Reverse the removal procedure to install the new gas shock.
Figure 8-89 New Gas Shock as delivered
The shock comes pre-loaded with a stop block tywrapped to the top of the shock to prevent accidental
complete extension of the shock. Refer to Figure 8-90. The Position of the release arm is also
preadjusted.
Figure 8-90 New Shock with Stop Block
1.) Slide the bottom of the shock into the bottom mount position as shown in Figure 8-91.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM
8-18-7 Install the New Gas Shock (contd)
Mounting Pin C Clip
Figure 8-91 Shock Bottom Mounted
2.) Place a washer on each side of the bottom of the shock mount and align the holes as shown in
Figure 8-91.
NOTE: You can use the top mounting pin to help align the bottom of the shock mount with the washers.
3.) Reach behind the bottom of the shock mount and lift the bottom mounting pin so that it slides
through the washer, shock, washer and bottom mounting bracket as shown in Figure 8-91.
4.) Install the C clip to secure the bottom of the shock mount as shown in Figure 8-91.
5.) Move the top of the shock mount into position as shown in Figure 8-92.
6.) Assemble the top of the shock to the chassis using the pin, two washers and C clips as shown in
Figure 8-92.
Mounting Pin
C Clip
Tywrap
Stop Block
Figure 8-92 Top of Shock mounted

GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
8-18-7 Install the New Gas Shock (contd)
7.) Using two people, return the console to its upright position (sitting on all four wheels).
8.) Release the shock by cutting the tywrap and removing the stop block as shown in Figure 8-92.
8-18-8 Reassemble Z-Release

1.) Place the Release Cable Socket in the slot on the Shock tops lower flange as shown in Figure 8-93.
Slot in Shock tops Lower

Flange
Release Cable Socket
Figure 8-93 Mounting the Release Cable
2.) Tywrap the Release Cable Socket to the Shock head as shown in Figure 8-94.
Tywrap
Figure 8-94 Tywrapped Release Cable

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM
8-18-8 Reassemble Z-Release (contd)

3.) Thread the spring and barrel clamp(s) onto the Release Cable wire. Place the Barrel Clamp(s) in
the Clamp cradle on the Shocks Valve Release arm as shown in Figure 8-95.
Cable wire End
Barrel Clamps
Release Arm in Upper

Position
Spring
Figure 8-95 Cradled Barrel Clamps
4.) Using needle nose pliers, hold the wire end shown in Figure 8-95 above the clamp(s) and pull it
upward to take up any cable slack.
5.) Using one of the two slotted screwdrivers, push the Clamp(s) downwards until it rests in the Shock
Valve Release Arm Clamp Cradle as shown in Figure 8-95.
WARNING Do NOT attempt to pinch together or pry apart the Cradle. If one of the tines should
break off, the gas spring piston may have to be replaced AGAIN.
6.) Tighten the clamp with one screwdriver to hold the cable. Let go of the pliers and then use the two
screwdrivers to fully tighten the clamp.
7.) Without squeezing the Top Console Release Lever, check that the Shock Valve Release Arm is in
its uppermost position as shown in Figure 8-95.
8.) Squeeze the Top Console Release Lever and watch the clamp cradle move down immediately as
the lever is squeezed, there should be very little play in the cable. Small amounts of play can be
taken up (or slackened) with the Top Console cable adjustment screw.
NOTE: Before installing the Back End Processor, check all connections to the AC Transformer box to
ensure they were not disturbed while replacing the gas shock.
9.) Replace the BEP. Refer to Chapter 8 of the Proprietary Manual if necessary.
10.)Replace the Monitor. Refer to Chapter 8 of the Proprietary Manual if necessary.
11.)You should now be able to power up the system and check basic operation prior to installing the
peripherals and covers. If the system functions normally, continue reassembling the system.
12.)After completing a basic check out, power down the system.
13.)Replace the Color Printer/Top Tray frame.
14.)Replace the VCR.
15.)Replace the B/W.
16.)Replace the Color Printer.

GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
8-18-8 Reassemble Z-Release (contd)

17.)Replace all covers.
- Air Filter
- Handle
- Top Cover
- Back Covers (Top & Bottom)
- Front Cover
- Filter Cover
- Side Covers
18.)Power up the system and do a complete functional check of all peripherals.
19.)Perform the following functional test. If successful, include the debrief script provided below
Service
Manual
4-2-3 Standby Mode
4-2-10 Basic Measurements Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-18.
Leakage Current measured at (record the value) and
Section 4-4 Peripheral Checks meets allowable limits. Equipment passed all required
tests and is ready for use.
Section 6-3 Monitor
10-7-4 Grounding Continuity
10-7-5 Chassis Leakage Current Test
20.)Check the Z-Release operation (Operator Console up/down operation). Readjust if necessary.
Refer to Section 6-5 "Z-Release Cable and Gas Spring Adjustment" on page 6-8.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-19
Gas Spring Wirecable Replacement Procedure
The Gas Spring Wirecable (FB307375) is a field replaceable unit. The wirecable is used when operating
the Z-Release Handle to move the Top Console up/down.
8-19-1 Manpower
1 person, 1-2 hours
8-19-2 Tools
Narrow standard screwdriver
Needle nose pliers
4mm allen wrench
Hexagon key 3mm (covers)
Phillips screwdriver (covers)
Coin and large screwdriver (covers)
8-19-3 Wirecable Removal Preparations

1.) Power Off / Shutdown the system as shown in .
NOTICE
Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ 9
TAG
LOCKOUT
& 3. Maintain control of the system power plug.
Signed Date
4. Wait at least 20 seconds for capacitors to discharge as there are no test points to verify isolation.
Beware that the AC Control Box, Front End Processor and Back End Processor may be energized
even if the power is turned off when the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.
2.) Remove the Side Covers .

3.) Remove the Front Cover .
Removing the Front Cover allows you easier access to raise the column cover as necessary.
4.) Remove B/W Video Printer .
8-86 Section 8-19 - Gas Spring Wirecable Replacement Procedure

GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
8-19-3 Wirecable Removal Preparations (contd)

5.) Remove VCR or DVR.
Removing B/W Video Printer and VCR/DVR gives access to the lower end of wirecable and the
release mechanism located behind and between the rear parts of these two units.
Disconnect Cables
B/W Printer
VCR
Figure 8-96 Disconnect and Remove the Printer and VCR or DVR
6.) Remove upper op panel and lower op panels.

7.) Lift console to top position.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM
8-19-4 Wirecable Removal Procedure

1.) Remove Z-handle shown in Figure 8-97.
c.) Unscrew 1 hexagon screw.
d.) Release the wire-end lock from the handle.
e.) Remove the handle.
Hexagon Screw
Wire-end lock
Z-Handle
Figure 8-97 Z-Release handle, view from below
2.) Cut plastic strap shown in Figure 8-98.

3.) Unscrew both upper and lower wire-end locks shown in Figure 8-98. Take care of spring.
Upper wire-end lock Lower wire-end lock Release arm Wirecable
Arm fork
Console Cable Assembly
Spring
Gas Spring Axle
Circlip
Mantle end - lower
Plastic strap
Figure 8-98 Upper Gas Shock Axle and Release Mechanism

GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
8-19-4 Wirecable Removal Procedure (contd)

4.) Pull the wirecable out of mantle (black rubber tube housing) from the upper end of the mantle shown
in Figure 8-99.
Mantle end - upper
Figure 8-99 Z-Release handle, view from above

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM
8-19-5 Wirecable Installation Procedure

1.) Thread the new wirecable with prefixed wire-end lock through Z-Handle.
2.) Thread wirecable from Z-Handle down through the upper mantle (Figure 8-99) until the wirecable
is visible through the lower mantle end (Figure 8-98).
3.) Reinstall Z-handle.
4.) Thread the cone-shaped spring on the lower end of the wirecable.
5.) Put two wire-end locks on wirecable and hook wire-end into the release arm fork. See Figure 8-87.
6.) Secure wirecable with a new plastic strap. See Figure 8-87.
7.) Loosen the lower wire-end lock. See Figure 8-87.
8.) Use the needle nose pliers to pull the lower end of the wirecable upwards and to push the loose
wire-end lock against the release arm fork.
While maintaining tension on the wirecable using the needle nose pliers in one hand (so that the
Z-handle is tight and in proper position, Figure 8-100), use a flathead screwdriver in the other hand
to fasten the loose lower wire-end lock.
9.) Loosen the upper lock, push it against the lower, and fasten the upper wire-end lock.
10.)Confirm the Z-handle is in proper position (Figure 8-100).
NOTE: When the wirecable is tight, the Z-handle will be in proper position. Improper Z-handle position
will affect the performance of the gas shock.
Z-Handle
Figure 8-100 Z-Release handle in proper position, view from above
11.)Perform a functional test of the Z-Release operation (Operator Console up/down operation) before
cutting off overshooting lower wire-end. Readjust if necessary (see Z-Release Cable and Gas
Spring Adjustment in Chapter 6 of the Service Manual).
12.)Reinstall the upper and lower operator panels.
13.)Reinstall VCR or DVR.
14.)Reinstall B/W-Video Printer.
15.)Reinstall Front Cover.
16.)Reinstall Side Covers.

GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
8-19-5 Wirecable Installation Procedure (contd)

17.)Perform the following functional tests. If successful, include the debrief script provided below.
Service
Manual
Section 4-4 Peripheral Checks Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-19.
Leakage Current measured at (record the value) and
4-5-1 or Operator I/O Movement - Standard Monitor or meets allowable limits. Equipment passed all required
4-5-2 or Operator I/O Movement - 17 LCD (Option) or tests and is ready for use.
Section 7-7 I/O Devices

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-20
Frog Leg Angle Adjustment
8-20-1 Manpower
Two persons, .5 hour + travel
8-20-2 Tools
Hexagon keys, 5mm and 6 mm
8-20-3 Kit Contents

Table 8-1 Shim Kit - LOGIQ 9 or Vivid 7 Op Panel (5116529)
Qty Description
2 Shim Washer .635 mm thick
1 Shim Washer 1mm thick
8-20-4 Preparations
2.) Remove the monitor.
8-20-5 Frog Leg Adjustment Procedure

1.) Return the console to the locked position and engage the X-Y Lock.
2.) Carefully raise the console to its fully extended position.
8-92 Section 8-20 - Frog Leg Angle Adjustment

GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
8-20-5 Frog Leg Adjustment Procedure (contd)

3.) Have one person hold on to the rear of the operator panel. See Figure 8-101 on page 8-93 .
Figure 8-101 Hold on to Rear of Operator Console
NOTICE Lock Tight is applied to the hex screws that attach the Operator Console to the Frogleg during
assembly. Be sure to seat the Hexagon Key firmly in the screw before attempting to unscrew so that
you dont strip the screw head.
Socket Head Cap

Screw requiring 6
mm hexagon key
Button Head
Screws requiring 5
mm hexagon key
Button Head Screws

requiring 5 mm
hexagon key
Figure 8-102 Screws through Frogleg to Top Console
4.) Unscrew and remove socket head cap screw from Top Console. See Figure 8-102 on page 8-93
and Figure 8-103 on page 8-94 .
5.) Unscrew and remove four button head screws from Top Console. See Figure 8-102 on page 8-93

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM
Figure 8-103 Remove Screws
6.) Have person holding the Operator Console gently tip it back. See Figure 8-104 on page 8-94 .
1 mm thick washer goes on rear

hole (Socket head cap screw)
.635 mm thick washers

go on middle holes
.635 mm thick washers

go on middle holes
no shims on front holes
Figure 8-104 Place Washers (shims) on Frogleg
7.) Place 1 mm thick washer between Frogleg and Top Console so the socket head cap screw can be
inserted through it. See Figure 8-104 on page 8-94 .
8.) Place the two .635 mm thick washers between the Frogleg and Top Console assembly so the
middle button head screws can be inserted through them. See Figure 8-104 on page 8-94 .

GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM

9.) Have person holding the Operator Console gently tip console back into place.
10.)Install socket head cap screw using care not to cross thread the casting.
11.)Install all button head screws, using care not to cross thread the casting.
12.)Tighten all five screws.
13.)Replace the monitor.
8-20-6 Functional Check

1.) Close Frog Leg.
2.) Verify Crash Arms extend at least 1/2 way down Crash Pads. See Figure 8-105 on page 8-95
Crash Arms
Figure 8-105 Crash Arm

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM
8-20-6 Functional Check (contd)
Thumbnail indicates 1/2 way

down Crash Pad
Figure 8-106 Crash Pad
3.) Lock and Unlock Frogleg to verify correct operation.
NOTE: If frogleg continues to rub on operator panel after the shims have been put in place, or if crash
arms do not extend at least 1/2 way down the crash pads, you will need to order a new frogleg.
4.) Perform the following functional test. If successful, include the debrief script provided below.

GE HEALTHCARE
1/18/10
CHAPTER8.FM
8-20-6 Functional Check (contd)
Service Manual

4-5-1 or Operator I/O Movement - Standard Monitor or Leakage Current measured at (record the value)
and meets allowable limits. Equipment passed all
required tests and is ready for use.
Section 6-3 Monitor
Section 7-7 I/O Devices

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER8.FM

1/18/10
P R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
GE HEALTHCARE
A R TOYGE CHAPTER9.FM
Chapter 9
Renewal Parts
Section 9-1
Overview
This chapter gives you an overview of Spare Parts available for the LOGIQ 9.

9-1 Overview 9-1
9-2 List of Abbreviations 9-3
9-3 Console View 9-4
9-4 External Covers 9-5
9-5 Additional Console Hardware 9-7
9-6 Operator I/O Mechanical Parts 9-9
9-7 Operator Control Panel Brackets 9-13
9-8 Gas Spring 9-14
9-9 Monitor Assembly 9-16
9-10 Operator Control Panel Assembly 9-20
9-11 Front End Processor Assembly 9-26
9-12 I/O Interfaces 9-32
9-13 3-D Externals 9-34
9-14 Back End Processor Assemblies 9-35
9-15 Software 9-41
9-16 Interconnect Cables 9-44
9-17 Power Distribution Modules 9-61
9-18 Air Distribution 9-62
9-19 Voice Scan 9-63
9-20 4D Components 9-66
9-21 Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler Components 9-67
9-22 Peripherals 9-68
9-23 Customer Documentation 9-69
9-24 Probes 9-70
Chapter 9 9-1
1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I NPROPRIETARY
EALTHCARE
9-1-2 LOGIQ 9 Models Numbers

Table 9-2 LOGIQ 9 Model Designations
Part Number Description

2188900 LOGIQ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP1.0
2404587 LOGIQ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP3 BT04
2404587-2 LOGIQ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP3 BT04
2404587-3 LOGIQ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP3 BT04
5177000 LOGIQ 9 120-60V Console & Peripherals - BEP4.1 BT07 + BT09*
LOGIQ 9 220-50V PAL Console & Peripherals - BEP4.1 BT07 +

5177000-2
BT09*
LOGIQ 9 220-50V NTSC Console & Peripherals - BEP4.1 BT07 +

5177000-3
BT09*
*BT09 is a software-only upgrade
Special Service Tool: service key/dongle (p/n 066E0703) required for some GE proprietary operations.
9-2 Section 9-1 - Overview

GE HEALTHCARE
A R TOYGE 1/22/10
CHAPTER9.FM
Section 9-2
List of Abbreviations
Assy - Assembly
BEP - Back End Processor
CRU - Customer Replacement Unit
Ctrl - Control
FEP - Front End Processor
F.O.B - Flock of Birds or 3-D Option
FRU 1 - Replacement part available in parts hub
FRU 2 - Replacement part available from the manufacturer (lead time involved)
LCD - Liquid Crystal Display
Int - Internal
I/O - Input/Output
PWA - Printed Wire Assembly
Recv - Receive
XFRMR - Transformer
Chapter 9 9-3
1/18/10
P
GE H
EALTHCARE
Section 9-3
Console View
Left Front Rear Right

Figure 9-1 Console Views
Table 9-3 Parts by Table Numbers
Part Table Name Table Number Part Table Name Table Number
Table 9-20
External Covers Table 9-4 Back End Processor Assemblies Table 9-21
Table 9-22
BEP Base Image Load Matrix - BEP 1 and 2.x Table 9-23
Additional Console Hardware Table 9-5 BEP Base Image Load Matrix - BEP 3.x/4.x Table 9-24
Software Tools Table 9-25
Table 9-26
Table 9-27
Operator I/O Mechanical Parts Table 9-6 Peripheral Cables Table 9-28
Table 9-29
Table 9-30
Bumper Kit, Frogleg FC200086 Table 9-7 Power Distribution Table 9-31
Operator Panel Brackets Table 9-8 Air Distribution Parts Table 9-32
Gas Spring Table 9-9 Voice Scan Table 9-33
Monitor Assembly - Standard Table 9-10 Wireless Interconnect Table 9-34
Monitor Assembly - 17 LCD Table 9-11

4 D Parts Table 9-35
Monitor Assembly - 19 LCD Table 9-12
Operator Control Panel Assembly - Upper Table 9-14 Continuous Wave Doppler Components Table 9-36
Table 9-15
Operator Control Panel Assembly - Lower Approved Peripherals Table 9-37
Table 9-16
Front End Processor Assembly Table 9-17 User Documentation Table 9-38
I/O Interfaces Table 9-18 Available Probes Table 9-39
3-D Externals Table 9-19 Software/Probe Compatibility Matrix Table 9-40
9-4 Section 9-3 - Console View

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
Section 9-4
External Covers
101
101A 107
102
102A
105
105A
103
103A
106
103B
104
104A
104B 108
108A
109 110
109A 110A
111
Figure 9-2 External Covers
Chapter 9 9-5
1/18/10
P
GE H
EALTHCARE
Section 9-4 External Covers (contd)
Table 9-4 External Covers
Item Part Name Part Number Description Qty CRU FRU
101 Top Cover FB307383 Replaced with FC307772 1 - N
101A Top Cover FC307772 Replaces FB307383 1 - 1
102 Front Cover FC307771 Cover only 1 - 1
102A Front Cover Assembly FC200076 with Two Labels, Apply the Appropriate Label 1 - 1
103 Right Side Cover FC307422 Cover only 1 - 1
103A Right Side Cover Assembly FC200074 with bumper - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 1
with bumper and GE Logo. If ordering to replace

103B Right Side Cover Assembly FC200422 non-logo cover, also order FC200421 and replace 1 - 1
set
104 Left Side Cover FC307773 Cover only 1 - 1
104A Left Side Cover Assembly FC200073 with bumper - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 1
with bumper and GE Logo. If ordered to replace

104B Left Side Cover Assembly FC200421 non-logo cover, also order FC200422 and replace 1 - 1
set
105 Rear Cover FC307776 Cover only 1 - 1
105A Rear Cover Assembly FC200077 with bumper - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 1
106 Rear Filter Cover FB200385 with brackets - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 1
107 Footrest Bumper FB307387 1 - 1
108 Color Printer Cavity Filler Insert FB307990 Replaced with FC307785 1 - N
108A Color Printer Cavity Filler Insert FC307785 Replaces FB307990 1 - 1
109 B/W Printer Cavity Filler Insert FB307989 Replaced with FC307784 1 - N
109A B/W Printer Cavity Filler Insert FC307784 Replaces FB307989 1 - 1
110 VCR Cavity Filler Insert FB307988 Replaced with FC307783 1 - N
110A VCR Cavity Filler Insert FC307783 Replaces FB307988 1 - 1
111 Filter Media FB307903 Dust Filter - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 Y 1
9-6 Section 9-4 - External Covers

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
Section 9-5
Additional Console Hardware
146
145
151 151A 152
145A
148
148A
147 144 149 143

150 150A 150B 142
147A
149A
141
142A
Figure 9-3 Additional Console Hardware
Chapter 9 9-7
1/18/10
P
GE H
EALTHCARE
Section 9-5 Additional Console Hardware (contd)
Table 9-5 Additional Console Hardware
141 Caster Hub Caps 2293008-5 Need to order 2 per caster, adhesive mounting 1 - 1
Does Not Have Pedal Activated Swivel Lock

Assembly. Manual Swivel Lock
142 Rear Casters (wheels) 2293008-3 2 - 1
- Same as Vivid 7 -
Also order FC200829
Wooden wedge and bevel edge board

142A Rear Caster Replacement Tool FC200829 2 - 1
rear caster replacement tools
Includes Swivel Lock Assembly

143 Front Casters (wheels) 2293008-2 2 - 1
- Same as Vivid 7 -
144 Shelf Cover 2291452 1 - 1
145 TV/TR Probe Holder Front 2291455 1 - 1
145A TV/TR Probe Holder Rear 2299040 1 - 1
146 Pocket Shelf Mat 2291453 1 - 1
147 Under Shelf Cover 2291454 1 - 2
147A Under Shelf Cover 2291454-2 BT06 and later 1 - 2
148 Right Probe Holder Assembly 2299038 1 - 1
148A Right Probe Holder Assembly - DSB 5212181 BT07 and later with 19 LCD only - Dark Steel Blue 1 - 1
149 Left Probe Holder Assembly 2299039 1 - 1
149A Left Probe Holder Assembly - DSB 5212272 BT07 and later with 19 LCD only - Dark Steel Blue 1 - 1
*Need to order GE Logo Decal 2269030-15 or

150 Gel Warmer Assembly * see note 2291461 1 - 1
L9 Logo Decal 5255441
150A GE Logo Decal for Gel Warmer 2269030-15 Must order when replacing Gel Warmer 1 - 1
150B L9 Logo Decal for Gel Warmer 5255441 Must order when replacing Gel Warmer 1 - 1
151 Gel Warmer Power Source 2329637 12VDC Power Source - Obsolete (See FMI 70183) 1 - N
151A Gel Warmer Power Source 2329637-3 6VDC Power Source (BT06 and earlier) 1 - 1
Gel Warmer and Subwoofer Power Dual Out Power Supply & Gel Warmer
152 5133204-6 1 - 1
Supply (BT06 and later)
9-8 Section 9-5 - Additional Console Hardware

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
Section 9-6
Operator I/O Mechanical Parts
173
177 176 170
172 171
175 175A
179
180
181 185
182 182A
183
183A
184
178
Figure 9-4 OP I/O Mechanical Parts
Chapter 9 9-9
1/18/10
P
GE H
EALTHCARE
Section 9-6 Operator I/O Mechanical Parts (contd)
Table 9-6 Operator I/O Mechanical Parts
Top Console Upper Casting

170 2331665 Assembly for Service 1 - 2
Assembly
Top Console Lower Casting

171 2331858 Assembly for Service 1 - 2
Assembly
172 Frogleg (complete) FB200340 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 2
goes on back/top half of Frogleg arms

173 Frogleg Bumper Kit FC200086 1 - 1
- Same as Vivid 7 -
175 Rear Handle Assembly FB200406 with cable wrap hooks - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 1
175A Rear Handle Assembly - DSB 5199876 BT07 and later with 19 LCD only - Dark Steel Blue 1 - 1
176 Brake Lock Pedal FB307407 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 1
177 Directional Lock Pedal FB307409 Swivel Lock Pedal 1 - 1
178 Upper Column Cover FC307787 1 - 1

Part of Kit
Column Cover Kit FC200088
178 Lower Column Cover FC307779 1 - 1
179 Top Console Lock Assembly FB200350 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 2
180 Lock Release FB200920 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 2
181 X-Y Release Handle FB307297 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 2
182 Z-Release Handle FB307296 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 2
182A Z-Release Handle - DSB 5213108 BT07 and later with 19 LCD only - Dark Steel Blue 1 - 2
183 Main Handle with Label FC200131 Front Handle with Label in center 1 - 1
183A Main Handle - DSB 5213255 BT07 and later with 19 LCD only - Dark Steel Blue 1 - 1
184 Pedal Assembly FB200595 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 1
Wire used when operating vertical movement of

185 Wire Cable, Gas Spring FB307375 1 - 2
Top Console - Same as Vivid 7 -
Needed on some models to keep the frogleg from

rubbing on the operator console
186 Frogleg Shim Kit 5116529 Kit contains two .635 mm washers and one 1mm 1 - 1
washer See Section 8-20 "Frog Leg Angle
Adjustment" on page 8-92
188 Subwoofer Speaker Assembly 5133204-2 1 - 1
189 Speaker Harness 5133204-3 1 - 1
190 Speaker Grill 5133204-4 1 - 1
191 Knob 5133204-5 1 - 1
9-10 Section 9-6 - Operator I/O Mechanical Parts

1/18/10
GE H EALTHCARE
Table 9-6 Operator I/O Mechanical Parts (Continued)
- Same as Vivid 7 -
Brake mechanism - Left Connecting threaded rod between front brake and caster.
192 FB307471 1 - 1
Rod Also order Parking Brake Pedal and Front Bumper
screws as necessary
- Same as Vivid 7 -
Brake mechanism - Right threaded rod between front brake and caster
193 FB307472 1 - 1
Connecting Rod Also order Parking Brake Pedal and Front Bumper
screws as necessary
194 Brake mechanism - Parking Brake 080X0612 - Same as Vivid 7 - Brake mechanism 1 - 1
Pedal screws
195 Brake mechanism - Front Bumper 080X0612 - Same as Vivid 7 - Brake mechanism - 1 - 1
screws
Chapter 9 9-11
1/18/10
P
GE H
EALTHCARE
9-6-1 Bumper Kit, Frogleg
5
1
Figure 9-5 Bumper Kit, Frogleg, Base Seen From Above
Table 9-7 Bumper Kit, Frogleg FC200086
1 BUMPER CRASH PAD - Bumper Crash Rear 1 - N
2 BUMPER INNER BOSS - - 1 - N
3 BUMPER RIGHT FROGLEG - - 1 - N
4 BUMPER LEFT FROGLEG - - 1 - N
5 BUMPER INNER BOSS CRASH - - 2 - N
9-12 Section 9-6 - Operator I/O Mechanical Parts

1/18/10
GE H EALTHCARE
Section 9-7
Operator Control Panel Brackets
191 Bracket on units built before Mid-2002.

Replaced by Item # 192.
192
190
193
194
194A
Figure 9-6 Operator Panel Brackets
Table 9-8 Operator Panel Brackets
190 Storage Tray Bracket 2306018 1 - 2
191 Upper Casting Bracket 2291449 1 - 2
192 U Bracket 2330476 U Shaped Bracket, Nut is Attached to Casting 1 - 2
193 TV/TR Front Bracket 2306021 1 - 2
Does Not Include s

194 Bulkhead Bracket 2305886 1 - 2
Through BT03 with SVGA Style
194A Bulkhead Bracket 5119174 BT04 with DVI Style 1 - 1
Chapter 9 9-13
1/18/10
P
GE H
EALTHCARE
Section 9-8
Gas Spring
WARNING WHEN THE TOP CONSOLE IS IN ITS LOCKED POSITION, THE GAS SPRING IS
COMPRESSED AND STORES MECHANICAL ENERGY. DURING NORMAL OPERATION
THE TOP CONSOLE, THE WEIGHT OF THE MONITOR AND THE MECHANICAL FORCE
OF THE GAS SPRING ARE IN BALANCE. TAKE CARE IF/WHEN YOU ACTIVATE THIS
GAS SPRING. PERSONAL INJURY CAN OCCUR AFTER THE PANEL IS REMOVED AND
THE SPRING PRESSURE IS RELEASED. TAKE CARE WHEN YOU REPAIR THE
ELEVATION ASSEMBLY.
1 1A
Figure 9-7 Gas Spring
Table 9-9 Gas Spring
- Same as Vivid 7-
BT04 and earlier
1 Gas Spring 080X4500 NOTE: BT01/02/03 consoles may have been 1 - 1
factory-upgraded to LCD. In this case, use part
5160374.
For CRT or LCD, BT06 and later

NOTE: BT01/02/03 consoles may have been
1A Gas Spring (BT06) 5160374 1 - 1
factory-upgraded to LCD. In this case, use part
5160374.
9-14 Section 9-8 - Gas Spring

1/18/10
GE H EALTHCARE
Table 9-9 Gas Spring (Continued)
2 Socket, Wire Cross Spring FB307376 Socket for Gas Spring release cable 1 - 1
3 Spring for Release Wire 080X4010 1 - 1
4 Nipple Screws 080X4530 1 - 1
Chapter 9 9-15
1/18/10
P
GE H
EALTHCARE
Section 9-9
Monitor Assembly
9-9-1 CRT Monitor Assembly
252
259
253
256 258
251
257
260
254
255
Figure 9-8 Monitor Assembly - Standard
Table 9-10 Monitor Assembly - Standard
251 Open Frame Monitor 2283334-4 - Same as Vivid 7 & LOGIQ 7- 1 - 1
- Same as Vivid 7 & LOGIQ 7-

252 Monitor Cable Assembly 2304171 1 - 2
see Callout 545 on page 9-44
253 Speaker and Mounting Bracket Kit 2297882 2 - 2
254 Monitor Tilt/Swivel/Male Post 2284225 Neck Assembly 1 - 2
255 Monitor Rear Cover Assembly 2303930 Assembly with Speaker Grills 1 - 2
256 Monitor Left Speaker Grill 2279675 Labeled as the LEFT Speaker Grill 1 - 2
257 Monitor Right Speaker Grill 2279676 Labeled as the RIGHT Speaker Grill 1 - 2
Covers the screws on each side in the back of the

258 Monitor Screw Caps (covers) 2303932 2 - 2
cover - Same as Vivid 7 & LOGIQ 7-
259 Monitor Front Bezel Assembly 2303929-2 Includes three logos Vivid 7, LOGIQ 7 and LOGIQ 9 1 - 2
260 Monitor Switch Assembly 2297050 User Switch Assembly 1 - 2
9-16 Section 9-9 - Monitor Assembly

1/18/10
GE H EALTHCARE
9-9-2 Monitor Assembly - 17 LCD
261 261A 263 264 265
270
266
262
269
268 267
269A
272 271
Figure 9-9 Monitor Assembly - LCD 17
Table 9-11 Monitor Assembly - 17 LCD
261 17 inch LCD Flat Panel Display 5125393 Going obsolete. If unavailable, use 5169935-2 1 - 1
261A 17 inch LCD Flat Panel Display 5169935-2 1 - 1
262 17 inch Speaker Set 5132576 1 - 1
263 17 inch Panel Front LCD 5132572 1 - 1
264 17 inch Panel Rear LCD 5132573 1 - 1
265 17 inch Rear Cover VESA LCD 5166624 BT06 and later 1 - 1
266 17 inch Mic & Switch Assembly LCD 5137744 1 - 1
267 17 inch LCD ARM 5130651 17 LCD Arm Assembly with (4) cables 1 - 1
268 17 inch LCD Arm Gas Spring 5224462 1 - 1
269 LCD Video Card 5111298 Matrox card - If no longer available, order 5111298-2 1 - 1
269A LCD Video Card 5111298-2 Matrox card 1 - 1
270 17 inch LCD Cables (4) 5135957 1 - 1
271 17 inch Spiral Wrap - 1/2 5152397 1/2 - Power and DVI HDMI cables 1 - 1
272 17 inch Spiral Wrap - 3/8 5152399 3/8 - Speaker and Ground cables 1 - 1
273 17 inch LCD Adapter 5135957-6 HDMI to DVI-I adapter 1 - 1
Chapter 9 9-17
1/18/10
P
GE H
EALTHCARE
9-9-3 Monitor Assembly - 19 LCD
276 277 280
277A 285
278
286 286A 288

287
281 282 283 284
281A 282 283A 284A

283B
279
Figure 9-10 Monitor Assembly - 19 LCD
Table 9-12 Monitor Assembly - 19 LCD
19 LCD Monitor,
276 19 inch LCD Monitor 5212808 also order (1) 46-208758P1 ty wrap and (1) 1 - 1
46-208747P1 ty wrap mount
277 19 inch LCD Rear Cover 5199018 Rear Cover 1 - 1
277A 19 inch LCD Rear Cover Screw 46-312358P36 Screw for Rear Cover 1 - 1
278 Adaptor Power Supply Assy 5212977 Power Supply, Ty wraps 1 - 1
279 19 inch LCD Speaker Assy 5199460 19 LCD Speaker Assembly 1 - 1
280 19 inch LCD ARM 5212677 19 LCD Arm Assembly 1 - 1
Microphone Cable
281 19 inch LCD Mic Adaptor Cable 5198235-2 1 - 1
crosses up to 5256603
281A 19 inch LCD Mic Adaptor Cable 5256603 Microphone Cable, alternate to 5198235-2 1 - 1
Video Cable, also order (2) 46-208758P1 ty wraps,

282 19 inch LCD Video Cable 5214911 1 - 1
crosses up to 5256600
9-18 Section 9-9 - Monitor Assembly

1/18/10
GE H EALTHCARE
Table 9-12 Monitor Assembly - 19 LCD (Continued)
Video Cable, also order (2) 46-208758P1 ty wraps,

282A 19 inch LCD Video Cable 5256600 1 - 1
alternate to 5214911
DC Power Cable, also order (1) 46-208758P1 ty wrap,

283 19 inch LCD DC Power 5212254 1 - 1
crosses up to 5256601 and 5256601-1
DC Power Cable, alternate to 5212254,

283A 19 inch LCD DC Power 5256601 1 - 1
obsolete, use 5256601-1
283B 19 inch LCD DC Power 5256601-1 DC Power Cable, alternate to 5212254 1 - 1
284 19 inch LCD Speaker Cable 5198216 Speaker Cable, crosses up to 5256602 1 - 1
284A 19 inch LCD Speaker Cable 5256602 Speaker Cable, alternate to 5198216 1 - 1
285 19 inch LCD Arm Adaptor Assy 5220151 Arm Adaptor Assy - Bushing and Screw 1 - 1
286 19 inch LCD AC Power Cable 5198490 Power Cable AC, crosses up to 5256605 1 - 1
286A 19 inch LCD AC Power Cable 5256605 Power Cable AC, alternate to 5198490 1 - 1
19 inch Subwoofer Ground Adapter between subwoofer/gel warmer PS

287 5234477 1 - 1
Reference Cable and gel warmer
LCD power cable (longer) used on BT01, BT02, BT03

288 19 inch LCD AC Power Cable 5256605-2 1 - 1
LCD factory upgrades
Chapter 9 9-19
1/18/10
P
GE H
EALTHCARE
Section 9-10
Operator Control Panel Assembly
9-10-1 Upper Op Panel
201 201A 201B 201C 201D 201E
203 203A
204
Inside 205
Touch Panel
Assembly
202 202A 202B
Figure 9-11 Operator Control Panel Assembly (Op I/O) - Upper
Table 9-13 Console/Operator Panel Compatibility Matrix
Console BT01/02/03
Type - OR -
BT01/02/03 console upgraded to BT04/06/07 Forward Production
FRU BT07 and Later BEP 4.1 BEP 3.x BT07/BT09 CRU
2188902-3 (obsolete)
Upper Operator Panel 2404652-3 (obsolete)
2188902-13 (obsolete) 2404652 -103 -
Assembly 2404652-13
2188902-33
Lower Operator Panel

2188902-xx 2404652-xx -
Assembly
2188902-6 (obsolete)
LCD Backlight Inverter 2404652-6 -
2188902-16
TGC (Slide Pot) PWA 2188902-7 2404652-7 -
Bezel - Upper Op Panel 2188902-15 -
Slide Pot Knobs 5115063 Y
9-20 Section 9-10 - Operator Control Panel Assembly

1/18/10
GE H EALTHCARE
Section 9-10 Operator Control Panel Assembly (contd)
Table 9-14 Operator Control Panel Assembly - Upper
201 Upper Operator Panel Assembly 2188902-3 Obsolete - use 2188902-13 1 - N
has USB port A

201A Upper Operator Panel Assembly 2188902-13 1 - 1
Use 2188902-33 (when 2188902-13 no longer available)
has USB port - new style spacer between bezel &

201B Upper Operator Panel Assembly 2188902-33 touchpanel 1 - 1
Replaces 2188902-13
BT04 Only - with simplified cable interface.

201C Upper Operator Panel Assembly 2404652-3 If unavailable, use 2404652-13. 1 - 1
Must be used with lower op panel 2404652-2
BT04 and later consoles

201D Upper Operator Panel Assembly 2404652-13 Must be used with BEP4.1 (LVDS) or BEP 3.x 1 - 1
Must be used with lower op panel 2404652-2
Must use with BEP4.0 (DVI)

201E Upper Operator Panel Assembly 2404652-103 1 - 1
Must be used with lower op panel 2404652-xx
Use with 2188902-3 or -13

202 LCD Backlight Inverter 2188902-6 1 - 1
When depleted, use 2188902-16
BT04 and later - Use with 2404652-3 or 2404652-13

202A LCD Backlight Inverter 2404652-6 1 - 1
Cannot be used with 2188902 series op panels
202B LCD Backlight Inverter 2188902-16 Backward compatible with 2188902-6 1 - 1
Circuit board slide pot - For use with Upper Op Panel

203 TGC (Slide Pot) PWA 2188902-7 1 - 1
2188902-3 or 2188902-13
Circuit board slide pot - Use w/Upper Op Panel

203A TGC (Slide Pot) PWA 2404652-7 1 - 1
2404652-3 or -13
204 Bezel - Upper Operator Panel 2188902-15 1 - 1
205 Slide Pot Knobs 5115063 Group of ten knobs on TGC PWA 1 - 1
Chapter 9 9-21
1/18/10
P
GE H
EALTHCARE
9-10-2 Lower Operator Panel
211 211A
211B 211C
217
211D 211E
216
224
212 212A 212B 212C
213 213A 213B 225
214 214A 214B
222 222A 223 223A 215 215A 215B
Figure 9-12 Operator Control Panel Assembly (Op I/O) - Lower
Table 9-15 Operator Control Panel Assembly - Lower
- Obsolete -
211 Lower Operator Panel Assembly 2188902-2 1 - N
use 2188902-32
With Standby. Backward compatible.

211A Lower Operator Panel Assembly 2188902-12 R3.X.X Software and above MUST USE this part. 1 - N
When depleted, use 2188902-32.
211B Lower Operator Panel Assembly 2188902-32 BT03 lower op panel with 4D markings on buttons 1 - 1
BT04 with simplified cable interface

Can only be used with upper op panel 2404652-xx
211C Lower Operator Panel Assembly 2404652-2 (May also need A/N Keyboard 2404652-4 1 - 1
if Upper Op Panel is Rev1)
Includes new BT07 and later F5 and F6 keytops

Can only be used with upper op panel
2404652-1xx
211D Lower Operator Panel Assembly 2404652-12 1 - 1
(May also need A/N Keyboard 2404652-14
if Upper Op Panel is Rev1)
When depleted, use 2404652-32
Lower OP Panel Assembly BT07 and later.

Includes 2404652-15 trackball.
Backward compatible with 2404652-12, -2
211E Lower Operator Panel Assembly 2404652-32 1 - 1
Must be used with upper op panel:
2404652-3, -13, or -103
May be used with BEP 3.x, BEP 4.0 or BEP 4.1
Alpha Numeric Keyboard

212 A/N Keyboard - English 2188902-4 R3.X.X Software MUST USE 2188902-14 1 - N
Obsolete - use 2188902-14
With Standby. Backward compatible.

R3.X.X Software MUST USE this part
212A A/N Analog Keyboard - English 2188902-14 When depleted, use 2404652-4 or 2404652-14. 1 - N
Do NOT use 2188902-14 in 2404652-x op panel.

1/18/10
GE H EALTHCARE
Table 9-15 Operator Control Panel Assembly - Lower (Continued)
BT04 and BT06 improved back lighting

212B A/N Analog Keyboard - English 2404652-4 When depleted, use 2404652-14. 1 - 1
Backward compatible with 2188902-x op panel.
Includes new BT07 and later F5 and F6 keytop.

212C A/N Analog Keyboard - English 2404652-14 1 - 1
Backward compatible with 2188902-x op panel.
213 A/N Keyboard - Russian 2188902-20 As required 1 - 1

213A A/N Keyboard - Russian 2404652-20 1 - 1
213B A/N Keyboard - Russian 2404652-50 Includes new BT07and later F5 and F6 keytops 1 - 1
214 A/N Keyboard - Greek 2188902-21 As required 1 - 1

214A A/N Keyboard - Greek 2404652-21 1 - 1
214B A/N Keyboard - Greek 2404652-51 Includes new BT07and later F5 and F6 keytops 1 - 1
215 Trackball 2188902-5 When depleted, use 2404652-15. 1 - 1
215A Trackball Assembly 2404652-5 When depleted, use 2404652-15. 1 - 1
215B Trackball Assembly 2404652-15 Backward compatible with 2404652-5, 2188902-5 1 - 1
216 4D Probe Holder 5111708 1 Y 1
217 Bezel - Lower Operator Panel 2188902-11 1 - 1
222 A/N Keyboard - Swedish 2404652-22 Use 2404652-52 (when 2404652-22 stock is depleted) 1 - 1
222A A/N Keyboard - Swedish 2404652-52 Includes new BT07 and later F5 and F6 keytops 1 - 1
223 A/N Keyboard - Norwegian 2404652-26 Use 2404652-56 (when 2404652-26 stock is depleted) 1 - 1
223A A/N Keyboard - Norwegian 2404652-56 Includes new BT07 and later F5 and F6 keytops 1 - 1
Replacement part for all lower op panels:

224 Single Shaft Encoder 066E2306 1 - 1
e.g. 2188902-32, 2404652-2, 2404652-12
Replacement part for all lower op panels:

225 Concentric Shaft Encoder 2404652-19 1 - 1
e.g. 2188902-32, 2404652-2, 2404652-12
Chapter 9 9-23
1/18/10
P
GE H
EALTHCARE
9-10-3 Lower Op Panel - Buttons and Knobs
218 218A
222
219
221
219A
220
Figure 9-13 Operator Control Panel Assembly (Op I/O) - Lower

1/18/10
GE H EALTHCARE
9-10-3 Lower Op Panel - Buttons and Knobs (contd)
Table 9-16 Operator Control Panel Assembly - Lower - Buttons and Knobs
218 Universal Knob Kit 2384216 Obsolete - order 5114700 1 - N
All blue gumdrop knobs - Replaces 2384216

This Kit contained; 4 small domed knobs, 4 large
218A Universal Knob Kit 5114700 1 Y 1
dished knobs, 6 large domed knobs
same as Vivid 7
Programmable Button Keytop Key caps for customer to customize the P1 - P4 key
219 2188902-9 1 Y 1
Kit caps
219A Button Cap Kit 2188902-10 Includes all buttons (except thumb buttons) 1 Y 1
Key Ring and Operator Panel Includes: 4 Mode select knobs (Inner & Outer
220 2188902-8 1 - N
Mode select Knob Kit pieces) and Key Ring
Mode Select Knob Kit with 3D/ Four Mode Select Knobs (M, PW, CF, B) and 3D/4D
221 2404652-8 1 Y 1
4D Button with XYZ markings Grey Bowl Button
222 F5 and F6 A/N keytops 2404652-9 F5 and F6 A/N keytops, along with key puller 1 Y 1
Chapter 9 9-25
1/18/10
P
GE H
EALTHCARE
Section 9-11
Front End Processor Assembly
406A
407 404 403 402 402A
406
BT01
Card
Rack
401
408
409
409A 409C
409D
405 405A
BT02, BTCard Rack

411 through 411F Empty Card Slot
412 413 414 402B 402C 402D

406B
402E
406C
405B
405C
410
405D
410A
409B 409E
408A
409F 409G 409H
Figure 9-14 Front End Processor Assembly
9-26 Section 9-11 - Front End Processor Assembly

1/18/10
GE H EALTHCARE
Section 9-11 Front End Processor Assembly (contd)

Table 9-17 Front End Processor Assembly
Applications Software R2.X.X R3.X.X R4.X.X R6.X.X R7.X.X/R9.X.X
H4906HW / H4906HY(FOB) (BT02 - BT07/09 upgrade)

LOGIQ 9
Model Number
5176631 (BT03 - BT07/09 upgrade)

5177411 (BT04 - BT07/09 upgrade)
5177466 (BT06 - BT07/09 upgrade)
2188900-X (BT01 - BT03 upgrade)
2351100-X (BT02 - BT03 upgrade)
2188900-X (BT01 - BT04 upgrade)

2351100-X (BT02 - BT04 upgrade)
2375600-X (BT03 - BT04 upgrade)
5143928 (BT03 - BT06 upgrade)

5143923 (BT04 - BT06 upgrade)
5177000-x (BT07/BT09)
2188900-X (BT01)
2351100-X (BT02)
2375600-X (BT03)
2404587-X (BT04)
5150000-x (BT06)
Q C F
Part Part t R R
Item Name Number Description y U U
401 Back Plane 2260219 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Front End Back Plane 1 - 2
Scan Control Board. Use

402 SCB1 2260214-2 X 2260214-3 if stock is 1 - 1
depleted
Scan Control Board -

402A SCB1.1 2260214-3 X1 X 1 - 1
Required if using EBM Board
402B SCB2 2365739 X X X Has BT03 Functionality - 1 - N

Obsolete
Included power up transmit

402C SCB2 2365739-3 X X X X X X 1 - N
overload fix - Obsolete
Additional transmit overload

402D SCB2-4 2365739-4 X X X X X X X 1 - N
fix during run time - Obsolete
402E SCB2-5 2365739-5 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Supervisory Circuit and 4D 1 - 1

Reset Updates.
403 BMP4 2260207 X B-Mode Processor 1 - 1
404 EQ4 2260210 X Equalization Board 1 - 1
Transmit/Delay Board. When

405 TD4 2260194-2 X X X X X X X stock depleted order 1 - 1
2260194-3
Transmit/Delay Board
405A TD4.1 2260194-3 X X X X X X X You can mix TD4s and 1 - 1
TD4.1s
New power requirements

different from TD4. Can not
mix with TD4s. Requires
FEPS3
405B TD5 2362863 X X X X X X X 1 - 1
You can mix TD5s and
TD5.1s
When stock depleted order
2386031
Chapter 9 9-27
1/18/10
P
GE H
EALTHCARE
Table 9-17 Front End Processor Assembly (Continued)

LOGIQ 9
Model Number
5176631 (BT03 - BT07/09 upgrade)

5177411 (BT04 - BT07/09 upgrade)
5177466 (BT06 - BT07/09 upgrade)
2188900-X (BT01 - BT03 upgrade)
2351100-X (BT02 - BT03 upgrade)
2188900-X (BT01 - BT04 upgrade)

2351100-X (BT02 - BT04 upgrade)
2375600-X (BT03 - BT04 upgrade)
5143928 (BT03 - BT06 upgrade)

5143923 (BT04 - BT06 upgrade)
5177000-x (BT07/BT09)
2188900-X (BT01)
2351100-X (BT02)
2375600-X (BT03)
2404587-X (BT04)
5150000-x (BT06)
Q C F
Part Part t R R
Same Function as TD5 but

405C TD5.1 2386031 X X X X X X X larger and fewer ASICs. You 1 - 1
can mix TD5s and TD5.1s
Not Backward Compatible --

405D TD6 5142651 X X X 1 - 1
Used with R6.0.0 and later.
Radio Frequency Amplifier

406 RF AMP 2260212 X X X Board 1 - N
Obsolete - Use 2341985-2
406A RF AMP1.2 2341985-2 X X X X X X X Design Improvement 1 - 1
New power requirement

different from RF AMP1.X
Requires FEPS3
406B RF AMP2 2357621 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 Must only use 5115468 T 1 - 1
Plane
Use 2357621-2 if stock
depleted
Same as RF Amp 2-2 except

has schottky diodes
406C RF AMP2-2 2357621-2 X X X X X X X X X X 1 - 1
Must use 2291656 Top
Plane
407 XDIF 2260221 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Transducer Interface Board 1 - 1
Top Plane connects XDIF to

408 Top Plane 2291656 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 RF Amp on front of cards. 1 - 1
No schotky diodes
408A Top Plane 5115468 X X X X X X Has schottky diodes 1 - 1
Front End Power Supply -

Obsolete -
When replaced with
409 FEPS 2260203 X3 2273641-3 or 2273641-4, 1 - N
requires replacement of the
Front End Card Rack Cover
in Kit 2374426

1/18/10
GE H EALTHCARE

LOGIQ 9
Model Number
5176631 (BT03 - BT07/09 upgrade)

5177411 (BT04 - BT07/09 upgrade)
5177466 (BT06 - BT07/09 upgrade)
2188900-X (BT01 - BT03 upgrade)
2351100-X (BT02 - BT03 upgrade)
2188900-X (BT01 - BT04 upgrade)

2351100-X (BT02 - BT04 upgrade)
2375600-X (BT03 - BT04 upgrade)
5143928 (BT03 - BT06 upgrade)

5143923 (BT04 - BT06 upgrade)
5177000-x (BT07/BT09)
2188900-X (BT01)
2351100-X (BT02)
2375600-X (BT03)
2404587-X (BT04)
5150000-x (BT06)
Q C F
Part Part t R R
Second Generation FEPS

Cross to a FEPS2.1 if stock is
depleted
409A FEPS2 2273641-3 X3 X X X X X X 1 - 1
May require Front End Card
Rack cover kit 2374426 if
replacing a 2260203 FEPS
Second Generation with

409B FEPS2.1 2273641-4 X3 X X X X X X Standby Capabilities cross 1 - 1
up to -6
partial latch fix (all but -5 V

409C FEPS2.5 2273641-5 X3 X X X X X X 1 - 1
analog)
Replaces FEPS2
(2273641-3) and FEPS2.1
409D FEPS2.6 2273641-6 X3 X X X X X X 1 - 1
(2273641-4)
Only applies to TD4 systems
Analog Voltages are +/- 6V

and 13V compared to +/-5v
and 12V found in FEPS,
FEPS2 and FEPS2.1
Must use in systems w/
TD5.X and RF Amp2 (DO
NOT use in R2.X.X systems
or
409E FEPS3 2376843 X X X X X X X 1 - N
Systems upgraded to BT03)
Transmit overload fix
(2376843-6): Replaces
237643 and 2376843-3, FMI
70188.
2376843-92 replaces
2376843-2 (for BT03
systems with TD5.x boards)
Partial latch fix (all but -6 V

409F FEPS3.2 2376843-2 X X X X X X X X X 1 - N
analog)
409G FEPS3.3 2376843-3 X X X X X X X X X X Replaces 2376843 and 1 - 1

2376843-2
Chapter 9 9-29
1/18/10
P
GE H
EALTHCARE

LOGIQ 9
Model Number
5176631 (BT03 - BT07/09 upgrade)

5177411 (BT04 - BT07/09 upgrade)
5177466 (BT06 - BT07/09 upgrade)
2188900-X (BT01 - BT03 upgrade)
2351100-X (BT02 - BT03 upgrade)
2188900-X (BT01 - BT04 upgrade)

2351100-X (BT02 - BT04 upgrade)
2375600-X (BT03 - BT04 upgrade)
5143928 (BT03 - BT06 upgrade)

5143923 (BT04 - BT06 upgrade)
5177000-x (BT07/BT09)
2188900-X (BT01)
2351100-X (BT02)
2375600-X (BT03)
2404587-X (BT04)
5150000-x (BT06)
Q C F
Part Part t R R
409H FEPS3.6 2376843-6 X X X X X X X X X X Replaces FEPS3 to eliminate 1 - 1

transmit overload.
Attached to side of FEP Card

FEP AC Rack, Includes Line Filter
410 Line Filter & 2315960 X X X X X X and Power Harness 1 - 1
Cable Obsolete, use 2375555
except for BT01
Backward compatible for

410A FEP AC 2375555 X X X X X X* X X X BT07 and earlier, 1 - 1
Line Filter
*except for BT01 systems.
Combined functions of EQ4

& BMP4. Positioned in the
old EQ4 Slot. Needs SCB
411 EBM 2273639-3 X2 X 1 - N
2260214-3
Obsolete - replace with
2273639-6
411A EBM 2273639-6 X X I2C Reliability Improvements 1 - 1
EBM Board Upgraded to

411B EBM1.8 2273639-5 X X X EBM2 functionality - Replace 1 - N
with EBM2, 2273639-21
Has BT03 Functionality -

411C EBM2 2273639-20 X X X obsolete - Replace with 1 - N
2273639-21
411D EBM2 2273639-21 X X X Has BT03 Functionality - I2C 1 - 1

Reliability Improvements
Has BT04 Functionality

4D Option requires
411E EBM2.5 2273639-23 X X X X 2273639-24 1 - N
Obsolete - replace with
2273639-24
Has BT04 Functionality

411F EBM2.6 2273639-24 X X X X X X X X X X X X 1 - 1
Required for 4D Option

1/18/10
GE H
A R TOYGE
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER9.FM

LOGIQ 9
Model Number
5176631 (BT03 - BT07/09 upgrade)

5177411 (BT04 - BT07/09 upgrade)
5177466 (BT06 - BT07/09 upgrade)
2188900-X (BT01 - BT03 upgrade)
2351100-X (BT02 - BT03 upgrade)
2188900-X (BT01 - BT04 upgrade)

2351100-X (BT02 - BT04 upgrade)
2375600-X (BT03 - BT04 upgrade)
5143928 (BT03 - BT06 upgrade)

5143923 (BT04 - BT06 upgrade)
5177000-x (BT07/BT09)
2188900-X (BT01)
2351100-X (BT02)
2375600-X (BT03)
2404587-X (BT04)
5150000-x (BT06)
Q C F
Part Part t R R
FEP Card
412 Cage Front 2374426 X X X X X X X X X Obsolete, use 5159491 1 - N
Cover Kit
Required if upgrading from

FEPS to FEPS2/FEP2.1
FEP Card Additional shielding around
413 Cage Front 5159491 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Top Plane and Power Supply 1 - 1
Cover Kit areas. Labels included in kit
to match FEP configuration.
Corrects barber pole artifact.
414 2373269 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Cover with power supply 1 - 1

Card Cage
shield
1
SCB1 can be used on this model number also.
2
EBM can be used on this model replacing the BMP4 and EQ4. However EBM requires SCB1.1 at a minimum.
3
FEPS2 and FEPS2.1 can be used on this model number. However, must also use FEP Card Rack Cover Kit 2374426.
4
Combination of Top Plane and RF AMP must have at least one schotky diode. Therefore, never use 2357621 and
2291656 together.
Chapter 9 9-31
1/18/10
P
GE H
EALTHCARE
Section 9-12
I/O Interfaces
301
303 302 302A
302B 302C
302D 302E
USB MODEM OPTION
INTERNAL
I/0
Connects to
Phone Line
BEP w/ Modem
MODEM
C18
w/ Modem
304
303A
Figure 9-15 I/O Interfaces
9-32 Section 9-12 - I/O Interfaces

1/18/10
GE H EALTHCARE
Section 9-12 I/O Interfaces (contd)
Table 9-18 I/O Interfaces
301 External I/O Assembly FB200198 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 1
- Same as Vivid 7 -
302 Internal I/O Assembly FB200197 1 - N
Obsolete - Use FC200423
- Same as Vivid 7 -
302A FC200423 Has gain increase for improved microphone performance 1 - N

Internal I/O Assembly
Used on BT03 and earlier
302B Internal I/O Assembly FC200695 Replaces FC200423 1 - 1
BT04 Only - Has male connector for II/O to BEP cable

302C Internal IO W/Gender change FC200503 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - N
302D Internal IO W/Gender change FC200651 Obsolete - Use FC200889 1 - N
BT04 systems and later - replaces FC200503 and

302E Internal IO W/Gender change FC200889 1 - 1
FC200651
Multi-Tech - New installation requires cable kit #2368850

303 Global Modem Assembly 2245794 1 - 1
-Same as Vivid 7 -
Includes modem 5114058, and Telco Adapter Kit

303A USB Global Modem Kit 5112680 2249450 1 - 1
Used with BEP3 only
Includes USB Modem, USB Cable, and phone cables

304 USB Modem 5114058 1 - 1
Used with BEP3 only
Chapter 9 9-33
1/18/10
P
GE H
EALTHCARE
Section 9-13
3-D Externals
470 471
Figure 9-16 3-D Externals
Table 9-19 3-D Externals
470 3-D Externals - PCI Bird Transmitter 2301019-4 Option Kit 1 - 1
471 3-D Externals - PCI Bird Receiver 2301019-5 Option Kit 1 - 1
9-34 Section 9-13 - 3-D Externals

1/18/10
GE H EALTHCARE
Section 9-14
Back End Processor Assemblies
9-14-1 BEP 1
450 451
452
454 453
Figure 9-17 BEP 1
Table 9-20 Back End Processor Assembly 1
450 Back End Processor (BEP1) 2266548-3 BEP1 - P3 Processor 1 - 1
P3 Processor with 3-D Flock of Birds option

Back End Processor (BEP1)
451 2266548-4 (PCI Bird Transmitter & Receiver NOT Included - 1 - 1
w/ 3-D Option
See Table 9-19)
Back End Processor Power

452 2348186-38 Version 2.3 For BEPs 1 & 2.X 1 - 1
Supply
Computer UPS Battery, located inside BEP Assy.

453 BEP Battery Assembly 2266548-5 Expected battery life is 1 year 1 - 2
-Same as Vivid 7 -
454 Hard Disk Drive (HDD) BEP 1 2366650 Will need to transfer mounting tray to new HDD 1 - 1
455 BIOS Blaster CD 2266548-27 BEP1 only 1 - 1
456 Battery, CMOS 2404028-7 Motherboard battery 1 - 1
BEP1 Repairable 2266548-13 BEP1 -
Chapter 9 9-35
1/18/10
P
GE H
EALTHCARE
9-14-2 BEP 2
460 460A 460B 460C 460D
463
461
469
464
465
462 466 466A
467
Figure 9-18 BEP 2
Table 9-21 Back End Processor Assembly 2
460 Back End Processor (BEP2.0) 2348186-3 P4 Processor 1 - 1
Back End Processor (BEP 2.0) P4 Processor with 3-D Flock of Birds option installed
460 2348186-4, -74 1 - 1
w/ 3-D Option (PCI Bird Transmitter & Receiver NOT Included)
460 Back End Processor (BEP2.1) 2348186-43, -73 BEP2.1 with 2.3 Power Supply 1 - 1
460 Back End Processor (BEP2.1) 2348186-44, -74 BEP2.1 Flock of Birds with 2.3 Power Supply 1 - 1
9-36 Section 9-14 - Back End Processor Assemblies

1/18/10
GE H EALTHCARE
Table 9-21 Back End Processor Assembly 2 (Continued)
460A Back End Processor (BEP2.0.1) 2348186-67, -73 BEP2.0.1w/SB0220 Audio Card 1 - 1
460A Back End Processor (BEP2.0.1) 2348186-68, -74 BEB2.0.1 w/SB0220 Audio Card with FOB 1 - 1
460A Back End Processor (BEP2.0.1) 2348186-77, -73 BEB2.0.1 w/SB0107 Audio Card 1 - 1
460A Back End Processor (BEP2.0.1) 2348186-78, -74 BEB2.0.1 w/SB0107 Audio Card w/ FOB 1 - 1
460B Back End Processor (BEP2.1) 2348186-13 P4 Processor with Digital VIC Card 1 - 1
P4 Processor (Digital VIC Card)

Back End Processor (BEP 2.1)
460C 2348186-14 with 3-D Flock of Birds option installed 1 - 1
w/ 3-D Option
(PCI Bird Transmitter & Receiver NOT Included)
460C Back End Processor (BEP2.1) 2348186-53, -73 BEP2.1 with New Sound Card 1 - 1
460C Back End Processor (BEP2.1) 2348186-54 BEP2.1 Flock of Birds with New Sound Card 1 - 1
460C Back End Processor (BEP2.1) 2348186-57 BEP2.1 w/o Base Image 1 - 1
460C Back End Processor (BEP2.1) 2348186-58 BEP2.1 w/o Base Image w/ FOB 1 - 1
With Version 2.3 Power Supply

460D Back End Processor (BEP2.2) 2348186-63, -73 1 - 1
Memory Upgrade to 768M
Back End Processor (BEP 2.2) With Version 2.3 Power Supply
460D 2348186-64 1 - 1
w/ 3-D Option Memory Upgrade to 768M
460D Back End Processor (BEP2.2) 2348186-73 BEP2.2 Sound Card Change 1 - 1
460D Back End Processor (BEP 2.2) 2348186-74 BEP2.2 Flock of Birds Sound Card Change 1 - 1
460D Back End Processor (BEP2.2) 2348186-83 BEP2.2 PC2IP II Board 1 - 1
460D Back End Processor (BEP 2.2) 2348186-84 BEP2.2 Flock of Birds PC2IP II Board 1 - 1
Back End Processor Power

461 2348186-38 Version 2.3 For BEPs 1 & 2.X 1 - 1
Supply
Computer UPS Battery, located inside BEP Assy.

462 BEP Battery Assembly 2266548-5 Expected battery life is 1 year 1 - 2
-Same as Vivid 7 -
463 Hard Disk Drive (HDD) BEP 2.x 2348186-31 Comes with bracket or mounting tray 1 - 1
464 Patient I/O Module 2348186-22 BEP 2.x Only -Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 1
465 MOD Drive 2348186-23 BEP 2.0 Only - 1.3 Gigabyte IDE - 3.5 inch 1 - 1
BEP 2.x Only -Same as Vivid 7 -

466 CD-RW Drive 2348186-37 1 - N
Obsolete - Use 2404028
BEP 2.x
466A CD-RW Drive 2348186-47 1 - N
Obsolete - Use 2404028
467 Fan 2348186-35 Mounted on BEP Chassis Cover - BEP 2.x Only 1 - 1
468 BIOS Blaster CD 2348186-27 BEP2.x only 1 - 2
469 Battery, CMOS 2404028-7 Motherboard battery 1 - 1
Chapter 9 9-37
1/18/10
P
GE H
EALTHCARE
9-14-3 BEP 3.x / 4.x
482 480
475
475A
475B
481 481A
475C
476
477
478 478A BEP3.x

479
475D
475E
475F
475G
477A
478B BEP4.x
485
486
484
Figure 9-19 BEP 3.x / 4.x

1/18/10
GE H EALTHCARE
9-14-3BEP 3.x / 4.x (contd)
Table 9-22 Back End Processor Assembly 3.x / 4.x
BEP3.0, Non-Flock of Birds 2404027-3

475 Complete assembly 1 - 1
(new PC2IPIIB) (2404027-13)
BEP3.0, with Flock of Birds 2404027-4

475A Complete assembly 1 - 1
(new PC2IPIIB) (2404027-14)
475B BEP 3.5 Non-Flock of Birds 2404027-53 Complete assembly 1 - 1
475C BEP 3.5 with Flock of Birds 2404027-54 Complete assembly 1 - 1
BEP 4.0
475D Non-Flock of Birds, (new 5162777-3 Complete assembly 1 - 1
PC2IP3)
BEP 4.0
475E with Flock of Birds, (new 5162777-4 Complete assembly 1 - 1
PC2IP3)
BEP 4.1
475F Non-Flock of Birds, (new 5162777-7 Complete assembly 1 - 1
PC2IP3)
BEP 4.1
475G with Flock of Birds, (new 5162777-8 Complete assembly 1 - 1
PC2IP3)
476 BEP 3.x/ 4.x Power Supply 2404028-4 Also compatible for BEP 4.x 1 - 1
477 PCI DGVIC Assembly 5112272 BEP 3.x only - with bulkhead board and ribbon cables 1 - 1
477A PCI DGVIC2 Assembly 5301220-2 BEP 4.x only - with bulkhead board and ribbon cables 1 - 1
478 PC2IPII card FC200312 If unavailable, use FC200656 1 - 1
478A PC2IPIIB card FC200656 BEP 3.x 1 - 1
478B PC2IP3 card 5197846 BEP 4.x only 1 - 1
Set of 2 batteries
479 Battery, BEP3.x / 4.x UPS 2404028-6 1 - 1
Expected battery life is 1 year
Hard Disk Drive (HDD) BEP 3.x /

480 2404028-2 Comes with bracket or mounting tray, and adaptor 1 - 1
4.x
BEP 3 comes with bracket or mounting tray

481 CD/DVD Drive 2404028 (LG GSA-4167B replaces the Sony CD-RW Drive) 1 - 1
Includes Patch disk for R2.x and R3.x
481A CD/DVD Drive 2404028-10 BT06 and later, BEP3.5 and later 1 - 1
482 Battery, CMOS 2404028-7 BEP3.x / BEP 4.x Motherboard battery 1 - 1
483 BEP3.x / 4.x Fan, Side Cover 2404028-5 Mounted on BEP Chassis Cover - BEP 3.x / BEP 4.x 1 - 1
484 MO Drive (External - stand 2404028-3 For use with BEP 3 - BEP 3 does not have MO Drive 1 - 1
alone)
485 Intake Filter 2404028-8 BEP3.x / BEP 4.x 1 Y 1
Chapter 9 9-39
1/18/10
P
GE H
EALTHCARE
Table 9-22 Back End Processor Assembly 3.x / 4.x (Continued)
486 Cover, FIlter 2404028-9 BEP3.x / BEP 4.x 1 Y 1
For BEP 3 motherboard reset

487 BIOS Blaster CD 5111457 1 - N
(obsolete - replaced with 5111457-3)
487A BIOS Blaster CD 5111457-3 For BEP 3.x motherboard reset 1 - 1
487B BIOS Blaster CD 5215511-1 For BEP 4.x motherboard reset 1 - 1

GE H
Table 9-23 BEP Base Image Load Matrix - BEP 1 and 2.x
Software
L9 BEP HARDWARE CONFIGURATION
EALTHCARE
Section 9-15
BEP1
2266548
2266548-2
2266548-3 BEP2.2 BEP2.2
2266548-4 BEP2.1 (For BT03) (For BT04)
Application BEP2.0.1 BEP2.0.1 BEP2.2
2266548-6 2348186-13 2348186-63 2348186-63
Software
2266548-10 BEP2.0 (Prior to BT03) (For BT03) 2348186-14 (Prior to BT03) 2348186-64 2348186-64
2266548-12 2348186-3 2348186-67 2348186-67 2348186-53 2348186-63 2348186-73 2348186-73
2266548-13 2348186-4 2348186-68 2348186-68 2348186-54 2348186-64 2348186-74 2348186-74

2266548-14 2348186-43 2348186-77 2348186-77 2348186-57 2348186-73 2348186-83 2348186-83
2266548-16 2348186-44 2348186-78 2348186-78 2348186-58 2348186-74 2348186-84 2348186-84
R2.4.0 (1) 2358135-11 2371612-13 2371612-13 NA 2371612-13 2371612-13 NA NA
R3.0.12(3) NA NA NA 2371612-15 NA NA 2371612-15 NA
R3.1.1(3) NA NA NA 2371612-15 NA NA 2371612-15 NA
R4.1.3 (4) NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 2404024-7

Chapter 9
Current (2) Base 2358135-11 2371612-13 2371612-13 2371612-15 2371612-13 2371612-13 2371612-15 2404024-7
Image Load
A R TOYGE
1/18/10
CHAPTER9.FM
9-41
P
9-42
GE H
Table 9-24 BEP Base Image Load Matrix - BEP 3.x/4.x
L9 BEP HARDWARE CONFIGURATION

EALTHCARE
Section 9-15
BEP 3 BEP 3.5 BEP 4.0 BEP 4.1

2404027-3 2404027-53 5162777-3 5162777-7
Application Software 2404027-4 2404027-54 5162777-4 5162777-8
R2.x.x(1) NA NA NA NA
R3.x.x(3) NA NA NA NA
R4.1.3(4) 2404024-8 2404024-8 NA NA

R6.0.4(5) NA 2404024-50 NA NA
R6.0.5(5) NA 2404024-50 NA NA
Software (contd)
R6.0.6(5) NA 2404024-50 NA NA
R7.0.2(6) NA 5135124-1 NA NA
R7.0.4(6) NA 5135124-1 NA NA
R7.0.5(6) NA 5135124-1 5135124-10 5135124-10

R9.0.x(7) NA 5135124-3 5135124-11 5135124-11
Current (2) Base Image Load

A R TOYGE
Section 9-15 - Software

R4.1.3(4) 2404024-8 NA NA NA
R6.0.6(5) NA 2404024-50 Rev 7 NA NA
(6) NA 5135124-1 5135124-10 5135124-10
R7.0.5
R9.x(7) NA 5135124-3 5135124-11 5135124-11
(1) Current R2.X Application Software = R2.4.0 (2322686-26).

(2) Base Image Loads for Respective BEP are Backwards compatible.
(3) Current R3.X Application Software = R3.0.11 (2322686-64); R3.0.12 (2322686-63); R3.1.0 Obsolete. See FMI 70200. See Note (3); R3.1.1 Optional FMI 70200.
(4) Current R4.X Application Software = R4.1.3 (2322686-49).
(5) Current R6.X Application Software = R6.0.4 (2322686-56), R6.0.5 (2322686-57) R6.0.6 (2322686-59) FMI 70197.
1/18/10
(6) Current R7.X Application Software = R7.0.2 (2322686-62) , R7.0.4 (2322686-66), and R7.0.5 (2322686-67).
(7) Current R9.X Application Software = R9.0.0 (2322686-70)
Note: See FMI Closure Service Note 70443 for information on late request plan.
CHAPTER9.FM
To confirm you have the most current application and baseload information, also see the latest revision of
SN 70419 - LOGIQ 9 Application/Baseload Software Matrix - 5245411-100.
1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
Section 9-15 Software (contd)
Table 9-25 Software Tools
Database Defragmentation BT04 and later.

5184818 1 - 1
Toolkit Do not leave at customer site - Multi-site use.
See SN 70447
HDD Partition Wipe Tool Kit 5329420 Do not leave at customer site - Multi-site use. 1 - 1
.
Chapter 9 9-43
1/18/10
P
GE H
EALTHCARE
Section 9-16
Interconnect Cables
9-16-1 Peripheral Cables
504

Remote
Right SONY ANALOG
517B AUDIO OUT
Left
503 B/W PRINTER
Right UP890MD
Left
AUDIO IN
A8 B/W Video In
A9
RS-232C
A6 505
517A RS-232C
A7 SONY ANALOG
VIDEO OUT
COLOR PRINTER
A2 UP-2900MD
A15 516B Video Output
A11 VIDEO IN 530
RGB & Sync
A10 516A
A1 Speaker
OP PANEL
Video / Mic Audio Amp
A3 Mic Pre Amp
A14 502 AC Power
MONITOR Op Control
A4
500
USB, +12PC, MIC IN, AUDIO OUT Video Rcvr
A5 545 USER INTERFACE

TOUCH PANEL
BEP VIDEO
C22
MONITOR
B5 C13 or D4
VIDEO
COLOR PRNT 545

D5
VIDEO
501 546 530
B6 547
Speaker
OP PANEL
B7
Video / Mic Audio Amp
B8 Mic Pre Amp
AC Power
MONITOR Op Control
B2
TOUCH PANEL
B1 BEP
TO
INTERNAL I/O C22
VIDEO
500A Video Rcvr
BOARD B3 MONITOR
VIDEO USER INTERFACE
C13 or D4
B9
BT04 SYSTEMS
B4 548
BT06 and later only

INTERNAL I/O BOARD Speaker and AC Power
interrupted by Subwoofer
electronics
Figure 9-20 Peripheral Cable Diagram
9-44 Section 9-16 - Interconnect Cables

1/18/10
GE H EALTHCARE
9-16-1 Peripheral Cables (contd)
Table 9-26 Peripheral Cables
Top Console and Monitor to IIO, AC Ctrl, BEP and

Gas spring
Console Flex Cable Assembly

500 FB200320* 1 - 1
(complete)
*When replacing FB200320 in BT03 or earlier

systems, also order 064G1768. Over-molded SVGA
connector requires longer screws (064G1768) to
attach to bulkhead.
Extended-length Jack/Lock Longer screws required for modified connector (when

064G1768 1 - 1
Screws replacing FB200320 in BT03 or earlier systems).
500A Cable, Main harness w/ DVI 5119218 1 - 1
BT04 or later
RGB & Sync From PCVIC to Color Printer - #1

-BEP-D5 to RGB Color Printer - Same as Vivid 7 -
501 Color Printer Video Cable FB200789 1 - 1
#2 - Same as Vivid 7 -
502 Color Printer Control Cable FB200790 1 - 1
Chapter 9 9-45
1/18/10
P
GE H
EALTHCARE
Table 9-26 Peripheral Cables (Continued)
#3 - IIO-A1 to BW/Color Printer - Same as Vivid 7 -
503 BW/CP Printer Cable FB200791 1 - 1
504 VCR Cable Harness 2371911 1 - 1
Combines FB200792 & FC200041 & FC200042 &

FC200043 & FC200044
Same as Vivid 7
#4 - IIO-A2 to VCR - Same as Vivid 7 -
505 VCR Remote Control Cable FB200792 1 - 1
#16 - IIO-A10 to VCR IN - Same as Vivid 7 -
516A SVHS Cable, Shielded FC200041 2 - 1
#16 - IIO-A10 to VCR Out- Same as Vivid 7 -
516B SVHS Cable, Shielded FC200042 2 - 1
#17 - IIO-A6/A7 to VCR IN CH1(L)/CH2(R)

- Same as Vivid 7 -
517A Audio Cable, Shielded FC200043 2 - 1

1/18/10
GE H EALTHCARE
Table 9-26 Peripheral Cables (Continued)
#17 - IIO-A6/A7 to VCR OutCH1(L)/CH2(R)

- Same as Vivid 7 -
517B Audio Cable, Shielded FC200044 2 - 1
530 Speaker Cable - Bulkhead 2319024 1 - 1
- Same as Vivid 7 & LOGIQ 7-
545 Monitor Cable Assembly 2304171 1 - 2
546 cable, internal microphone 5119245 1 - 1
547 adapter, DVI to SVGA w mic 5118498 1 - 1

(CRT only)
Found Behind OPIO
548 adapter, SVGA to DVI 5119495 1 - 1

(CRT only)
Found on Back of BEP
Chapter 9 9-47
1/18/10
P
GE H
EALTHCARE
9-16-2 Peripheral Cable - Analog Color Printer with BEP3

Remote
Right SONY ANALOG
Left
AUDIO OUT
B/W PRINTER
Right UP890MD
Left
AUDIO IN
A8 B/W Video In
A9
RS-232C
A6
A7 RS-232C SONY ANALOG
VIDEO OUT COLOR PRINTER
A2 UP-2900MD
A15 UP-51MD
Video Output
A11 VIDEO IN
75 ohm Off S-Video In
A10
If No VCR
use A10
A1
A3
A14
A4 549
549
A5
INTERNAL I/O BOARD
Figure 9-21 Analog Color Printer W/BEP3
Table 9-27 Analog Color Printer W/BEP3
549 Cable, S-Video 5113288 1 - 1

1/18/10
GE H EALTHCARE
9-16-3 Peripheral Cable - USB Printer Cables
BW PRINTER UP-D895
BW
PRINTER
BEP SONY
2353228
UP-D895
C21
560
COLOR PRINTER UP-D50
A5 COLOR
BEP
2354406 PRINTER
C20
561 SONY
UP-D50
COLOR PRINTER UP-D21, 23, 55
COLOR
BEP PRINTER
2353228 SONY
562
C20 UP-D21, 23, 55
Figure 9-22 USB Printer Cables
Table 9-28 USB Printer Cables
560 CABLE, USB 2.0 COMPLIANT 1.0M 2353228 BEP C21 to BW Printer Sony UP-D895 1 - 1
561 USB TO SCSI ADAPTER 2354406 From C20 to SCSI for Sony UP-D50 input 1 - 1
BEP C20 to Color Printer Sony UP-D21, UP-D23,

562 CABLE, USB 2.0 COMPLIANT 1.0M 2353228 1 - 1
UP-D55
Chapter 9 9-49
1/18/10
P
GE H
EALTHCARE
9-16-4 AC Distribution Cables
551
To Color Printer
To Wireless Mic
To Color Printer
To VCR
550
To BW Printer
BT04 or Systems with 4D
To Color Printer
Reserved for Wireless Mic
AC
To VCR
DISTRIBUTION
BOX 540
To BW Printer
Thru BT03
AC CONTROL Part of Main Cable #500

BOX P7
To Op Panel
XFMR BOX P5
P8
515 AC Serial
Adapter Modem
P6 P9
514 513
P10 To BEP
541 542A 542M P11 To Card Rack

to P100
541A P101
INTERNAL I/O
A14 507 Fan

507A
A13 A16 A15 A12
Figure 9-23 AC Distribution Cable Diagram

1/18/10
GE H EALTHCARE
9-16-4 AC Distribution Cables (contd)
Table 9-29 AC Distribution Cables
Part
Item Part Name Number Description Qty CRU FRU
#7 - IIO-A15 to ACP-F8
507 Fan Speed Control Cable FB200795 1 - 1
#7 - IIO-A15 to ACP-F8
Fan Speed Control Cable if EQ4
507A PWA (2260210) is Rev K or 2333827 1 - 1
earlier
Includes FB200802-1, FB200802-2, FB200802-3 &

513 AC-Distribution Cable Kit FB200802 FB200802-4 1 - 1
#14 - ACT-M1 to ACP-F6 - Same as Vivid 7 -

514 AC Mains 1 Cable FB200803 1 - 1
#15 - ACT-M2 to ACP-F7 - Same as Vivid 7 -
515 AC Mains 2 Cable FB200804 1 - 1
540 AC Peripheral Cable 070C5080 AC to Color & B/W Printers and VCR 3 - 1
541 AC Power Cord - USA 2162856 Obsolete - replaced by 2286301 1 Y N
541A AC Power Cord - USA 2286301 1 Y 1
If unavailable, order 5148381
Obsolete
542 AC Power Cord - Outside USA 2118615 1 Y N
542A AC Power Cord - Outside USA 070C3194 1 Y 1

Order only if a dedicated cord (5148381-x) for the
specific country is unavailable.
H4000ZA
542B AC Power Cord - North America 5148381 1 Y 1
H4000ZK
542C AC Power Cord - Japan 5148381-2 1 Y 1
Chapter 9 9-51
1/18/10
P
GE H
EALTHCARE
Table 9-29 AC Distribution Cables (Continued)
Part
H4000ZB
542D AC Power Cord - Europe 5148381-3 1 Y 1
H4000ZD
542E AC Power Cord - UK/Ireland 5148381-4 1 Y 1
H4000ZC
542F AC Power Cord - China 5148381-5 1 Y 1
H4000ZL
542G AC Power Cord - Switzerland 5148381-7 1 Y 1
H4000ZE
542H AC Power Cord - Denmark 5148381-8 1 Y 1
542J AC Power Cord - Israel 5322309 1 Y 1
542K AC Power Cord - India 5323270 1 Y 1
542L AC Power Cord - Argentina 5323275 1 Y 1
AC Power Cord - Australia

542M 5323129 1 Y 1
(Orange)

1/18/10
GE H EALTHCARE
Table 9-29 AC Distribution Cables (Continued)
Part
550 Cable, 3 Head AC Power FC200571 1 - 1
551 Cable, AC Power Split Y 5112631 1 - 1
Required If Using 3 Head AC Power Cable and Voice

Command
Chapter 9 9-53
P
9-54
A4
GE H
PC POWER FOR INTERNAL I/O CIRCUITS
PC-VIC & PC2IO Cable # 500
TC ON SW1
A5
PC Cable # 510 B6 USB; AUDIO TO OP PANEL; MIC FROM OP PANEL
9-16-4
PC POWER D2 TO OP
POWER PC ON/OFF PANEL
"On Path"
PS_ON B5 Rack Power
"Off Path"
12C A2
PATIENT D1
RS232(X3)
50F
RS232 #1
EALTHCARE
TO VCR
50F
I/O SVGA OUT 2 Cable # 511
S/C VIDEO OUT A3 Cable # 504
RS232 #2 SPARE
Cable # 500
PC SVGA D4 TC ON SW1 Cable # 502
OUT 1 TO IMAGE
ON/OFF 12C MIC EN BW REMOTE; COLOR REMOTE1,2
MONITOR 12C
RGB D5 PORT
VCR AUDIO EN
OUT TO COLOR SVIDEO L TO BW PRT
SCAN Cable # 501 PRINTER
CONVERT COMP VIDEO FROM COLORPRT A1 Cable # 503
TO
SVIDEO C FROM COLORPRT
D3 PRINTERS
SVGA IN
Cable # 508 SVIDEO L FROM COLORPRT
NON-PCI SLOT VIDEO

SWITCH
SVIDEO C FROM VCR A11
TO POWER C12
SUPPLY SVIDEO L FROM VCR SVIDEO FROM VCR
Cable # 531 B9 12C to 12C

RS232
Cable # 516B
SVIDEO C TO VCR A10
SVIDEO L TO VCR SVIDEO TO VCR
Cable # 516A
PCI SLOT 4 SVGA VIDEO
RS232 (X4) SVIDEO C

PC2IP
AC Distribution Cables (contd)
I2C C16
68M
RS422 Cable # 520 EXTERNAL I/O
PSON PC2IP
POK TO FRONT END SVIDEO L SVGA VIDEO
PCI SLOT 3 CARD RACK OUT
OPTIONAL 3 D CARD SCB
SVIDEO OUT
PCI BIRD
BW VIDEO OUT
PCI SLOT 2 PS_ON
COMP VIDEO VIDEO OUT
Cable # 529 TRIGGER

AUDIO LINE IN (BLU) C10 B4

C11
MIC IN (PINK) AUDIO R
C9 TRIGGER
AUDIO LINE OUT (GRN)
AUDIO L
SOUND CARD
10/100bT
PCI SLOT 1 MIC FROM OP PANEL
A R TOYGE
Cable # 500 SERIAL

PCI DIGITALVIDEO (LVDS) C18 AUDIO TO OP PANEL
ADVANCED INPUT DEVICES TO LCD
MIC EN FOOTSWITCH
FLAT PANEL
12C 12C
AGP SLOT PORT REMOTE EXP 1
Section 9-16 - Interconnect Cables

REMOTE EXP 2
C13
USB
Cable # 508
VCR AUDIO EN
Figure 9-24 BEP 1.0 and II/O Cabling Diagram

PHONE
AGP VIDEO
PCI SLOT 5 Cable # 519 B3
C17
10/100bT
FROM MODEM
C4 Cable # 518 B1 TO MODEM

USB1
B2
Cable # 506
C3
1/18/10
USB2
A6
B7 A7
2266548-3 C6
COM1
BEP 1.0 without 3D option AUDIO TO VCR
Cable # 509 A8 Cable # 517A
B8 A9
C7
2266548-4 COM2
CHAPTER9.FM
BEP 1.0 with 3D option AUDIO FROM VCR

OPTION
Cable # 517B
PARALLEL C5
KEY
BEP1.0 See # 536 INTERNAL I/O
TO FRONT END CARDRACK VIA BACKPLANE
A4
GE H
PC-VIC & PC2IO Cable # 500

TC ON SW1
A5
Cable # 510 B6 USB; AUDIO TO OP PANEL; MIC FROM OP PANEL
9-16-4
PC PC POWER D2 TO OP
"On Path"
PS_ON B5 Rack Power
"Off Path"
12C A2
PATIENT D1
RS232(X3)
50F
RS232 #1
EALTHCARE
TO VCR
50F
RS232 #2 SPARE
Cable # 500
PC SVGA D4 TC ON SW1 Cable # 502
OUT 1 TO IMAGE
ON/OFF MONITOR 12C MIC EN BW REMOTE; COLOR REMOTE1,2
12C
RGB D5 PORT
TO ANALOG VCR AUDIO EN
OUT SVIDEO L TO BW PRT
SCAN Cable # 501 COLOR PRINTER
CONVERT COMP VIDEO FROM COLORPRT A1 Cable # 503
TO
SVIDEO C FROM COLORPRT
D3 PRINTERS
SVGA IN
SVIDEO L FROM COLORPRT
Cable # 508
VIDEO
SWITCH
PCI SLOT 6 SVIDEO C FROM VCR A11
SVIDEO L FROM VCR SVIDEO FROM VCR
NOT USED Cable # 531 B9 12C to 12C Cable # 516B

RS232
SVIDEO C TO VCR A10
PCI SLOT 5 SVIDEO L TO VCR SVIDEO TO VCR
Cable # 516A
C16 SVGA VIDEO
RS232 (X4)
I2C PC2IP
68M
RS422 Cable # 520 SVIDEO C
PSON
POK TO FRONT END

PC2IP EXTERNAL I/O
CARD RACK
PCI SLOT 4 SCB SVIDEO L SVGA VIDEO
OUT
UPS Control to the C12
BEP Power Supply SVIDEO OUT
PCI SLOT 3 BW VIDEO OUT

PS_ON
Cable # 500
PCI DIGITALVIDEO (LVDS) C18 TO LCD
ADVANCED INPUT DEVICES TRIGGER
FLAT PANEL B4
Chapter 9
PCI SLOT 2 AUDIO R
TRIGGER
AUDIO L
Optional 3D Interface Card
10/100bT
PCI SLOT 1
MIC FROM OP PANEL
A R TOYGE
C10
Cable # 529 SERIAL
AUDIO LINE IN (BLU) AUDIO TO OP PANEL
C11
MIC IN (PINK)
C9 MIC EN FOOTSWITCH
12C 12C
PORT REMOTE EXP 1
SOUND CARD REMOTE EXP 2
AGP SLOT
USB
NOT USED
VCR AUDIO EN
Figure 9-25 BEP 2.0 and II/O Cabling Diagram

Cable # 509 B8 PHONE
C13
AGP VIDEO
Cable # 519 B3
C17
10/100bT
C4 B1 FROM MODEM
USB1
C3 Cable # 518 B2
USB2 TO MODEM
B7 Cable # 506
C6
1/18/10
COM1
A6
2348186-3 C5
See # 536 A7
PARALLEL
BEP 2.0 without 3D option OPTION KEY AUDIO TO VCR
PORT
C18 Cable # 534 A8 Cable # 517A
2348186-4 USB3 A9
CHAPTER9.FM
BEP 2.0 with 3D option C19 AUDIO FROM VCR

USB4 NOT USED
C20 Cable # 517B
USB5 NOT USED
USB6 C21
BEP2.0 NOT USED INTERNAL I/O
TO FRONT END CARDRACK VIA BACKPLANE
9-55
P
A4
9-56
GE H
DG-VIC & DG2IO Cable # 500

TC ON SW1
A5
PC Cable # 510 B6 USB; AUDIO TO OP PANEL; MIC FROM OP PANEL
D2
PC POWER TO OP
9-16-4
"On Path"
PS_ON B5 Rack Power
"Off Path"
12C A2
D1
PATIENT RS232(X3)
50M
RS232 #1
TO VCR
50M
EALTHCARE

RS232 #2 SPARE
SVGA TC ON SW1 Cable # 502
PC OUT 1 D4 Not Used
ON/OFF 12C MIC EN BW REMOTE; COLOR REMOTE1,2
12C
RGB D5 PORT
TO ANALOG VCR AUDIO EN
OUT SVIDEO L TO BW PRT
DVI to Cable # 501 COLOR PRINTER
Analog COMP VIDEO FROM COLORPRT A1 Cable # 503 TO ANALOG
SVIDEO C FROM COLORPRT PRINTERS
D3
DVI IN Not used with
SVIDEO L FROM COLORPRT Digital Peripherals
Cable # 508A
VIDEO
SWITCH
PCI SLOT 6 SVIDEO C FROM VCR A11
SVIDEO L FROM VCR SVIDEO FROM VCR

NOT USED Cable # 531 B9 12C to 12C Cable # 516B
RS232
SVIDEO C TO VCR A10
PCI SLOT 5 SVIDEO L TO VCR SVIDEO TO VCR
Cable # 516A
C16 SVGA VIDEO
RS232 (X4)
I2C PC2IP
68M
RS422 Cable # 520 SVIDEO C
PSON
POK TO FRONT END
PC2IP EXTERNAL I/O
CARD RACK
PCI SLOT 4 SCB SVIDEO L SVGA VIDEO
OUT
UPS Control to the C12
BEP Power Supply SVIDEO OUT
PCI SLOT 3 BW VIDEO OUT

PS_ON
Cable # 500
PCI DIGITALVIDEO (LVDS) C18 TO LCD
ADVANCED INPUT DEVICES FLAT PANEL TRIGGER

B4 MIC TO BEP
PCI SLOT 2 AUDIO R

TRIGGER
AUDIO L
Optional 3D Interface Card
10/100bT
A R TOYGE
PCI SLOT 1
MIC FROM OP PANEL
C10
Cable # 529 SERIAL
AUDIO LINE IN (BLU) AUDIO TO OP PANEL
C11
MIC IN (PINK)
LINE OUT FROM BEP

C9 MIC EN FOOTSWITCH
12C
Section 9-16 - Interconnect Cables

12C
PORT REMOTE EXP 1
Cable # 500
SOUND CARD
LINE IN TO BEP
TO IMAGE REMOTE EXP 2
AGP SLOT MONITOR USB
ADD CARD - DIGITAL C30
VIDEO OUT Cable # 509 B8 VCR AUDIO EN
Figure 9-26 BEP 2.1/2.2 and II/O Cabling Diagram

PHONE
C13
MOTHERBOARD AGP VIDEO -
Cable # 519 B3
C17
10/100bT
MODEM
C4 B1
w/ Modem (option)
USB1
C3 Cable # 518 B2
USB2
1/18/10
B7 Cable # 506
C6
COM1
A6
C5 A7
2348186-13 PARALLEL Cable # 509
See # 536
OPTION KEY AUDIO TO VCR
BEP 2.1 without 3D option PORT
Cable # 534
CHAPTER9.FM
C18 A8 Cable # 517A

USB3 A9
2348186-14
C19 AUDIO FROM VCR
BEP 2.1 with 3D option USB4 NOT USED Cable # 533
C20 TO DIGITAL Cable # 517B
USB5
COLOR PRINTER
BEP2.1 USB6 C21 INTERNAL I/O
TO DIGITAL
B/W PRINTER
Cable # 532 TO FRONT END CARDRACK VIA BACKPLANE
1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
See # 536
(LVDS BEP 4.1) or (DVI BEP 4.0)
ADVANCED (INPUT DEVICES)
BEP 3.x and BEP 4.x

PCI DIGITAL VIDEO
Figure 9-27 BEP 3.x/BEP 4.x and II/O Cabling Diagram
Chapter 9 9-57
1/18/10
P
GE H
EALTHCARE
Table 9-30 Internal I/O Cables
Part
From Front Panel to Front End Processor - #5

Not used on BT04
505 Doppler Cable FB200793 1 - 1
From Modem to External I/O - #6

Packaged with FB200802-1 (modem power cable)
and used with Serial Modem Option kit
506 Standard Modem Cable FB200794 1 - 1
BEP AGP Video to PCVIC Card SVGA - #8 - BEP-C13

to BEP-D3 - Same as Vivid 7 -
508 Monitor Cable Standard FB200796 1 - 1
Interface from AGP Slot ADD card to DGVIC

508A Digital Video Interface Cable 2354056 1 - 1
BEP 2.1 & BEP3
#9 - IIO-B7 to BEP-C6 or IIO-B8 to BEP-C7

Used with 2364642 in BEP 2.x Systems
- Same as Vivid 7 -
509 RS232 Com 1/2 Cable FB200797 2 - 1
#10 - IIO-B6 to BEP-D2 - Same as Vivid 7 -
Internal I/O-PC2IO Power/

510 FB200798 1 - 1
Control Cable
Internal I/O-PC2IO Signals

511 FB200799 #11 - Obsolete Use FC200286- 1 - N
Cable
511A Internal I/O-PC2IO Signals FC200286 1 - 1

Cable
#11A BEP D1 to IIO B5 Same as Vivid 7 -
Improved flex and length
Cable, Signals, IIO-BEP Male to

511B FC200495 1 - 1
Male
BEP D1 to IIO B5 Needed if using BEP3 w/ Internal I/O

FC200503

1/18/10
GE H EALTHCARE
Table 9-30 Internal I/O Cables (Continued)
Part
Cable, Signals, IIO-BEP Male to

511C 2404419 1 - 1
Female
BEP D1 to IIO B5 Needed if using BEP3 w/internal
I/O FC200423 or FC200446
518 USB A-B Cable 070D2802 2 - 1
519 Ethernet Cat-5 Cable 070D2902 1 - 1
PCI Bus Extension Cable BEP to FEP - #20

- Same as Vivid 7 -
520 PCI Cable, AMP 974298 070M0016 1 - 1
#29 - IIO-B4 to BEP-AUD - Same as Vivid 7 -
529 Internal I/O-PC Audio Cable FB200748 1 - 1
531 UPS Control Cable FC200016 1 - 1
From USB #6 to Digital B/W Printer - BEP 2.1

532 Digital B/W Printer Cable 1 - 1
Straight USB, gray in color
2363062
From USB #5 to Digital Color Printer (USB to SCSI)
533 Digital Color Printer Cable 1 - 1
BEP 2.1, Right angle USB, black in color
Chapter 9 9-59
1/18/10
P
GE H
EALTHCARE
Table 9-30 Internal I/O Cables (Continued)
Part
From USB #3 To Serial Cable To Internal I/O B7 -

Obsolete
Use 2364642 and FB200797
534 USB to Serial Adapter Cable 2348186-26 1 - N
From USB #3 To Serial Cable FB200797 To Internal I/O

B7 (Ext I/O Com Port)
BEP 2.0 & 2.1 & BEP3
534A USB to Serial Adapter Cable 2364642 1 - 1
535 USB to SCSI Adapter 2354406 From USB to SCSI for Sony UP-D50 input 1 - 1
Parallel port hasp to BEP for Options
536 Option Key 2320432 1 - 1

1/18/10
GE H EALTHCARE
Section 9-17
Power Distribution Modules
608 608A 609
604A
604
603
603A
601
602
Figure 9-28 Power Distribution
Table 9-31 Power Distribution
Item Part Name Part Number Description Qty FRU
Card Rack Power Supply PWA

601 See Item 409 Power Supplies are mounted on the circuit board 1 1
Assembly (FEPS)
602 AC Transformer Assembly FB200581 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 2
603 AC CTRL ASSY, 100-120 V FC200079 - Same as Vivid 7 - Obsolete Use 2399515 1 N
603A AC CTRL ASSY, 100-120 V 2399515 100-120 VAC Systems 1 1
604 AC CTRL ASSY, 220-240 V FC200081 - Same as Vivid 7 - Obsolete Use 2399515-2 1 N
604A AC CTRL ASSY, 220-240 V 2399515-2 220-240 VAC Systems 1 1
Attached to side of FEP Card Rack, Includes Line Filter

608 FEP AC Line Filter & Cable 2315960 and Power Harness 1 N
Obsolete, use 2375555
608A FEP AC Line Filter 2375555 1 1
AC Controller Clamp
609 ACC CLAMP 068E4000 1 1
- Same As Vivid 7-
Chapter 9 9-61
1/18/10
P
GE H
EALTHCARE
Section 9-18
Air Distribution
652 652
653
651
Figure 9-29 Air Distribution Parts
Table 9-32 Air Distribution Parts
651 Fan Assembly FB200580 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 1
652 Air Intake Cover FB307379 Replaced by FC307778 1 - 1
652 Air Intake Cover FC307778 Replaces FB307379 1 - 1
653 Filter FB307903 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 Y 1
9-62 Section 9-18 - Air Distribution

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
Section 9-19
Voice Scan
750 756 757 764 760

765
770
766
765A 768 761 761A

772
762
763 769
773 767 767A
750A 755
Figure 9-30 Voice Scan Replacement Parts
Chapter 9 9-63
1/18/10
P
GE H
EALTHCARE
Section 9-19 Voice Scan (contd)
Table 9-33 Voice Scan
750 Wireless Receiver 2383770 Obsolete - use 5115162 Must also order 5115164 1 Y N
750A Wireless Receiver 5115162 wireless receiver generation 2 1 - 1
755 Tray for Wireless Receiver 2377599 1 - 2
Foam - Wireless Receiver

756 2377600 1 - 2
Bottom
757 Foam - Wireless Receiver Top 2377601 1 - 2
760 Battery Charger 2383775 1 Y 1
Yellow 9V Rechargeable Battery

761 Battery - 9V NiMH 2383776 1 - N
Obsolete - use 5121291
761A Battery - 9V NiMH 5121291 Green 9V Rechargeable Battery 1 Y 1
762 Wireless Microphone 2383779 Over the ear style. 1 Y 1
763 Wired USB Headset 2386172 Obsolete - use 5159489 1 - N
764 Wireless Microphone Care Kit 2386142 wind screens, clip, and cable only 1 - 1
765 Beltpack Transmitter - Wireless 2383773 Obsolete - use 5116453 Must also order 5115236 1 - N
wireless transmitter generation 2

765A Beltpack Transmitter - Wireless 5116453 1 Y 1
(with charging contacts)
For 2383775 only

766 Adapter Kit - 240Vac 2390117 1 - 1
For 120V order 2383775
767 AC power adapter, US 5116448 For 5116446 only 1 - 1
767A AC power adapter, foreign 5116450 For 5116446 only 1 - 1
Rechargeable Battery Pack for

768 5116454 1 Y 1
Transmitter
769 Battery recharger station 5116446 1 - 1
770 Antenna 5115891 For 2383770 and 2383773 only 1 - N
rechargeable AA batteries (pack of 4) for generation 2

772 Rechargeable AA Batteries 5115236 1 Y 1
transmitter
773 Wired Headset 5159489 Andrea VS Headset 1 Y 1
9-64 Section 9-19 - Voice Scan

1/18/10
GE H EALTHCARE
9-19-1 Voice Scan Cabling
WIRELESS MIC OPTION
AC
Distribution
Box
2383769
2384314 or
NOTE: 2383767 5115164
BT04 has AC AC
Distribution Adapter
Cable
751 751B Wireless Mic
754 758 Receiver
2383768 2XXXXX
759 USB Audio
Adapter AF OUT
MIC IN
C19 753
AUDIO OUT NOT USED
2384449
BEP
2383765
752
Figure 9-31 Wireless Interconnect
Table 9-34 Wireless Interconnect
751 Battery Eliminator Cable 2383769 For use with 2383770 1 - 1
Dummy AA Battery Power dummy AA battery power supply for wireless

751B 5115164 1 - 1
Supply receiver generation 2
752 Audio to USB Adapter 2383765 1 - 1
753 Audio Cable from Receiver 2383768 1 - 1
754 Power Cable for Receiver 2383767 1 - 1
758 AC Adapter - 9V, 1.1A 2384314 1 - 1
759 USB Extension Cable 2384449 1 - 1
Chapter 9 9-65
1/18/10
P
GE H
EALTHCARE
Section 9-20
4D Components
800 800A
805
803 804
802
801
Figure 9-32 4D Components
Table 9-35 4 D Parts
800 4D Motor Controller 2372904 BT06 systems and prior 1 - 1
BT07 and later systems, or systems upgraded to BT07

800A 4D Motor Controller 5180588 1 - 1
or BT09, only
801 Cable, Bracket to Probe 2384183 1 Y 1
Cable, Motor Controller/Bracket

802 2375551 1 - 1
assembly
803 Cable, Motor Controller to IIO 2375552 1 - 1
804 Cable, USB to Motor Controller 2353228 1 - 1
805 Cable, Motor Controller Power 2375553 1 - 1
9-66 Section 9-20 - 4D Components

1/18/10
GE H EALTHCARE
Section 9-21
Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler Components
820
Figure 9-33 Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler Components
Table 9-36 Continuous Wave Doppler Components
820 CW Card 2380188 1 - 1
CW Cable 2380188-13 1 - 1
Mu Metal Shield 2380188-11 inserts under BEP for noise reduction 1 - 1
Chapter 9 9-67
1/18/10
P
GE H
EALTHCARE
Section 9-22
Peripherals
Table 9-37 Approved Peripherals
Part Name Part Number Description Qty CRU FRU
2117635 H4700TC - NTSC

Sony VCR 9500 M2D 1 - N
(T3306ER) Obsolete - order 5122171
H45001PA - PAL Version (Europe)

Sony VCR 9500 MDP2 1 - N
Obsolete - order 5122172
2207254
Sony 2900 Color Video Printer H4700TD 1 - 2
(T3306PT)
Sony Color Printer UP51MDU 2281966 Analog (large footprint) H4700TH 1 - 2
Sony B/W Video Printer

2288502 Analog E8210B 1 - 2
UP895MD
3 Position Footswitch FB200723 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 Y 2
Digital B/W Printer

Sony UP-D895MD 2358588 1 - 2
Obsolete - order 5171608
Replaces Sony UP-D895MD (2358588)

Sony UP-D897MD 5171608 1 - 1
Part includes drivers for earlier BTs
Digital Color Printer

Sony UP-D50MD 2358596 1 - 1
Obsolete - crosses up to 5116559
Digital Color Printer (small footprint)

Sony UP-D21MD 2358449 1 - -
Obsolete - crosses up to 2401985
Sony UP-21MD 2351318 Analog Color Printer (small footprint) 1 - -
Sony UP-D23MD 2401985 Digital, A6 (small footprint) - -
Sony UP-21 & D21 &

2351082 Mounting plate, cover tray and screws 1 - -
UP-D23MD Adapter kit
HP6122 2378741 Deskjet Printer Y -
Digital, Replaces 2358596.

Sony UP-D55MD 5116559 - -
If replacing 2358596, also order 5123707 Adapter Kit
HP-6540 5121837 1 - -
HP-5650 5121839 1 - -
Includes: FC307635 plastic cover/tray,

UP-D55 Adapter Kit 5123707 - -
46-312358P36 M4 screws and 068X0200 long strap
Mitsubushi NTSC VCR 5122171 for USA NTSC with RS232C-USB - -
Mitsubushi PAL VCR 5122172 for Europe PAL with RS232C-USB - -
Panasonic LQ-MD800P DVR Video Recorder

DVR Video Recorder 5120592 1 - 1
BT07 and later only
Cable, USB Right-Angle 5181607 USB A to B for DVR 1 - 1
Canon Pixma MP610 External

KTZ2300182 Offline Report/Image Color Printer 1 - 1
Printer
Canon Pixma MP610 External

5315370 Cable for Canon Pixma MP610 External Printer 1 - 1
Printer Cable
9-68 Section 9-22 - Peripherals

1/18/10
GE H EALTHCARE
Section 9-23
Customer Documentation
Table 9-38 User Documentation
BT02 BT03 BT04 BT06 BT07 BT09

Description Part Number Part Number Part Number Part Number Part Number Part Number FRU
Basic User
2309819-100 2384455-100 5113776-100 5140804-100 5174158-100 5338262-100 N
Manual (BUM)
ARM 2309835-100 2384454-100 5113777-100 5140805-100 5173359-100 5338271-100 N
QG 2309820-100 2384458-100 5113779-100 5140807-100 5173872-100 N/A N
RN 2320595-100 2384452-100 5113780-100 5140811-100 5174065-100 5338272-100 N
eDocs 2384456-200 5113783-200 5140813-200 5173842-200 5338273-100 N
Kit 2392066 5113787-1 5140830-1 5173499-1 5338275-1 N
QC1 2309821-100 2384457-100 5113784-100 5140808-100 5173599-100 5173599-100 N
QC2 5113785-100 5140809-100 5173473-100 5173473-100 N
QC3 5113786-100 5140810-100 5174064-100 5174064-100 N
AIUM 2163920-100 2163920-100 2163920-100 2163920-100 2163920-100 2163920-100 N
Install 22361715-100 22361715-100 22361715-100 22361715-100 22361715-100 22361715-100 N
UG 2388578-100 5113778-100 5140812-100 5174247-100 5338270-100 N
Add 2389047-100 5113781-100 N/A N/A N/A N
OLH 2384453-100 5113782-300 5140806-100 5174102-100 5338264-100 N
Service 2294853-100 2294853-100 2294853-100 2294853-100 2294853-100 2294853-100 N
Install Cklist 2399069-100 2399069-100 2399069-100 N
Chapter 9 9-69
1/18/10
P
GE H
EALTHCARE
Section 9-24
Probes
901 902 903 904 905 924 906
908 909 910 911 912

907
913 914
921
917
916
923
915 918
920
919
Figure 9-34 LOGIQ 9 Probes

9-70 Section 9-24 - Probes
1/18/10
GE H EALTHCARE
Section 9-24 Probes (contd)
Table 9-39 Available Probes
901 3.5C 2050357 H4901PE - PDI Y 1
902 M7C 2294514 H40412LC Y 1
903 E8C 2294641 H40412LE Y 1
904 7L 2294521 H40412LF Y 1
905 10L 2294523 H40412LG Y 1
906 M12L 2294511 H40412LD Y 1
907 i12L 2264883 H4012L Y 1
908 4S 2295658 H4901PB - PDI Y 1
909 10S 2298589 H4901PC - PDI Y 1
910 8C 2348094 H40412LJ Y 1
911 TCD 3S 2323337 H4701SZ - PDI Y 1
912 3.5CS 2051858 H40412LK Y 1
Large round blue locking knob used on some probes

913 Probe Latching Mechanism 2363861 - 1
L3, L5, L7, V3, V4, V7
H4904PC
914 4C Probe 5123455 Kit includes Y 1
Probe 2401359, ICD card and shipping carton
KTZ195893
915 4D3C-L Probe H44801G Y 1
(KTI195894)
KTZ156836
916 4D10L Probe H44801GB Y 1
(KTI156837)
KTZ195859
917 4DE7C Probe H44801GA Y 1
(KTI195860)
918 CW 5 MHz Probe 2380188-5 Non-imaging Doppler Probe Y 1
919 CW 8 MHz Probe 2380188-8 Non-imaging Doppler Probe Y 1
4D8C KTZ156959 H44801GZ Y 1
920 t739L 2259246 H40212LM Y 1
921 i739L 2259206 H40212LF Y 1
923 4D16L KTZ156972 H44801GY Y 1
924 9L 5149427 H40412LT Y 1
M7C Tru3D Sensor Bracket 2325300 - -
M12L Tru3D Sensor Bracket 2325301 - -
4S Tru3D Sensor Bracket 2325302 - -
E8C Tru3D Sensor Bracket 2325303 - -
10L Tru3D Sensor Bracket 2325304 - -
Chapter 9 9-71
1/18/10
P
GE H
EALTHCARE
Section 9-24 Probes (contd)
Table 9-40 Software/Probe Compatibility Matrix
Item Part Name Part Number 2.x 3.x 4.x 6.x 7.x/9.x
901 3.5C 2050357 x x x x x
902 M7C 2294514 x x x x x
903 E8C 2294641 x x x x x
904 7L 2294521 x x x x x
905 10L 2294523 x x x x x
906 M12L 2294511 x x x x x
907 i12L 2264883 x x x x x
908 4S 2295658 x x x x x
909 10S 2298589 x x x x x
910 8C 2348094 NA x x x x
911 TCD 3S 2323337 NA x x x x
912 3.5CS 2051858 NA x x x x
914 4C Probe 5123455 NA NA x x x
KTZ195893
915 4D3C-L Probe NA NA x x x
(KTI195894)
KTZ156836
916 4D10L Probe NA NA x x x
(KTI156837)
KTZ195859
917 4DE7C Probe NA NA x x x
(KTI195860)
918 CW 5 MHz Probe 2380188-5 NA NA x x x
919 CW 8 MHz Probe 2380188-8 NA NA x x x
4D8C KTZ156959 NA NA NA x x
920 t739L 2259246 NA NA NA x x
921 i739L 2259206 NA NA NA x x
923 4D16L KTZ156972 NA NA NA x x
924 9L 5149427 NA NA NA x x
9-72 Section 9-24 - Probes

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER10.FM
Chapter 10
Care & Maintenance
Section 10-1
Overview
10-1-1 Periodic Maintenance Inspections
It has been determined by engineering that your LOGIQ 9 system does not have any high wear
components that fail with use, therefore no Periodic Maintenance Inspections are mandatory. Some
Customers Quality Assurance Programs may require additional tasks and or inspections at a different
frequency than listed in this manual.

This chapter describes Care & Maintenance on the scanner and peripherals. These procedures are
intended to maintain the quality of the ultrasound systems performance. Read this chapter
completely and familiarize yourself with the procedures before performing a task.

10-1 Overview 10-1
10-2 Why do Maintenance 10-2
10-3 Maintenance Task Schedule 10-2
10-4 Tools Required 10-4
10-5 System Maintenance 10-5
10-6 Using a Phantom 10-10
10-7 Electrical Safety Tests 10-11
10-8 When There's Too Much Leakage Current... 10-27
ULTRASOUND INSPECTION CERTIFICATE 10-28
10-9 Site Log 10-29
CAUTION Practice good ESD prevention. Wear an antistatic strap when handling electronic parts and
even when disconnecting/connecting cables.
DANGER THERE ARE SEVERAL PLACES ON THE BACKPLANE, THE AC DISTRIBUTION,

AND DC DISTRIBUTION THAT ARE DANGEROUS. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT
THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG AND OPEN THE MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER
BEFORE YOU REMOVE ANY PARTS. BE CAUTIOUS WHENEVER POWER IS
STILL ON AND COVERS ARE REMOVED.
CAUTION Do not pull out or insert circuit boards while power is ON.
Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance 10-1

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER10.FM
CAUTION Do not operate this unit unless all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. System
performance and cooling require this.
Section 10-2
Why do Maintenance
10-2-1 Keeping Records
It is good business practice that ultrasound facilities maintain records of quality checks and corrective
maintenance. The Ultrasound Inspection Certificate (provided on page 10-28) provides the customer
with documentation that the ultrasound scanner is maintained on a periodic basis.
A copy of the Ultrasound Periodic Maintenance Inspection Certificate should be kept in the same room
or near the scanner.
10-2-2 Quality Assurance

In order to gain accreditation from organizations such as the American College of Radiology (USA), it
is the customers responsibility to have a quality assurance program in place for each scanner. The
program must be directed by a medical physicists, the supervising radiologist/physician or appropriate
designee.
Routine quality control testing must occur regularly. The same tests are performed during each period
so that changes can be monitored over time and effective corrective action can be taken.
Testing results, corrective action and the effects of corrective action must be documented and
maintained on the site.
Your GE service representative can help you with establishing, performing and maintaining records for
a quality assurance program. Please contact us for coverage information and/or price for service.
Section 10-3
Maintenance Task Schedule
10-3-1 How often should care & maintenance tasks be performed?
The Care & Maintenance Task Schedule (provided on page 10-3) specifies how often your LOGIQ 9
should be serviced and outlines items requiring special attention.
NOTE: It is the customers responsibility to ensure the LOGIQ 9 care & maintenance is performed
as scheduled in order to retain its high level of safety, dependability and performance.
Your GE Service Representative has an in-depth knowledge of your LOGIQ 9 ultrasound scanning
system and can best provide competent, efficient service. Please contact us for coverage information
and/or price for service.
The service procedures and recommended intervals shown in the Care & Maintenance Task Schedule
assumes that you use your LOGIQ 9 for an average patient load (10-12 per day) and not use it as a
primary mobile unit which is transported between diagnostic facilities.
NOTE: If conditions exist which exceed typical usage and patient load, then it is recommended to
increase the maintenance frequencies.
10-2 Section 10-2 - Why do Maintenance

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER10.FM
10-3-1 How often should care & maintenance tasks be performed? (contd)
Table 10-2 Customer Care Schedule

Per Facilities
Service at Indicated Time Daily Weekly Monthly QA Program Notes
Clean Probes * * or before each use
Clean Probe Holders

more frequently depending on
Clean Air Filter your environment
Inspect AC Mains Cable Mobile Unit Check Weekly
Inspect Cables and Connectors

Clean Console
Clean Monitor and Touch Panel
Inspect Wheels, Casters, brakes and
Swivel Locks
Mobile Unit Check Daily
Check Control Panel Movement Mobile Unit Check Daily

also after corrective
Console Leakage Current Checks maintenance
Peripheral Leakage Current Checks maintenance
Surface Probe Leakage Current Checks maintenance
Endocavity Probe Leakage also after corrective
Current Checks
maintenance
Transesphongeal Probe Leakage also after corrective
Current Checks
maintenance
Surgical Probe Leakage also after corrective
Current Checks
maintenance
Measurement Accuracy Checks maintenance
Probe/Phantom Checks maintenance
Functional Checks maintenance

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER10.FM
Section 10-4
Tools Required
10-4-1 Special Tools, Supplies and Equipment
10-4-1-1 Specific Requirements for Care & Maintenance
Table 10-3 Overview of Requirements for Care & Maintenance
Tool Part Number Comments

Digital Volt Meter (DVM)
46194427P231 Kit includes antistatic mat, wrist strap and cables for 200 to 240
46194427P279 V system
Anti Static Kit 46194427P369 3M #2204 Large adjustable wrist strap
46194427P373 3M #2214 Small adjustable wrist strap
46194427P370 3M #3051 conductive ground cord
46194427P278 120V
Anti Static Vacuum Cleaner
46194427P279 230V
Air Filter Section 9-18 air intake
Safety Analyzer 46285652G1 DALE 600 KIT (or equivalent) for electrical tests
E7010GG 60 minute
SVHS VCR Cassette
E7010GF 120 minute
SVHS VCR Head Cleaner See VCR user manual for requirements
DVD-R
See DVR user manual for requirements
DVD-RAM
E8381AA blank 128 M disk

3.5 MOD MEDIA E8381AB blank 230 M disk
5.25 MOD Media
3.5 MOD Media Cleaner 2117811 cleans the diskettes
5.25 MOD Media Cleaner cleans the diskettes
3.5 MOD Head Cleaner Kit 2148392 cleans the drive heads
5.25 MOD Head Cleaner Kit cleans the drive heads
RMI Grayscale Target Model 403GS

Note: The use of Phantom is not required during Preventive
QIQ Phantom E8370RB
Maintenance. Customer may use it as part of their Quality
Assurance Program tests.
CD-RW Media For LOGIQ 9
B/W Printer Cleaning Sheet See printer user manual for requirements
Color Printer Cleaning Sheet See printer user manual for requirements
Disposable Gloves
Cut/Chemical Resistant Gloves
Ergonomic kneel pad 5140706
10-4 Section 10-4 - Tools Required

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER10.FM
Section 10-5
System Maintenance
10-5-1 Preliminary Checks
The preliminary checks take about 15 minutes to perform. Refer to the system user documentation
whenever necessary.
Table 10-4 System Checks
Step Item Description

1 Ask & Listen Ask the customer if they have any problems or questions about the equipment.
Fill in the top of the Ultrasound Inspection Certificate (see page 28). Note all probes and system
2 Paperwork
options.
Turn the system power on and verify that all fans and peripherals turn on. Watch the displays during
3 Power up
power up to verify that no warning or error messages are displayed.
4 Probes Verify that the system properly recognizes all probes.
5 Displays Verify proper display on the monitor and touch panel.
6 Presets Backup all customer presets on an CD-RW.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER10.FM
10-5-2 Functional Checks (See Also Chapter 4)

The functional checks take about 60 minutes to perform. Refer to the system user documentation
whenever necessary.
10-5-2-1 System Checks
Table 10-5 System Functional Checks
Check Step Description
Verify basic B-Mode (2D) operation. Check the basic system controls that affect this mode
B-Mode
of operation.
CF-Mode Verify basic CF-Mode (Color Flow Mode) operation. Check the basic system controls that
affect this mode of operation.
Verify basic Doppler operation (PW and CW if available). Check the basic system controls
Doppler Modes
that affect this mode of operation.
Verify basic M-Mode operation. Check the basic system controls that affect this mode of
M-Mode
operation.
*Applicable Software Verify the basic operation of all optional modes such as Multi-Image, 3D, Contrast,
Harmonics, Cine, Stress Echo,... etc. Check the basic system controls that affect each
Options
options operation.
Use the Visual Channel Utility on the 10L probe to verify that all system xmit/recv channels
Xmit/Recv Elements
are functional.
Keyboard Test Perform the Keyboard Test Procedure to verify that all keyboard controls are OK.
Monitor Verify basic Monitor display functions. Refer to Chapter 3 of the User Manual.
Touch Panel Verify basic Touch Panel display functions. Refer to Chapter 3 of the User Manual.
Scan a gray scale phantom and use the measurement controls to verify distance and area
calculation accuracy. Refer to the User Manual, Chapter 18, for measurement accuracy
Measurements specifications.
Note: The use of Phantom is not required during Preventive Maintenance. Customer may
use it as part of their Quality Assurance Program tests.
NOTE: * Some software may be considered standard depending upon system model configuration.
10-6 Section 10-5 - System Maintenance

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER10.FM
10-5-2-2 Peripheral/Option Checks

If any peripherals or options are not part of the system configuration, the check can be omitted. Refer
to the User Manual for a list of approved peripherals/options.
Table 10-6 GE Approved Peripheral/Hardware Option Functional Checks

1 VCR Verify record/playback capabilities of the VCR. Clean heads and covers if necessary.
2 DVR Verify record/playback capabilities of the DVR. Clean heads and covers if necessary.
3 B/W Printer Verify hardcopy output of the B/W video page printer. Clean heads and covers if necessary.
4 Color Printer Verify hardcopy output of the Color video page printer. Clean heads and covers if necessary.
5 DICOM Verify that DICOM is functioning properly. Send an image to a DICOM device.
Verify that InSite is functioning properly. Ensure two-way remote communications.

6 InSite
(Warranty & Contract Customers only)
7 Camera Verify hardcopy output of the film camera. Clean as necessary.
8 Footswitch Verify that the footswitch is functioning as programed. Clean as necessary.
9 ECG Verify basic operation with customer
10-5-3 Input Power
10-5-3-1 Mains Cable Inspection
Table 10-7 Mains Cable Inspection

1 Unplug Cord Disconnect the mains cable from the wall and system.
2 Inspect Inspect it and its connectors for damage of any kind.
Verify that the LINE, NEUTRAL and GROUND wires are properly attached to the terminals, and that no
3 Verify
strands may cause a short circuit.
4 Verify Inlet connector retainer is functional.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER10.FM
10-5-4 Cleaning
10-5-4-1 General Cleaning
Table 10-8 General Cleaning
Use a fluid detergent in warm water on a soft, damp cloth to carefully wipe the entire system. Be careful
1 Console
not to get the cloth too wet so that moisture does not enter the console.
2 Probe Holder Clean probe holders (they may need to be soaked to remove excess gel).
Only use the following cleaners on the LOGIQ 9 Operator Panel:

Palmolive Dishwashing Liquid (manufactured by Colgate-Palmolive)
Sani Wipes (manufactured by Microgen Inc.)
3 Op Panel Tspray 2 (manufactured by Pharmaceutical Innovations, Inc.)
DO NOT use original formula Tspray (Tspray 1) on the operator panel. Only Tspray 2 is acceptable.
NOTE:Since various lotions can have a long term negative impact on the operator panel, hands
should be clean and free of lotion.
To clean the monitor face:

Use a soft, folded cloth. Gently wipe the monitor face.
4 CRT Do NOT use a glass cleaner that has a hydrocarbon base (such as Benzene, Methyl Alcohol or Methyl
Ethyl Ketone) on monitors with the filter (anti-glare shield). Hard rubbing will also damage the filter.
When cleaning the monitor, make sure not to scratch the monitor.
Never use thinner, benzene, alcohol (ethanol, methanol, or isopropyl alcohol), abrasive cleaners, or other
strong solvents, as these may cause damage to the cabinet or LCD panel.
DO NOT scratch or press on the panel with any sharp objects, such as pencils or pens, as this may result
in damage to the panel.
5 LCD
To clean LCD panel:
The LCD surface can be cleaned with a soft cloth, such as cotton or lens paper.
If necessary, stubborn stains can be removed by moistening part of a cloth with water to enhance its
cleaning power.
10-5-4-2 Air Filter Cleaning
Table 10-9 Air Filter Cleaning - frequency varies with your environment

Remove Filter
1 Refer to Chapter 8 for air filter location and removal instructions.
Cover
The filters can be cleaned in sprinkling water, or they can be dusted with a vacuum cleaner. If the filter
2 Clean Filter
is metal, wash and/or vacuum. If the filter is fiber or plastic, vacuum or replace.
3 Install Filter Install the clean filter.
NOTE: For your convenience or if the air filter is too dirty, replacement filters are available. Refer to
Chapter 9 for the air filter replacement part number.
10-8 Section 10-5 - System Maintenance

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER10.FM
10-5-5 Physical Inspection
Table 10-10 Physical Checks
Verify that all system labeling is present and in readable condition. Refer to the LOGIQ 9 User
1 Labeling
Manual for details.
2 Scratches & Dents Inspect the console for dents, scratches or cracks.
3 Control Panel Inspect keyboard and control panel. Note any damaged or missing items.
Control Panel Verify ease of control panel (Operator I/O Panel) movement in all acceptable directions. Ensure that
4
Movement it latches in position as required.
Check all wheels and casters for wear and verify operation of foot brake, to stop the unit from moving,
5 Wheels & Brakes
and release mechanism. Check all caster locks and caster swivel locks for proper operation.
Check all internal cable harnesses and connectors for wear and secure connector seating. Pay
Cables & special attention to footswitch assembly and probe strain or bend reliefs. Also check the wires
6
Connectors connecting the side-fan on the BEP cover to the 4-PIN to make sure the wires are not pinched or
damaged.
Shielding & Check to ensure that all EMI shielding, internal covers, air flow panels and screws are in place.
7
Covers Missing covers and hardware could cause EMI/RFI problems while scanning.
8 External I/O Check all connectors for damage and verify that the labeling is good.
9 Op Panel Lights Check for proper operation of all operator panel and TGC lights.
10 Monitor Light Check for proper operation of any monitor lights if available.
External
11 Check for proper operation of any external microphones by recording an audio test.
Microphone
10-5-6 Optional Diagnostic Checks

Optionally you can access the diagnostic software as described in Chapters 5 or 7. View the error logs
and run desired diagnostics.
10-5-6-1 View the Logs

1.) Review the system error log for any problems.
2.) Check the temperature log to see if there are any trends that could cause problems in the future.
3.) Check the Configuration Log; update if needed.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER10.FM
10-5-7 Probe Maintenance
10-5-7-1 Probe Related Checks
Table 10-11 Probe Related Checks

1 Probe Holder Clean probe holders (they may need to be soaked to remove excess gel).
Thoroughly check the system probe connectors and remove dust from inside the connector sockets
2 Probes
if necessary. Visually check for bent, damaged or missing pins
10-5-7-2 Basic Probe Care

The system user manuals and various probe handling cards provide a complete description of probe
care, maintenance, cleaning and disinfection. Ensure that you are completely familiar with the proper
care of GE probes.
Ultrasound probes can be easily damaged by improper handling. See the User Manual and probe care
cards for more details. Failure to follow these precautions can result in serious injury and equipment
damage. Failure to properly handle or maintain a probe may also void its warranty.
Any evidence of wear indicates the probe cannot be used.
Do a visual check of the probe pins and system sockets before plugging in a probe.
TEE and Interoperative probes often have special considerations and individual probe user manuals.
For TEE and Interoperative probes also refer to their separate user manuals.
10-5-7-3 Basic Probe Cleaning

Refer to the Users Manual for details on probe cleaning.
NOTE: To help protect yourself from blood borne diseases, wear approved disposable gloves. These are made
of nitrile derived from vegetable starch to prevent allergic latex reactions.
NOTE: Failure to follow the prescribed cleaning or disinfection procedures will void the probes
warranty. DO NOT soak or wipe the lens with any product not listed in the User Manual. Doing
so could result in irreparable damage to the probe. Follow care instructions that came with the
probe.
NOTE: Disinfect a defective probe before you return it. Be sure to tag the probe as being disinfected.
Section 10-6
Using a Phantom
See the Basic User Manual Customer Maintenance for information on using a phantom and quality
assurance tests.
NOTE: The use of Phantom is not required during Preventive Maintenance. Customer may use it as
part of their Quality Assurance Program tests.
10-10 Section 10-6 - Using a Phantom

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER10.FM
Section 10-7
Electrical Safety Tests
10-7-1 Safety Test Overview
The electrical safety tests in this section are based on and conform to NFPA 99 (For USA) and IEC
60601-1 Medical Equipment Safety Standards. They are intended for the electrical safety evaluation of
cord-connected, electrically operated, patient care equipment. If additional information is needed, refer
to the NFPA 99 (For USA) and IEC 60601-1 documents.
WARNING THE USER MUST ENSURE THAT THE SAFETY INSPECTIONS ARE PERFORMED AT
LEAST EVERY 12 MONTHS ACCORDING TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE PATIENT
SAFETY STANDARD IEC-EN 60601-1. ONLY TRAINED PERSONS ARE ALLOWED TO
PERFORM THE SAFETY INSPECTIONS MENTIONED ABOVE.
CAUTION To avoid electrical shock, the unit under test must not be connected to other electrical
equipment. Remove all interconnecting cables and wires. The unit under test must not be
contacted by users or patients while performing these tests.
CAUTION Possible risk of infection. Do not handle soiled or contaminated probes and other components
that have been in patient contact. Follow appropriate cleaning and disinfecting procedures
before handling the equipment.
Test the system, peripherals and probes for leakage current. Excessive leakage current can cause
injury or death in sensitive patients. High leakage current can also indicate degradation of insulation and
a potential for electrical failure. Do not use probes or equipment having excessive leakage current.
To minimize the risk that a probe may shock someone the customer should:
Not use a probe that is cracked or damaged in any way

Check probe leakage current:
* Based on your facilities QA program for surface probes
* Based on your facilities QA program for endocavitary probes
* whenever probe damage is suspected

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER10.FM
10-7-2 GE Healthcare Leakage Current Limits for LOGIQ 9

The following limits are summarized for NFPA 99 (For USA), IEC 60601-1 Medical Equipment Safety
Standards, and IEC 62353 Medical Electrical Equipment Recurrent test and test after repair of
medical electrical equipment. Measurement limits per IEC 60601-1 Medical Equipment Safety
Standards, Table IV.
Table 10-12 Chassis Leakage Current LimitsAccessible Metal Surfaces
Country Normal Condition Open Ground Open Neutral
USA 0.1 mA 0.3 mA* 0.3 mA
Other 0.1 mA 0.5 mA 0.5 mA
Table 10-13 Type BF Applied Part Leakage Current Limits - Non-Conductive (Floating) Surface
and Cavity Probes
All Countries Normal Condition Open Ground Open Neutral
AC 0.1 mA 0.5 mA 0.5 mA
DC** 0.01 mA 0.05 mA 0.05 mA
Table 10-14 Type CF Applied Part Leakage Current Limits - Surgical Probes and ECG
Connections
Country Normal Condition Open Ground Open Neutral
USA 0.01 mA 0.05mA 0.05 mA
Other 0.01 mA 0.05 mA 0.05 mA
Table 10-15 ISO (on Dale 600) and Mains Applied (on Dale 601) Limits***
Probe Type Measurement
BF 5 mA
CF 0.05 mA
NOTE: *Measurement limits per IEC 60601-1 Medical Equipment Safety Standards, Table 19.5DV.1
**Most meters (like Dale 600/601) measure a composite of the AC and DC leakage current.
***ISO (on Dale 600) and Mains Applied (on Dale 601) refer to the sink leakage test where
mains (supply) voltage is applied to the part to determine the amount of current that will pass
(or sink) to ground if a patient contacted mains voltage.
10-12 Section 10-7 - Electrical Safety Tests

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER10.FM
10-7-3 Outlet Test - Wiring Arrangement - USA & Canada

Test all outlets in the area for proper grounding and wiring arrangement by plugging in the neon outlet
tester and noting the combination of lights that are illuminated. Any problems found should be reported
to the hospital immediately and the receptacle should not be used.
Figure 10-1 Typical Outlet Tester
NOTE: No outlet tester can detect the condition where the Neutral (grounded supply) conductor and the
Grounding (protective earth) conductor are reversed. If later tests indicate high leakage currents, this
should be suspected as a possible cause and the outlet wiring should be visually inspected.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER10.FM

CAUTION Electric Shock Hazard. The patient must not be contacted to the equipment during this test
Measure the resistance from the third pin of the attachment plug to the exposed metal parts of the case.
The ground wire resistance should be less than 0.2 ohms. Reference the procedure in the IEC 601-1.1.
Figure 10-2 Ground Continuity Test
10-7-4-1 Meter Procedure

Follow these steps to test the ground wire resistance.
1.) Turn the LOGIQ 9 unit OFF.

2.) Plug the unit into the meter, and the meter into the tested AC wall outlet.
3.) Plug the black chassis cable into the meter's CHASSIS connector and attach the black chassis
cable clamp to an exposed metal part of the LOGIQ 9 unit.
4.) Set the meter's FUNCTION switch to the RESISTANCE position.
5.) Set the meter's POLARITY switch to the OFF (center) position.
6.) Measure and record the ground wire resistance.

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER10.FM
10-7-5-1 Definition
This test measures the current that would flow in a grounded person who touched accessible metal
parts of the bedside station if the ground wire should break. The test verifies the isolation of the power
line from the chassis. The meter is connected from accessible metal parts of the case to ground.
Measurements should be made with the unit On and Off, with the power line polarity Normal and
Reversed. Record the highest reading.
.
CAUTION Electric Shock Hazard. When the meter's ground switch is OPEN, don't touch the unit!
CAUTION Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity and the status of Neutral when the unit
is powered ON. Be sure to turn the unit power OFF before switching them using the POLARITY
switch and/or the NEUTRAL switch. Otherwise, the unit may be damaged.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER10.FM
10-7-5-2 Generic Procedure

The test verifies the isolation of the power line from the chassis. The testing meter is connected from
accessible metal parts of the case to ground. Measurements should be made with the unit ON and OFF,
with the power line polarity Normal and Reversed. Record the highest reading of current.
Figure 10-3 Set Up for Chassis Source Leakage Current,

IEC 601-1 Clause 19 - Continuos Leakage Currents and
Patient, Auxiliary Currents
When using the Microguard or a similar test instrument, its power plug may be inserted into the wall
outlet and the equipment under test is plugged into the receptacle on the panel of the meter. This places
the meter in the grounding conductor and the current flowing from the case to ground will be indicated
in any of the current ranges. The maximum allowable limit for chassis source leakage is shown in
Table 10-12.
7.) Follow the test conditions described for respective test points shown in Table 10-16.
Table 10-16 Chassis Leakage Current Test Condition
TEST CONDITION
1 Mounting screw for probe receptacle
2 caster support
3 Mounting screw for CRT housing
4 Mounting screw for peripheral plugged into unit
5 Mounting screw for other peripheral powered by unit
8.) Keep a record of the results with other hard copies of Planned Maintenance data kept on site.

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER10.FM
10-7-5-3 Data Sheet for Chassis Source Leakage Current

The test passes when all readings measure less than the value shown in Table 10-12. Record all data
on the Planned Maintenance Inspection Certificate.
Table 10-17 Typical Data Sheet for Chassis Source Leakage Current
Tester Neutral Test 1

Tester Polarity or Ground Probe Test 2 Test 3 Optional Optional
Unit Power Switch Switch Connector caster CRT Test 4 Test 5
Enter Name of tested peripheral here:
ON NORM OPEN
ON NORM CLOSED
ON REV OPEN
ON REV CLOSED
OFF NORM OPEN
OFF NORM CLOSED
OFF REV OPEN
OFF REV CLOSED
10-7-6 Isolated Patient Lead (Source) LeakageLead to Ground
10-7-6-1 Definition
This test measures the current which would flow to ground from any of the isolated ECG leads. The
meter simulates a patient who is connected to the monitoring equipment and is grounded by touching
some other grounded surface. Measurements should be made with the ground open and closed, with
power line polarity normal and reversed, and with the ultrasound console Off and On. For each
combination the operating controls, such as the lead switch, should be operated to find the worst case
condition.
CAUTION Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity when the unit is powered ON. Be sure
to turn the unit power OFF before switching the polarity using the POLARITY switch. Otherwise,
the unit may be damaged.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER10.FM
10-7-6-2 Generic Procedure

Measurements should be made with the ground open and closed, with power line polarity normal and
reversed, and with the unit Off and On. For each combination, the operating controls such as the lead
switch should be operated to find the worst case condition.
Appliance power switch

(use both "off" and "on" positions) Patient lead selector switch (if any)
The connection is at service entrance (activated as required)
or on the supply side of a separately
Polarity reversing switch
derived system
(use both positions) Patient connected leads
Appliance
H (Black)
H
POWER
N
OUTLET
N (White)
Internal
G
circuitry Between each patient
lead and ground
G (Green)
Building Insulating surface

ground
Current meter
Grounding contact switch (use in both H = Hot
"open" and "closed" positions) N = Neutral (grounded)
G = Grounding conductor
Figure 10-4 Test Circuit for Measuring Non-Isolated

Patient Leads
Table 10-18 Testing Power Conditions
ECG Power Meters Polarity Switch Meters Neutral Switch

ON NORM CLOSED
ON NORM OPEN
ON REVERSE CLOSED
ON REVERSE OPEN
OFF NORM CLOSED
OFF NORM OPEN
OFF REVERSE CLOSED
OFF REVERSE OPEN

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER10.FM
10-7-7 Isolated Patient Lead (Source) LeakageLead to Lead

Reference the procedure in the IEC 60601-1. When using the Dale 600, switch the meters function
selector to the LEAD-LEAD position. Select and test each of the five ECG lead positions (except ALL)
on the LEAD selector, testing each to the power condition combinations found in the table. Record the
highest leakage current measured.
10-7-8 Isolated Patient Lead (Sink) Leakage-Isolation Test

Reference the procedure in the IEC 60601-1. When using the Dale 600, switch the meters function
selector to the LEAD-ISO. Select the ALL position on the lead selector. Depress the rocker switch to
ISO TEST to test lead isolation.
CAUTION Line voltage is applied to the ECG leads during this test. To avoid possible electric shock
hazard, the system being tested must not be touched by patients, users or anyone while the ISO
TEST switch is depressed.
NOTE: It is not necessary to test each lead individually or power condition combinations as required in
previous tests.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER10.FM
10-7-8-1 Data Sheet for ECG Leakage Current

The test passes when all readings measure less than the value shown in the table below. Record all
data on the Planned Maintenance Inspection Certificate.
Table 10-19 Maximum Allowance Limit for ECG Leakage Current
Maximum
Allowance Limit
AC Power GROUND
Source GROUND OPEN CLOSED
Patient Lead to Ground Leakage Current Test 115V 10uA 10uA
and
Patient Lead to Lead Leakage Current Test 220/240V 500uA 10uA
Table 10-20 Maximum Allowance Limit for ECG Leakage Current
AC Power Maximum
Source Allowance Limit
115V 20uA
Patient Lead Isolation Current Test
220/240V 5mA
Table 10-21 Typical Data Sheet for ECG Leakage Current
Tester Tester Tester Lead Selector

ECG Polarity Ground
Power Switch Switch RL RA LA LL C
ON NORM CLOSED
ON REVERSE CLOSED
ON NORM OPEN
ON REVERSE OPEN
OFF NORM CLOSED
OFF REVERSE CLOSED
OFF NORM OPEN
OFF REVERSE OPEN

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER10.FM
10-7-9 Probe Leakage Current Test
10-7-9-1 Definition
This test measures the current that would flow to ground from any of the probes through a patient who
is being scanned and becomes grounded by touching some other grounded surface.
NOTE: Some leakage current is expected on each probe, depending on its design. Small variations in probe
leakage currents are normal from probe to probe. Other variations will result from differences in line
voltage and test lead placement.
It is abnormal if no leakage current is measured. If no leakage current is detected, check the
configuration of the test equipment.
10-7-9-2 Test Equipment
Table 10-22 Test Equipment kits (Chapter 10 LOGIQ 9 Proprietary Service Manual)
Kit Description Contents
ELECTRICAL SAFETY ANALYZER, DALE, MODEL 601 for 120V unit

Dale 601 - Vendor MODEL 600/100 8FT CHASSIS GROUND CABLE
ULTRASOUND SAFETY Vendor MODEL 600/102 6FT SALINE BATH GROUND CABLE
46-285652G1 ANALYZER FIELD KIT Vendor MODEL 600/202 ULTRASOUND PROBE ADAPTER
- Vendor MODEL 600/600 SOFT CARRYING CASE
for 120V unit Vendor MODEL 600/900 OPERATORS MANUAL
Vendor MODEL 600/901 LMINATED OPERATORS GUIDE
ELECTRICAL SAFETY ANALYZER, DALE, MODEL 601E for 220V unit

Dale 601E - Vendor MODEL 600/100 8FT CHASSIS GROUND CABLE
Vendor MODEL 600/101 16FT CHASSIS GROUND CABLE
ULTRASOUND SAFETY
Vendor MODEL 600/103 8FT CHASSIS GROUND PROBE
46-328406G2 ANALYZER FIELD KIT
- Vendor MODEL 600/200 8FT EXTERNAL LEAKAGE GROUND CABLE
#20 WIRE W/MINIGATOR CLIPS, 2 Ft
for 220V unit
CARRYING CASE and foam padding
Vendor MODEL 600/900 OPERATORS MANUAL
LOGIQ FAMILY PROBE ADAPTER

ULTRASOUND PROBE Vendor MODEL 600/202 ULTRASOUND PROBE ADAPTER
2113015
LEAKAGE ADAPTER KIT Vendor MODEL 600/203 RADIUS/SONOCHROME PROBE LEAKAGE
CURRENT ADAPTER

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER10.FM
10-7-9-2 Test Equipment (contd)
Table 10-23 Test Equipment and Accessory Description
Dale Part number Accessory Name Picture Description
Used on DALE601/601E to measure

Vendor MODEL earth resistance and enclosure
600/100 CHASSIS CABLE leakage current. Also used as
46-285647P2 reference lead for external
measurement.
Black coil cord with extended

length and black grips.
Also referred to as Saline Probe or

Saline Bath Ground Cable.
Measures earth resistance and
enclosure leakage current. Also used
Vendor MODEL for grounding saline baths for
600/102 CHASSIS GROUND PROBE
isolation testing of probes.
46-285647P4
Used on DALE601/601E. This probe
may be substituted for the 600/100
Black coil cord with needle probe Chassis Cable, and used as a probe
for testing receptacles and for instead of a clamp.
tight spaces.
Standard auxiliary cable for external

measurements of leakage current
and voltage gradient between two
surfaces.
Vendor MODEL
Used on DALE601/601E to measure:
600/200 ISO/EXTERNAL LEAKAGE
CABLE Point-to-Point Leakage Current
Probe and Transducer Isolation
46-285647P6
Current
May only be connected to the female
connector of the Analyzer, labeled
Black coiled cord with red grips. EXTERNAL
Vendor MODEL Use during M.A.P. or Isolation test

600/202 ULTRASOUND LOGIQ FAMILY
(see Chapter 10 - Meter procedure
ADAPTER
using probe adapter)
2107545-2

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER10.FM
10-7-9-3 Generic procedure on Leakage Current

Measurements should be made with the ground open and closed, with power line mains polarity normal,
and with the unit Off and On. For each combination, the probe must be active to find the worst case
condition.
SALINE
Figure 10-5 Set Up for Probe Leakage Current
10-7-9-4 Meter procedure using probe adapter

The ultrasound probes imaging area is immersed in a solution along with a grounding probe from the
test meter to complete the current path. The solution is a mixture of water and salt. The salt adds free
ions to the water, making it conductive. Use a mixture of 1 quart of water with one or more grams of
table salt, mixed thoroughly.
Follow these steps to test each probe for leakage current:
1.) Turn the LOGIQ 9 unit OFF.

2.) Plug the units mains power cord into the test meter, and plug the test meter into the tested AC wall
outlet.
3.) Plug the Chassis Ground Probe (saline probe) into the test meter's CHASSIS connector.
4.) Set the test meter's FUNCTION switch to CHASSIS (Dale 600) or "ENCLOSURE LEAKAGE"
(Dale 601).
5.) Connect the probe to be tested to the LOGIQ 9 unit.
6.) Put the saline probe and the probes probe face (imaging area of the probe) into the saline bath.
CAUTION To avoid probe damage and possible electric shock, do not immerse probes into any liquid
beyond the level indicated in the probe users manual. Do not touch the probe, conductive liquid
or any part of the unit under test while the LIFT GROUND switch is depressed.
7.) Power ON the LOGIQ 9 unit.

8.) After the LOGIQ 9 unit has completed the boot process, select the probe to be tested so it is the
active probe.
9.) Depress the LIFT GROUND rocker switch and record the highest current reading.
10.)Follow the test conditions described in Table 10-24 for every probe.
The test passes when all readings measure less than the values shown in Table 10-13 and
Table 10-14.
11.)Keep a record of the results with other hard copies of Planned Maintenance data using Table 10-24.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER10.FM
10-7-9-4 Meter procedure using probe adapter (contd)
CAUTION Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity or the status of the Neutral when the
Ultrasound unit is powered on.
Power off
Power off the Ultrasound unit, allow the stored energy to bleed down, and turn the circuit
P
breaker off BEFORE switching the POLARITY switch and/or the NEUTRAL switch on the leakage
meter to avoid possible power supply damage.
Table 10-24 Typical Data Sheet For Probe Source Leakage Current
Probe Tested:
Tester Power Polarity Tester NEUTRAL Tester GROUND

Unit Power Switch Switch Switch Measurement
Start with System Powered OFF

OFF NORMAL OPEN CLOSED
OFF NORMAL OPEN OPEN
OFF NORMAL CLOSED CLOSED
OFF NORMAL CLOSED OPEN
Open Neutral first, then attempt Power ON

ON NORMAL OPEN CLOSED
ON NORMAL OPEN OPEN
Close Neutral. Power System ON, and wait until Probe under test is active, before continuing
ON NORMAL CLOSED CLOSED
ON NORMAL CLOSED OPEN

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER10.FM
10-7-9-5 Meter Procedure Using Probe Adapter to Measure Probe Isolation (Sink) Current
The Dale 600/600E provides a method for testing probes independently from the system. The meter
utilizes a probe adapter to apply a test potential commonly to all connector pins.
The ultrasound probes imaging area is immersed in a solution along with a grounding probe from the
test meter to complete the current path. The solution is a mixture of water and salt. The salt adds free
ions to the water, making it conductive. Use a mixture of 1 quart of water with one or more grams of
table salt, mixed thoroughly.
Follow these steps to test each probe for leakage current.
1.) Plug the test meter into the tested AC wall outlet.
2.) Plug the Chassis Ground Probe (saline probe in diagram) into the test meter's CHASSIS
connector.
3.) Connect the probe to be tested to the LOGIQ Family Probe Adapter.
4.) Plug the LOGIQ Family Probe Adapter into the test meter's connector marked EXTERNAL.
Figure 10-6 Probe Isolation (Sink) Current Test

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER10.FM
10-7-9-5Meter Procedure Using Probe Adapter to Measure Probe Isolation (Sink) Current (contd)
5.) Set the meter's FUNCTION switch to EXTERNAL (DALE 600) or Mains on Applied Parts (M.A.P.)
(DALE 601) position.
6.) Put the Chassis Ground Probe and the probes probe face (imaging area of the probe) into the
saline bath.
CAUTION To avoid probe damage and possible electric shock, do not immerse probes into any liquid
beyond the level indicated in the probe users manual. Do not touch the probe, conductive liquid
or any part of the unit under test while the ISO Test/MAP switch is depressed.
7.) Depress the ISO TEST (DALE 600) or M.A.P. (DALE 601) ROCKER SWITCH and record the
highest current reading.
8.) Test every probe and record in Table 10-25 the test results for every probe.
The test passes when all readings measure less than the values in Table 10-15.
9.) Keep a record of the results with other hard copies of Planned Maintenance data.
.
Table 10-25 Probes Tested for Isolation (Sink) Current
Probe Tested Measurement with ISO/Mains Applied

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER10.FM
Section 10-8
When There's Too Much Leakage Current...
CHASSIS FAILS
Check the ground on the power cord and plug for continuity. Ensure the ground is not broken, frayed,
or intermittent. Replace any defective part.
Tighten all grounds. Ensure star washers are under all ground studs.
Inspect wiring for bad crimps, poor connections, or damage.
Test the wall outlet; verify it is grounded and is free of other wiring abnormalities. Notify the user or
owner to correct any deviations. As a work around, check the other outlets to see if they could be used
instead.
NOTE: No outlet tester can detect the condition where the white neutral wire and the green grounding
wire are reversed. If later tests indicate high leakage currents, this should be suspected as a
possible cause and the outlet wiring should be visually inspected.
PROBE FAILS
Test the probe in another connector to isolate if the fault lies with the probe or the scanner.
NOTE: Each probe will have some amount of leakage, dependent on its design. Small variations in
probe leakage currents are normal from probe to probe. Other variations will result from
differences in line voltage and test lead placement. The maximum allowable leakage current for
body surface contact probe differs from inter-cavity probe. Be sure to enter the correct probe
type in the appropriate space on the check list.
If excessive leakage current is slot dependent, inspect the system connector for bent pins, poor
connections, and ground continuity.
If the problem remains with the probe, replace the probe.
PERIPHERAL FAILS
Tighten all grounds. Ensure star washers are under all ground studs.
Inspect wiring for bad crimps, poor connections, or damage.
STILL FAILS
If all else fails, begin isolation by removing the probes, external peripherals, then the on board ones,
one at a time while monitoring the leakage current measurement.
NEW UNIT
If the leakage current measurement tests fail on a new unit and if situation can not be corrected, submit
a Safety Failure Report to document the system problem. Remove unit from operation.
ECG FAILS
Inspect cables for damage or poor connections.

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER10.FM
10-8-1 ULTRASOUND INSPECTION CERTIFICATE
ELECTRICAL SAFETY
Max Value Value
Electrical Test Performed Allowed Measured OK? Comments
Outlet (correct ground &wiring config.)
System Ground Continuity
Chassis Source Leakage Current - Probe
Chassis Source Leakage Current - Caster
Chassis Source Leakage Current - CRT
Patient Lead Source Leakage

(Lead to Ground)

(Lead to Lead)

(Isolation)
Peripheral 1 Leakage Current
Peripheral 1Ground Continuity
PROBES
Probe Number Max Value Max Value

(from previous page) Allowed Measured OK? Comments
Probe 1:
Probe 2:
Probe 3:
Probe 4:
Probe 5:
Probe 6:
Probe 7:
Probe 8:
Probe 9:
Final Check. All system covers are in place. System scans with all probes as expected.
Accepted by: ______________________________________________________________________
10-28 Section 10-8 - When There's Too Much Leakage Current...

1/18/10
GE HEALTHCARE
CHAPTER10.FM
Section 10-9
Site Log
Table 10-26 Site Log
Date Service person Problem Comments

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
CHAPTER10.FM
Table 10-26 Site Log (Continued)
Date Service person Problem Comments
10-30 Section 10-9 - Site Log

1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
L9_IX.FM
INDEX
Numerics Brake
3-D Externals, 9-34 Adjustment, 6-15
Brake Arm
Adjustment, 6-13
A Brake Pedal
AC Power PWB, 5-72 warning, 3-2
Acoustic Noise Output, 3-11 Brakes
Acquisition Diagnostics, 7-19 Functional Checks, 4-28
Adjustment
Z-Release Cable, 6-8
AGP Video Card - DVI Video to the DGVIC Card, 5-35, C
5-40 Calibration Utilities, 7-23
Air Flow Control, 5-79 CD-ROM
Air Flow Distribution, 5-79 Handling Tips, 8-18
Application Software Media Requirements, 8-18
Upgrading, 8-49, 8-61 CE Compliance, 1-22
Application Software Load, 8-44 CFM and PWD Modes
Automatic Troubleshooting, 7-19 Functional Checks, 4-15
Common Diagnostics, 7-30
Configuration, 5-88
B Connecting USB Line Printer, 3-24
B/M Mode Processor (BMP) Board, 5-18 Connectivity
B/M-Mode Checks Settings, 8-17
Functional Checks, 4-14 Worksheet, 3-22
Back End Processor, 5-22, , 5-27, 5-34, 5-39 Console Lock Assembly Replacement, 8-70
BEP3, 5-34, , 5-39 Console Weight, 3-11
Inputs, 5-25 Contact Information, 1-23
Outputs, 5-26 Control Panel, 4-3
Theory, 5-22, 5-27, 5-34, 5-39 Customer Assistance, 1-23
Backup
Media, 8-18
Patient Database, 4-22 D
Preset Configurations, 4-22 Dangerous Procedure Warnings, 1-18
Basic Measurements Diagnostics, 5-86, , 7-18
Functional Checks, 4-16 Acquisition, 7-19
Battery, 8-12, , 8-16 Common, 7-30
BEP, 8-7, 8-10, 8-13 Direction Lock
Battery Pack Replacement, 8-4 Functional Checks, 4-28
Internal Storage Devices, 5-36, 5-41 Disposal, 8-12, 8-16
Power Off Path, 5-45 DVD Media Requirements, 8-18
Power On, 5-44
Power On Path, 5-44
BEP3 E
Inputs, 5-37, 5-42 EBM Board, 5-19
Outputs, 5-38, 5-43 Electrical
Block Diagram requirements, 2-2
Simple System, 5-5 Safety, 1-17
BMP Board Electrostatic Discharge Warning, 1-22
General Description, 5-18 EMI Protection, 3-7
Boot Up, 3-8, 4-6
Index Index - I
1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
L9_IX.FM
EQ Board I
Basic Functions, 5-17 I/O Ports, 3-17
General Description, 5-16 Image Management
Equalization (EQ) Board, 5-16 Functional Checks, 4-13
Ethernet Signal, 5-67 Guide, 8-18
External I/O, 5-65 Inrush Current, 2-2
Bi-directional Signals, 5-66 Installation
Input Signals, 5-65 average time, 3-2
Location in the Unit, 5-65 Internal I/O, 5-55
Output Signals, 5-67 Connections, 5-57
EZBackup/Move, 8-18, 8-19 connections, 5-57
Fuses, 5-58
Inputs, 5-59
F Jumpers and Dip-switches, 5-58
Facility Features LEDs, 5-58
desired, 2-7 Location in the Unit, 5-58
required, 2-7 Outputs, 5-61
Frog Leg Internal Storage Devices, 5-36, 5-41
Angle Adjustment, 8-92
Front End Processor
Power Supply Board, 5-8 L
Simple Theory, 5-7 Label Locations, 1-18
Front End Subsystem, 5-9 LEDs SCB, 5-14
Functional Checks, 4-1 Line Printer
B/M-Mode Checks, 4-14 Connecting, 3-24
Basic Measurements, 4-16 Loading Software
Brakes, 4-25, 4-28 Application, 8-44
CFM and PWD Modes, 4-15 Base Image, 8-26
Control Panel, 4-3 Login Screen for Global Service User Interface, 5-80
Image Management, 4-13 Logs, 5-83
Locks, 4-28
Mechanical, 4-25
Monitor Display, 4-5 M
Peripherals, 4-24 Managing Patient Data and Presets, 8-18
Probes/Connector Usage, 4-11 Mechanical Checks
Required Equipment, 4-1 Operator I/O, 4-25
Touch Panel, 4-4 Mechanical Descriptions, 5-76
Monitor, 5-76
Top Console Positioning, 5-76
G Mechanical Safety, 1-16
Gas Shock Replacement, 8-74 Meter Procedure Using Probe Adapter, 10-23
Gas Spring Models Covered, 1-3, 9-2
Adjustment, 6-8
Gathering Trouble Data, 7-3
General Cleaning, 10-8
Global Service User Interface, 5-80
Error Logs Page, 5-82
Service Home Page, 5-81
Global Service User Interface (GSUI), 5-80
H
Hazard Icons, 1-10
Human Safety, 1-16
Index - II -
1/18/10
GE H EALTHCARE
L9_IX.FM
Modem, 5-69 Probes/Connector Usage

Inputs/Outputs, 5-69 Functional Checks, 4-11
LEDs, 5-70 Product Icons, 1-11
Location in the Unit, 5-69 PS Battery Operation, 5-35, 5-40
Monitor, 5-64
Counter-balance Adjustment, 6-4
Tilt, 6-4 R
Tilt Adjustment, 6-4 Rear Wheel Brakes
Monitor Display Adjustment, 6-16
Functional Checks, 4-5 Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment, 3-4
Regulatory, 6-1
Release Lock Assembly
O Replacement Procedure, 8-70, , 8-72
Operator I/O RF Amplifier Board
Emergency Release Procedure, 6-12 Theory, 5-10
Operator Panel
position warning, 3-2
S
Safety
P reminders, 3-3
P4 Key Function, 7-13 Safety Considerations, 1-16
Patient I/O, 5-54 Scan Control Board
PC Diagnostics, 7-31 High Level Features, 5-14
(Interactive Tests), 7-32 Scan Control Board (SCB), 5-13
PCI Cards, 5-35, , 5-40 SCB LED, 5-14
PCI DGVIC and ADD Cards, 5-35, 5-40 Screen Captures, 7-13
PCVIC Card, 5-23, 5-28 Service Adjustments, 6-1
Peripherals, 5-68 Service Home Page, 5-81
Functional Checks, 4-24 Service Login, 5-80
Physical Dimensions, 3-11 Service Manual
PM INSPECTION CERTIFICATE, 10-28 Purpose of, 1-1
Power Distribution, 5-71 Service Platform, 5-79
Basic Overall AC, 5-71 Shut Down
Power Off, 3-9 Procedure, 4-9
Procedure, 4-9 Shutdown, 3-9
Power On, 3-8, 4-6 Software
Power Requirements, 2-2 Application Load, 8-44
electrical, 2-2 Base Image Load, 8-26
stability, 2-3 System Features, 4-3
Power Stability Requirements, 2-3 System Maintenance, 10-5
Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - System Manufacturer, 1-24
BEP 2, 8-7 System Setup, 8-65
Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure -
BEP 3, 8-10, 8-13
Power-up Procedures T
Voltage Settings, 3-6 Theory
Preparing the Unit for Installation, 3-6 Front End SubSystem, 5-9
Preset Data, 8-18 General, 5-2
Probe RF Amplifier Board, 5-10
Leakage Current Test, 10-21 XDIF Board, 5-9
Probe Connector Cleaning, 10-10 Time Delay (TD) Boards, 5-12
Probe Leakage Current Test, 10-21 Top Console, 5-63
Probes, 3-21 See Operator I/O, 5-63
Top Plane Board, 5-9
Index - III
1/18/10
P
GE H
R E L I M I N A R Y
EALTHCARE
L9_IX.FM
Touch Panel
Functional Checks, 4-3, 4-4
Trouble Image with Logs, 7-4
Troubleshooting
Gathering Trouble Data, 7-3
Screen Captures, 7-13
Trouble Image with Logs, 7-4
Vital System Information, 7-3
U
Unpacking the Equipment, 3-4
Upgrading Application Software, 8-49, 8-61
USB Adapter Setup, 5-32
User-Defined Backup Protocols, 8-22
Utilities, 5-89
V
Video
Specifications, 3-20
Voltage Settings, 3-6
W
Warnings and Cautions, 1-16
X
XDIF Board
Theory, 5-9
Z
Z-Release Cable
Adjustment, 6-8
Index - IV -
2002-2010, General Electric Company.
GE Healthcare - GE Medical Systems Ultrasound and Primary Care Diagnostics, LLC.
9900 Innovation Drive
Wauwatosa, Wisconsin 53226
USA
www.gehealthcare.com

Logiq 9 SM

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Logiq 9 SM

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

P R E L I M I N A R Y 1/18/10

Part Number: 2294853-100

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.

CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE NEST DISPONIBLE QUEN ANGLAIS.

DIESES KUNDENDIENST-HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN ENGLISCHER

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SLO EXISTE EN INGLS.

ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTNCIA TCNICA S SE ENCONTRA DISPONVEL EM

IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE DISPONIBILE SOLTANTO IN

KESOLEV TEENINDUSJUHEND ON SAADAVAL AINULT INGLISE KEELES.

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

ESSI JNUSTUHANDBK ER EINGNGU FANLEG ENSKU.

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

DENNE SERVICEMANUAL FINDES KUN P ENGELSK.

DEZE ONDERHOUDSHANDLEIDING IS ENKEL IN HET ENGELS

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

DENNE SERVICEHNDBOKEN FINNES BARE P ENGELSK.

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

DEN HR SERVICEHANDBOKEN FINNS BARA TILLGNGLIG P ENGELSKA.

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT - FOR USA ONLY

OMISSIONS & ERRORS

SERVICE SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

List of Effected Pages(LOEP)

Pages Revision Pages Revision Pages Revision

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Service Manual Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2

Important Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Dangerous Procedure Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 18

Lockout/Tagout Requirements (For USA Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 21

Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 21

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 22

xii Table of Contents

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

General Console Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Facility Needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Table of Contents xiii

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 4

Preparing for Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 6

Completing the Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 8

xiv Table of Contents

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Connectivity Setup Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 22

Before Starting a Software Upgrade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 23

Loading Base Image Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 23

Loading Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 23

Connecting USB Line Printers - Black/White and Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 24

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

xvi Table of Contents

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

For BT03 and prior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 18

Software Configuration Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 23

Mechanical Function Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 25

Table of Contents xvii

DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL

Front End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 7

Back End Processor (BEP 1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 22

xviii Table of Contents